Nokia N78 User Manual
Nokia N78 User Guide
DECLARATIO N OF CONFOR MITY Hereby, NOKIA CORP ORATION declares th at this RM-23 5 product is in compliance with the essential requi r ements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/ 5/EC. A copy of the Declaratio n of Conformity can be fo und at h ttp://www.nokia .com/phones/ declaration_of_conformit y/. é 2008 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connect ing People, Nokia Origi n al Enhancements logos, Nseries, N78, Navi , N-Gage, Visual Radi o, and Nokia Care are trademarks or r egistered trademarks of Nokia Co rporation. Noki a tune is a soun d mark of N okia Corp oration. Other product and company n ames m entioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective o wners. Reproduct ion, transf er, distrib ution, or st orage of part or al l of the contents in this docu ment in any form wi thout the prior written permission of Nokia is proh ibited. This product in cludes software licensed f rom Symbian S oftware Ltd é 1998-2007. Symb ian and S ymbian OS a re trademark s of Symb ian Ltd. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input softwar e Copyright é 1997-2007. Tegic Co mmunications, Inc. All ri ghts reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsys tems, Inc. Portions of the Noki a Maps software are co pyright é 1996-2002 T he FreeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under th e MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portf olio License (i) fo r person al and noncommercial use in co nnection with information which has b een encoded in compl iance with the MPEG- 4 Visual Standar d by a cons umer engaged in a personal and no ncommercial ac tivity and (ii) f or use in connect ion with MPEG-4 video provid ed by a licensed vid eo provider . No license is granted or s hall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that rel ated to promotio nal, internal, and commercial uses, may be ob tained from MPEG LA, LL C. See http://www. mpegla.com. Nokia opera tes a policy of ongoing devel opment. Nokia reserves the righ t to make cha nges and impro vements to a ny of the pr oduct s descri bed in this do cument without prior notice. TO THE MAXI MUM EXTENT PE RMITTED BY A PPLICAB LE LAW, UNDER N O CI RCUMSTANCES SHAL L NOKIA OR A NY OF ITS L ICENSORS BE RES PONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQU E NTIAL OR INDIRECT D AMAGES HOWSOEVER CAU SED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVID ED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS RE Q U I RE D B Y A P PL I C A B L E L AW , N O W A R R A NT I E S O F A N Y K I N D , EI T H E R E X P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT ED TO, THE IM PLIED WARR ANTIES OF ME RCHANTABILIT Y AND FITNESS FO R A PARTICULA R PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATI ON TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS O F THIS DOCUM ENT. NOKIA R ESERVES THE RIGHT TO RE VISE THIS D OCUMENT OR WITHDRAW I T AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIO R NOTIC E.
The third-party applications provid ed wit h your device may have been created and may be owned by per sons or ent ities not affili ated with or rela ted to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectua l property rights to the third-party a pplica tions. As such, N okia does not ta ke any r esponsibility f or end-user support, functionality of the applications, or the info rmation in the applications or thes e material s. Nokia does not pro vide any warra nty for the thi rd-party application s. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLE DGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS AR E PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRAN TY OF ANY KI ND, EXPRESS OR IMP LIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTE D BY APPLICABLE L AW. YOU FURTHER ACK NOWLEDGE THAT NE ITHER N OKIA NOR ITS AFFIL IATES MAKE AN Y REPRESENT ATIONS OR W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED , INCLUD ING BUT N OT LIMITED TO WARR ANTIES OF TI TLE, MERC HANTABILI TY OR FITNE SS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPO SE, OR THAT THE APP LICATIONS W ILL NOT INFRING E ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARK S, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of particular products an d applications and services for these products may vary by region. Pleas e check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availabilit y of language opt ions. Export controls This device may contain commo dities , technology or softwa re subject to export la ws and regulations from the US and other countr ies. Diversion contra ry to law is prohibited.
Contents For your s afe ty . .......... ........ ........ ........ ........ ....... 10 About your device........... .................. .................. .................. ...11 Network services............................................ ...................... ...12 Enhancements, batteries, and chargers................................12 Get started...... ............. .......... ............. .......... ......13 Keys and parts (front)..... .......... ............... ............... ............ .....13 Keys and parts (bac k)................................................... ...........14 Insert (U)SIM card an d battery............... ............. .............. .... .14 Switch the device on...............................................................15 Charge the battery. ..................... ...................... .......................16 Wrist strap.......... ...................... ...................... ...................... ....16 Get connected......... ......... ........ ......... ........ .........17 Find help............. ........... .......... ........... .......... .....18 Instructions inside - In-device help................. ........... ....... ....18 Software updates......................................... .......................... .19 Settings... ................. ...................... .................. ................. ........19 Access codes..................... ............................... ........... ..............19 Prolong battery life.............................. ....................... ...... ......20 Free memory......................................... ...................................21 Your device....... ............ ................... ............... ....22 Antenna locations. .................. ................... ................... ........ ...22 Welcome......................... .............................. ........................... .22 Nokia Switch................................................. ...........................2 3 Transfer content............................. ................... ...................2 3 Synchronise, retrieve , or send content............................... 24 Display indicators.................................................... ................2 4 Shortcuts............................................. ............................. ........26 Lock the keypad...................... .................................................2 6 Navi⢠wheel.... .................. ................. .................. .............. ......26 Multimedia menu............................... .......................... ...........2 7 Mobile search. .......................................................................... 28 Games.......................................................................................2 8 Headset...................... .......................... ............................... ...... 29 Volume and loudspeaker control............. ..............................2 9 Offline prof ile...........................................................................30 Fast downloading............. ............................. ..........................3 0 Personalise your device........ ........... ........ ......... .30 Themes.....................................................................................3 1 Change the look of your device...........................................3 1 Audio th emes........................................................................32 Set tones......... .................... .................... ................... ...............32 3-D tones..................................................................................3 3 Modify the standby mode. ......................................................3 3 Modify the main men u.................................. ..........................3 4 Positioning (GPS)............... .................. ...............35 About GPS................................................................................ .34 Assisted GPS (A-GPS).......................................... ..................... .35 Get start e d... ......................... ..... ................. ..... ..... ................. ...18 Additi o n al ap plica tions.................... ............................. ..........1 8
Hold your device correctly.......................... .................... ........36 Tips on creating a GPS connection................. ........................36 Position requests ....................................... ..............................37 Landmarks....... ..................... ........................... .........................38 GPS data... ..................... ................ .................... ................. .......38 Route guidance......................................................... ............39 Retrieve position information.............................................39 Trip meter...... .......................... ............................ ..................39 Maps............................................................... ....40 About Maps...... ................. ................. .............. ................. ........40 Browse maps.. .............. .................. .................. .............. ..........41 Download maps ............................... ........................................42 Find a place............................................................................ ..43 Plan a route........ ....................................... ...............................43 Extra services for Maps.............. ................................... ...........44 Navigation................ .............................................................44 Guides........................................... .........................................45 Music folder...................... ..................................45 Music player..... ............... .......... ............... .............. ............... ....45 Play a song or a podcast episode........................................46 Music menu.......................... ................................ .................47 Playlists.................... ............................................... ...............47 Podcasts............. ............................... ..................... ................48 Home network with music p layer...................... .................48 Transfer music to your device......... .............. ............. .........48 Transfer music from PC.............. .................. .................. ....49 Transfer with Window s Media Player............ ........... .......49 Nokia Music Store............................................. .......................50 FM transmitter............................... ................................... .......50 About the FM transmitter. .................... .................... ............50 Play a song using FM transmi tter.................................. ......51 FM transmitter sett ings................................................. .......51 Nokia Podcasting............. .............................. ..........................52 Podcasting se ttings.................................................... ..........52 Search p odcasts.......................... .......................... ................53 Directories.............................................. ...............................53 Downloads... .................. ....................... ......................... ........54 Play and mana ge podcasts............................ ......................54 Radio applications........ ...........................................................55 Visual Radio...... ..................................................... ................55 Listen to the radio. ............... ............ ............... ............... ....55 View visual content.................... .............. ............. ............56 Saved stations................................................................... .56 Visual Radio settings .............. ............... ................ ............56 Nokia Internet Radio................................. ...........................57 Lis ten to i nte rne t r adi o st ati ons ...... ............ .......... ........ ..57 Favourite stations..............................................................57 Search for stations.............................................................58 Station directory................................ ................................5 8 Internet radi o settings....................... ......................... ......58 Camera................... .................... ................. .......59 About the camera.................................................................... 59 Activate the camera.................... ................ ................ ............59 Image captu re.............. .................... ............... .................... .....60 Still image camera indica tors..............................................60 Active toolbar....................................... .................................60 Capture images ........................................... ..........................61 Location information .............. .............. ............... ............ .....62 After taking a pictu re......... ....................... .................. .........62 Flash.......... .............................................................................63 Scenes................................................................................... .63
Take pictures in a sequen ce....... .......... ........... ............. .......63 You in the pictureâÂÂself-time r................................. ............64 Tip s on tak ing goo d p hot ogr aphs ...... .......... ........... ........ ...64 Video recording..................... ............................. .....................65 Video capture in dicators. .....................................................65 Record videos................................. .......................................66 After recording a video................. .................. ............... ......66 Camera settings .......................................................................67 Still image camera set tings................ ............... ................ ..67 Setup settings âÂÂadjust colour and light ing............. ..........68 Video settings............................... ............................ ............69 Photos............................ ............................. .......69 About Photos.... .............. .......... ............... ............... ........... .......69 View images and videos............................................ .............70 View and edit file details.............................. ..........................70 Organise images an d videos............... ............ ............ ...........71 Active toolbar......... ........................ ............................ ..............71 Albums........................ .................................. ............................72 Tags............ ................. ..................... ................. ..................... ...72 Slide show................................................................................72 Edit images... ................... ................... .............. ................... .....73 Image editor......... ............... ................ ........... ................ .......73 Crop image.............................. ......................................... .....73 Reduce red-eye....................... ....................... .................... ...73 Useful shortcuts...................................... ..............................74 Edit videos...... .............................................................. ............74 Edit videos.............................................................................74 Edit video, sound, ima ge, text, and trans itions.................74 Edit video clips to sen d............. .............. ................. ............75 Print images.............. ............................................. ..................75 Image print...... ................ ................. ............. ................ ........75 Printer selection.............. .............................................. .....76 Print preview.................... ................................................. .76 Print settings.................. ....................................................76 Print online... ........................... ................... ........................ ...76 Share images a nd videos online......................... ...................76 Gallery........................ .............................. ..........77 Main view............................................................. ....................77 Sounds......................................................................................78 Streaming links. ...................................................... .................78 Presentations. ..........................................................................78 Home network..................... ............. ............... ..79 About home network..............................................................78 Important security informati on.............................................79 Settings for home network............ ............. .............. ........... ..80 Set sharing on a nd define content......... .......... ......... ......... ...81 View and share media files................ ........... ............ ........... ..81 Copy media files................. ..................... ..................... ............82 Home synchronisation............................................... .............82 Synchronise media files...................... ................... ..............8 2 Synchronisati on settings..... ............... ............ ............... .......82 Define incoming files... ................ .................... ..................... 83 Define outgoi ng files............................................................83 Nokia Video Centre. ............ ................... .............84 View and download videos................... ................ ................ .84 Internet videos........................... ..................... ..................... ...85 Play downloaded videos...... ............................................. ......85 Transfer videos from your P C............ ............ ............. ............8 6 Video Centre set tings............................... ...............................8 6
Web browser....... ............... ................... ............ .86 Browse the web............ ......................... ..................................87 Browser toolbar............................ ................................. ..........88 Navigate p ages........................................................................89 Web feeds and blogs. ................................................. .............89 Widgets........ ............. ................ ................ ........... ................. ....89 Content search.........................................................................90 Download and purcha se items.......... ......... ........ ......... ........ ..90 Bookmarks.................................. ............................ .................90 Empty the cache.... ................ ............ ................ ............ ...........91 End the connection... .................. ............... ................... ...........91 Connection security.................................................... .............92 Web settin gs............................................................... .............92 Connections..... ................. ....................... ...........93 Wireless LAN..... ..................... ..................... ................ ..............93 About WLAN........... ................. .......... ................. ................ ....93 WLAN connections................................................................94 WLAN wizard.........................................................................94 WLAN internet a ccess points................. ............. .............. ...95 Operating modes .......................... ........................................95 Connection manage r...............................................................95 Active data connecti ons.......................................................95 Available WLAN n etworks.................................... ................96 Bluetooth connectivit y.............................. .......................... ....96 About Bluetooth connectivity......... ......................... ............96 Settings.......... ............................................. ...........................97 Security tips.............. .............................. ........................ .......97 Sen d d ata usi ng B lue toot h c onn ect ivi ty. .......................... .97 Pair devices...... ........... ............... ............... ............... .......... ....98 Receive data using Bluet ooth connectivity........................99 Block devices.........................................................................99 Remote SIM mode....... ................................ ..........................99 USB................................ ..........................................................100 PC connections.................. ................................... ..................100 Media folder................................ .....................100 RealPlayer ......... ................... .................... ................... ...........100 Play video clips. ............... ............... ............ ................ .........101 Stream content over the air........ .......... .......... .......... ........101 RealPlayer settings ............................................................ .101 Adobe Flash Player................................ ............................... .102 Licences..................................................................................102 Recorder.................................................................................103 Messaging.................. ................ .............. ........103 Messaging main view............. ............... ........... ............... ......103 Write and send messag es.................. ................... ................104 Messaging inbox.... .............................. ................................. .106 Receive messages ...............................................................106 Multimedia messa ges........... ............... ............... .......... ......106 Data, setting s, and web service messages ............... ........107 Message reader............. ............... ........................ ..................107 Mailbox...................................................................................107 Define the e-mail se ttings................ ........... ............. .........107 Open the ma ilbox............................... ................................108 Retrieve e-mail messag es..................................................108 Delete e-mail messag es...................... ...............................109 Disconnect from the mailbox ............. ............... ................109 View messages on a SIM ca rd........... ............... ............... ......109 Messaging settings... .......................... .................... ...............109 Text me ssage sett ings........... .............. ............ ............ ......110 Multimedia messa ge settings............ ........ ........ ........ .......110 E-mail setti ngs.......................................... ..........................111
Manage mailboxes ......................................... ..................111 Connection settings. ........................................................111 User settings... ................... ............... ................... .............112 Retrieval settings.............................................................112 Automatic retrieval set tings................................. ..........113 Web service message settings.............. ........... ........... ......113 Cell broadcast settings.......................................................113 Other settings .............. ......................... ..................... .........114 Make calls... ......................................................114 Voice calls................................... ............................................114 Options during a call.............................................................115 Voice and video mailboxes................ ...................................115 Answer or decl in e a call........................................................116 Make a conference call............................. .............................116 Speed dial a phone number........................ ...................... ...116 Call waiting.................................................... ........................117 Voice dialling............................. ...................... ......................117 Make a video call......................... ........................ ..................118 Options during a video call. .................. .............. .................. 118 Answer or decline a v ideo call...... ........ ......... ........ ...... ........119 Video sharing.............. ............................................. ..............119 Requirements............ .................... ............... .................... ...119 Settings...... ........................... ......................... ................... ...120 Share live video or video clips.......................... .................121 Accept an invita tion............... ............... ............... ..............121 Log..........................................................................................122 Recent calls....... ....................... ..................... .................... ...122 Call duration................... ................................................ .....122 Packet data ................... ................ .................... ...................122 Monitor all communica tion events...................................123 Contacts (phonebook).... ..................................123 Save and edit names an d numbers........ .......... ........... ........124 Manage names an d numbers...............................................124 Default numbers an d addresses......... ............. .......... ......... .124 Add ringing tones for conta cts......... ........ ........ ........ .......... .124 Copy contacts.......... ...............................................................125 SIM directory and other S IM services...................................125 Manage contact groups.................... ................ ....................126 Time management............. .................. ............126 Clock .......................... .......................... .................... ...............126 Alarm clock................................................................ ..........126 World clock................ ........................... ..................... ..........127 Calendar........ .................. ............. ................. .................. ........127 Create a calendar entry............................................. .........127 Calendar v iews............................................................ ........128 Manage calendar entries ............... ............... ................ ......128 Lunar calendar....................................................................128 Office folder... .................. ........... .................. ....129 Quickoffice............. ................ ........... ................ ................ ......129 Quickword................................................................. ..........129 Quicksheet............. ......................................... .....................129 Quickpoint...........................................................................130 Quickmanager............ ...................................... ...................130 Notes....... .................. .................. ............... .................. ...........130 Adobe PDF reader..................................................................130 Converter................... ............................................... ..............130 Chinese-English bilin gual dictionary........... .......... ........... ...131 Sea rch for w ord s i n th e di cti on ary. .......... .......... ........ ......1 31 Return to the state of looking up in dictionary...............132
Calculator...... ................ ............... ................ ................ ......... ..132 Application mana ger............... ..................... .................. .......133 Inst all ap plic at ions and so ftw are ..... ........... ........ .......... .. 133 Remove applications and software............ ......... ......... ....135 Settings...... ........................... ......................... ......................135 Tools folder........................ .................... ..........136 File manager..........................................................................135 Voice commands................... .................. .................. ............136 Sync............. ..................... ..................... .............................. ....137 Device manager................ .....................................................138 Speech ............................................ .................................. .....138 Settings........................ ......................... ...........139 General settings. ....................... ..................... ..................... ...139 Personalisation setti ngs............ ................. .............. ....... ..139 Enhancement setting s................ ........... ............... ..............140 Security settings...................................... ...........................141 Phone and SIM....... ................... ................... .................. ...141 Certificate mana gement........... .......... ........... .......... ..... ..141 Security module...............................................................143 Restore original settin gs............... .................. .................. .143 Navi wheel settings.......... ..................................................143 Positioning settin gs.................. ................. ..................... ...143 Phone settings...... ........................................................... ......144 Call settings.........................................................................144 Call divert.................. ...................... ...................... ...............145 Call barring..........................................................................145 Network settings......................................................... .......146 Connection settings. ............... ................ ............. ................ ..146 Data connections a nd access points............................. ....146 Access points.......... .............................................. ............... 147 Create a new access point ................... ..................... ....... 147 Packet data access p oints............. ................. .................147 WLAN internet access points ......... .......... .......... .......... ...148 Packet data sett ings...........................................................149 Wireless LAN se ttings......................................................... 150 SIP settin gs..................... .................... ..................... ............150 Configurati ons..................... ..................... ................. .........150 Access point name control.............. ................... ................150 Application s ettings........................ ....................... ...............151 Troubleshooting.............. ......... ....... ......... .......151 Nokia origina l enhancements. ................ .........154 Enhancements....................................... ........................ ....... .154 Battery...................................... .............................................. 155 Battery information......................... ................156 Charging and discharg ing........... ............... ............... ............ 156 Nokia battery authentica tion guidelines............................ 157 Authenticate ho logram...................................................... 157 Wha t i f yo ur ba tte ry i s n ot a uth ent ic ?...... ........ ........ ....... 157 Care and maintenance........ ...... ...... ....... ...... ....158 Addi tio na l saf ety inf orm atio n......................... 159 Small children........................................................................159 Operating environment.................................................. ......159 Medical devices..... .................................................. .............. .159 Implanted medical devices.... ................................. ...........159 Hearing aids........................................................................160 Vehicles................ .................. ................. .................. ............. .160 A ppli c a tio ns f o lder. .......... ........... .......... .......... .132
Potentially explosive en vironments................................ ....161 Emergency calls....................................... ..............................161 Certification information (SAR)........................................ ....162 3 Index ........... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ .. .......16
For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not fo llowing them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH O N SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wirele ss phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FI RST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving shou ld be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be su sceptible to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH O FF IN HOSP ITALS Follow any restrictions. Sw itch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRC RAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF W HEN REFUELI NG Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restri ctions. Do not u se the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product documentation. D o not touch the antenn a areas unnece ssarily. QUALIFIED SERV ICE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERI ES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible product s. WATER-RE SISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 10
BACK-UP COP IES Remember to ma ke back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. CONNECTIN G TO OTHER DEVIC ES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENC Y CALLS Ensure the phone funct ion of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the standby mo de. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give you r location. Do not end the call un til given permissi on to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800 , 1900, and UMTS 900 and 2100 networks. Contact your service p rovider for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, priva cy and legitimate rig hts of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections ma y pr event some images, music (including ringing tones ), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports inte rnet connections and other methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to vi ruses, ma licious messages and applicati ons, and other harmful con tent. Exerci se caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests , download content, and accept installations only from trustwort hy sources . To increase the security of your devices, consider insta lling, using, and regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be s witched on. Do not switch the device on when wi reless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Mic rosoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. During extended operation , such as an active video s haring session or high-speed data co nnection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this cond ition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 11
Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. Yo u may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does n ot endorse or as sume liability for them. If you choos e to access such sites, you should take precautions for se curity or content. The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Network se rvices To use the phone you must ha ve service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are no t available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your servic e provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and ex plain what charges will ap ply. Some networks may have limi tations that affect how you can us e network services. For instan ce, some networks ma y not support all langu age-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device m enu. Your device may als o have a spec ial configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, an d icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, su ch as MMS, browsing, and e-mail requ ire network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device o ff and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when su pplied with power from the AC-4, AC-5, or DC-4 charger. The battery intended for use with this device is BL-6F. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Noki a for use with thi s particular model. The use of any other types ma y invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of app roved enhancem ents, pl ease check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pu ll the plug, not the cord. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 12
Get started Keys and parts (front) 1 â Power key 2 â Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) for com patible headsets, and headphones 3 â Earpiece 4 â Selection keys 5 â Call key 6 â Menu key 7 â Numeric keypad 8 â Microphone 9 â Navi⢠wheel. He reinafter re ferred to as the scroll key. 10 â Clear key C 11 â Multimedia key 12 â End ke y 13 â Light sensor 14 â Secondary camera with lower resolution é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 13
Keys and parts (back) 1 and 9 â Stereo speakers wi th 3- D sound effect 2 â Zoom/Volume key 3 â 2-stage capture key fo r auto-focus, still image capture, an d video recording 4 â LED flash 5 â Main camera for high resolution (up to 3.2 megapixels) imag e capture and video recordi ng 6 â Micro USB co nnector to connec t to a co mpatible computer 7 â Memory card slot for a compatible microSD card 8 â Charger connecto r 10 â Hole for a wrist strap Insert (U)SIM card and batt ery A USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the batte ry. 1. With the back of th e device facing you, press and hold the release button and lift up the cove r. 2. Insert the SIM card into the card holder. Ensure that the bevelled corn er on the card is facing toward the slot, and th at the contact area on the card is facing down. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 14
3. Insert the battery. 4. To re place the cover, direct the top locking catch toward its slot first and then press down until the cover locks into place. Switch the device on 1. Press and hold th e power key. 2. If the device asks for a PIN cod e or lock code, enter it, and press t he left selectio n key. The factory se tting for the lock code is 12345 . Your device has intern al antennas. Note: Your device may have internal and extern al antennas. As with any radio transmitting device, avoid touching the ante nna unnecessarily wh en the antenna is in use. Contact with such an antenna affects the commun ication quality, ma y cause th e device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise ne eded and may reduce the battery life. 1 â Bluetooth and wire less LAN antenna, and GPS receiver 2 â FM transmitter ante nna 3 â Cellular antenna Note: The Blue tooth, WLAN, G PS, and FM transm itter antennas are in the back cover of your device. If you change the back cover, verif y that you have a genuine Nokia part intended for us e with this device, or these connections may stop working. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 15
Charge the battery 1. Conne ct a comp atible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the po wer cord to the device. If the battery is completely disc harged, it may ta ke a w hile be fore t he charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully charged, the charging indicator stops scrolling. Disconnect the ch arger from the device, then from t he wall outlet . Tip: Disconne ct the charger f rom the wall outl et when the c harger is not in use. A charge r that is connected to th e outlet cons umes power even when it is no t connecte d to the devic e. Wrist strap 1. Remove the back cov er. 2. Thread a strap as shown and tighten i t. 3. Replace the cover. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 16
Get connected Your device supports the foll owing connecti vity methods: â 2G and 3G networks â Bluetoo th connecti vity â to tra nsfer files and conne ct to compatible enhancements. See "Blu etooth connecti vity" , p. 96 . â Nokia AV connec tor (3.5 mm) â to connect to compatible headsets, headphones, or ho me stereo sets â USB data cable â to connect to compatible devic es, such as printers and PCs. See "USB" , p. 100 . â Wireless LAN (WLAN) â to connect to the interne t and WLAN enabled devices. See "Wirel ess LAN" , p. 93 . â GPS â to receive transmissions from GPS satellites to measure your loca tion. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 35 . â FM transmitter â to listen to songs in your device through compatible FM receiv ers, such as car radios or home stereo sets. See "Play a song using FM transmitter" , p. 51 . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 17
Find help Instructions in side - In-device help Your device contain s instructions to help you use it. When an application is open, to access the help t ext for the current view, select Option s > Help . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Util ities > Help , and the relevant application. You can find links to relate d topics at the end of the help text. To make the instruc tions easier to read, you can change the size of t he text. If you clic k on an underline d word, a short explanation is displayed. Help uses the following indicators: shows a link to a related help topic. shows a link to th e application bein g discussed. When you are reading the in st ructions, to switch between help and the appl ication that is open in the background, press and hold , or select the ap plication link ( ). Tip: To place Help in the main menu, selec t Tools > Utilities , highlight Help , and select Options > Move to fold er and the main menu. Get started See the get started gu ide for keys and parts information, instructions for settin g up the device and for other essent ial in formatio n. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 18 Additional applications There are various applications provided by Nokia and different third-part y software develope r s that help y ou do more with your device . These applications are explained in the g uides that are available on the product support pa ges of the N okia website.
Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer ne w features, enhanced function s, or improved performance . You may be ab le to request these updates t hrough the Nokia Software Updater PC ap plication. To update the device software, you need th e Nokia Software Update r application and a compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or Vista operating system, broadband internet access, and a compatible d ata cabl e to connect you r device to the PC. To get more information an d to download the Nokia Software Updater ap plication, visit www.nokia-asia.com/ softwareupdat e or your lo cal Nokia website. Tip: To check the software version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mode. Settings Your device normall y has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile internet sett ings automatically c onfigured in th e device, based upon your network serv ice provider information. You may have se ttings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request th e settings from the network service providers as a special message. You can c hange the general set tings in your devic e, s uch as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. See "General settings" , p. 139 . Access codes If you forget any of the acce ss codes, contac t your service provider. â Personal identification number (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. Th e PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three con secutive in correct PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. â UPIN code â This code ma y be supplied with th e USIM card. The USIM ca rd is an enhanced v ersion of the SIM card and is supported by U MTS mobile phones. é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 19
â PIN2 code â This code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your device. â Lock code (a lso known as secu rity code) â This code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorised use. Th e factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorised use of your dev ice, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from yo ur device. Try entering the code only once, if you forget the code. If the code you entered is not correct, cont act a Nokia Care point or your serv ice prov ider fo r further instructions. â Personal unblocking ke y (PUK) code and PUK 2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively . If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, cont act the operator whose SIM c ard is in your dev ice. â UPUK code â This code (8 di gits) i s require d to chan ge a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Prolong battery life Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, note th e following: â Features that u se Bluetooth te chnology, or allowing such features to run in the background whil e using other features, in crease the de mand on battery power. Turn Bluetooth technolog y off when you do not need it. â Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the background whil e using other features, in crease the de mand on battery power. WLAN on your Noki a device switche s off when yo u are not trying t o connect, not co nnected to an access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce batt ery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or sc ans less often, for available networks in the backgrou nd. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 93 . When Scan f or networks is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. However, yo u can still manu ally sc an for available WLAN networks and connect to WLAN networks as usual. â If you h ave set Packet data connection to When available in connec tion setti ngs, and t here is no packet data coverage (GPRS), th e device periodically tries to e stablish a packet data co nnection. To prolong the operat ing time of your device, sele ct Packet data connection > When needed . â The Maps applicatio n downloads new map information when you scroll to new areas on the map, which increases t he demand on battery powe r. You can é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 20
prevent th e automatic down load of new maps. See "Maps " , p. 40 . â If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeated ly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the network settings, the device searches for the UMTS network. To only use the GSM ne twork, press , and select Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Network > Network mode > GSM . â The backlight of the display increases the demand on battery power. In the disp lay settings , you can change the time-out after whic h the backlight is switched off, and adjust the ligh t sensor that observ es lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness. Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalis ation > Dis play and Light time-out or Light s ensor . â Leaving applications running in the background increases the d emand on battery po wer. To close the application s you do not use, press and hold , scroll to an application in the l ist, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Music player, select it from t he list and Options > Exit . Free memory Many feature s of the devic e use memory to store data. The device notifies y ou if the device m emory or the memory card memory (if available) is low. To view how much memory different data types cons ume, press , and select Tools > File mgr. , the desired memory, and Options > Details > Memory . To free device memory, transf er data to a compatible memory card (if available) or to a compatible PC. To remove data you no l onger need, u se File manager or go to the respective applic ation. You can remove the following: â Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e- mail messages from the mailbox â Saved web pages â Contact information â Calendar notes â Applications shown in Applica tion manager that you do not need â Installation files (.sis or .s isx) of a pplications you ha ve installed. Transfer the instal lation files to a compatible PC. â Images and video clips in Photos. Back up the files to a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 21
If you are deleting multiple items and a note Not enough memory to perform operat ion. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data from phone memory. is shown, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest items. Your device Model number: Nokia N78-1. Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N78. Antenna locations Your device has intern al antennas. Note: Your device may have int ernal and external antennas. As with any radio transmitting device, avoid touching the ante nna unnecessarily wh en the antenna is in use. Contact with such an antenna affects the communicat ion quali ty, may ca use the de vice to operate at a higher pow er level than otherwise needed and may reduce the battery life. 1 â Bluetooth and wire less LAN antenna, and GPS receiver 2 â FM transmitter ante nna 3 â Cellular antenna Note that the Bluetoo th, WLAN, GPS, and FM transmitter antennas are located in the back cover of your device. If you change the back c over, check t hat the new cover includes th ese antennas, o therwise these conn ections stop working. Welcome When you switch on your device, th e Welcome application is displayed. Select fr om the f ollowing : â Sett. wizard â to configure various settings, such as e-mail. For more informatio n on the Settings wizard application, see t he guides av ailable at the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia web site. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 22
â Switch â t o transfer content, such as co ntacts and calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. See "Transfer content" , p. 23 . There may also be a demonstration about your device available in th e We lcome application. To access the Welcome ap plication later, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Welco me . You can also access the individual appl ications from thei r menu locations. Nokia Switch Transf er cont ent You can use the Switch application to copy content such as phone numbers, addresse s, calendar items, and images from your previous Nok ia devi ce to y our new device using Bluetooth conn ectivity. The type of con tent that can be transferred d epends on the model of the device from which you want to tr ansfer conten t. If tha t devic e suppo rt s synchronisation, you can also synchronise data betwee n the dev ices. Y our device notifies you if the othe r device is not compatible. If the other dev ice cannot be switched on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SI M card, the offline profile is automatically activated. Transfer content for the first ti me 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Switch in the Welcome application, or press , and select Tools > Util ities > Switch . 2. Select the conn ection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both dev ices must supp ort the selected connection ty pe. 3. If you select Bluetoot h, connect the two devices. To have your device sea rch for devices with Bluetooth connectivi ty, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are asked to enter a code on you r device. Enter a c ode (1-1 6-digits ), and select OK . Enter the sa me code on the other device, and select OK . Th e devices are now paired. See "Pair devices" , p. 98 . Some earlier Nokia devices do not already have the Switch application. In this case the Switch applic ation is sent to the ot her device as a message. To install the Switch application on th e other device, open the message, and follow the inst ructions on the display. 4. From your device, select the cont ent you want to transfer from the other device. When the tr ansfer has started, y ou can canc el it and continue la ter. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 23
Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the co rresponding lo cation in your devi ce. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send content After the first transfer, select from the following to st art a new transfer, depending on th e model of the other device: to synchro nise content betwee n your devi ce and the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. Th e synchron isation is two- way. If an item is deleted in one device , it is deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted it ems with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the oth er devic e to your device. With retrie val, cont ent is transferre d from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original con tent in the ot her device, de pending on the device mod el. to send cont ent from your d e v i c e t o y o u r o t h e r d e v i c e If Switch cannot send an item, depending on the type of the other devic e, you can add the item to th e Nokia folde r to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia and send it from there. When you select the folder to transfer, the items are synchronised in the correspon ding folder in the o ther device , and vice ve rsa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings to t he main view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the sh ortcut, sc roll to it, and select Options > Shortcut settings . You can, for example, create or change the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a shortcut in the main view, and select Optio ns > View log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred has been edited in bot h devices, th e device atte mpts to merge th e changes automatically. If th is is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Sele ct Check one by one , Pri ority to th is phone , or Prior ity to ot her phone to solve the conflict. For further instru ctions, se lect Opti ons > Help . Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM ne twork (ne twork service). é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 24
T h e d e v i c e i s b e i n g u s e d i n a U M T S n e t w o r k ( n e t w o r k service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received ne w e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type i s set to silent, and the message alert tone and e -mail aler t tone are set to off . A timed profile is active. The devi ce keypa d is locked. A clock alarm is active. T h e s e c o n d p h o n e l i n e i s b e i n g u s e d ( n e t w o r k s e r v i c e ) . All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service). If you have two phon e lines, a number indicates the active line. A compatible microSD card is in th e device. A compatible headset is conne cted to the device. FM transmitte r is active but not t ransmitting. FM transmitter is active an d transmitting. A compatible text phone is connec ted to the device. A GPRS packet data co nnection is active (network service). indicat es the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is available. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that support s EGPRS (netwo rk servic e). indicates th e connection is on hold and that a connection is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the network, but your device is not necessarily using EGPRS in the data tra nsfer. A UMTS packet data co nnection i s active (network service). indicat es the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates the connecti on is on hold and that a connection is available. See "Fast downloading" , p. 30 . You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). See "Abou t WLAN" , p. 93 . A wirele ss LAN connection is active in a ne twork that has encryp tion. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not have encr yption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. See "Bluet ooth connectivity" , p. 96 . é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 25
Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connecti vity. When th e indica tor is blinkin g, your dev ice is trying to con nect with another de vice. A USB connection is active . Synchronisation is in progress. Shortcuts When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use th e number keys, # , and * to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press 2 to open Messaging, or # to open the application or fold er in the corresponding location in th e menu. To switch betw een open ap plications, press and hold . Leaving applications runn ing in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power and reduces the battery life. To open th e multimedia menu to view the mu ltimedia content you have used most frequently in your device, press the multimedia key. To start a web connection (n etwork service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0 . In many applications, to vi ew the most common option items ( ), press the scroll key. To change the profile, press the po wer key, and se lect a profile. To switch betw een the Genera l and Silent profiles, in the standby mode, press and ho ld # . If you have two phone lines (network service), this action switches between th e two lines. To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the standby mode, press and ho ld 1 . To open the last dialled numbers list, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key. Lock the keypad To lock the keys, press t he left selectio n key, then * . To unlock the keys , press the left selec tion key, th en * . You can sele ct to lock th e keypad autom atically after a time-out. See "Security set tings" , p. 141 . In low light conditions, it is possible to illuminate the keypad by briefly pr essing the power key. Navi⢠wheel Hereafter referred to as the scroll key. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 26
Use the scroll key t o move ar ound the menus and lists (up, down, left, or right). Press th e scroll key to select the action shown on top of the ke y or to show the most used options . When the Navi wheel setting is switched on in the settings, you can scroll quickly t hrough Photos, Music Player, Nokia Video Centre, Contacts, and Messaging lists, or the multimedia me nu. See "Navi wheel settings" , p. 143 . 1. Move the tip of your finger gently around the rim o f the scroll key clockwise or countercloc kwise. Keep moving your finger unti l scrolling starts on the display. 2. To contin ue scrolling, slide your finger around the rim of the sc roll key clockwise or co unterclockwise. Tip: When you start using quick scrolling, move your finger slowl y around the rim of the scroll key to get used to the featur e, and increase the speed little by li ttle. Sleep mode indicator When the device is on standby, the rim inside the Navi wheel lights up slowly. The light varies periodically as if the device was breathing. The breathing is quicker if there are missed calls or received messages. To switch off breathing, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Navi wh eel . Multimedia menu With the mul timedia menu, yo u can acce ss your most frequently used multimedia c ontent. Th e selected content i s shown in the appropriate application . 1. To open or close the multimedia menu, press the multimedia key. 2. To browse the tiles, scroll left or right, or, if the Navi wheel setting is set on, slide your finger on the rim o f the scroll key. See "Navi wheel" , p. 26 . The tiles are the following: â Music â Enter Music player and t he Now playing view, browse your songs and playlists, or download and manage podcasts. â Videos â View your last taken videos. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 27
â Images â View your most recently taken picture, start a slide show of your images, or view media files in albums. â Games â Try out N-Gage games (network service). â Maps â Vi ew y o ur f av ou ri te lo ca ti ons in th e Ma p s application. â Internet â View your favourit e web links in the browser. â Contacts â Add your own contacts, send messages, or make voice calls. To add a new contact t o a n e m p t y p o s i t i o n o n t h e list, press the scroll key, and se lect a c ontac t. To send a message, in the multimedia menu, sele ct a contact, and Opti ons > Send text messa ge or Send multimedia msg. . 3. T o s c r o l l u p o r d o w n i n a t i le, press the scroll key up or down. To select items, press the scroll key. To change the order of t he tiles, selec t Options > Arrange til es . To return to the multimedia menu from an open application, press the mu ltimedia key. Mobile search Press , and select Searc h . Use Mobile Search to access internet search engines and to find and conn ect to local serv ices, websites, images, and mobile content. Y ou can also search content in your devi ce, suc h as ca lendar entr ies, e-mail , and other messages. Web search (network service) 1. In the Search main view, se lect Search the Internet . 2. Select a search engine. 3. Enter your text to search. 4. Press the scroll key to start the sea rch. My content search To search content in your de vice, in the main view, enter your text to the search field. The search results are displayed on the sc reen as you write. Games You can pl ay high-qual ity, multi player N-Gage ⢠games with your device. To download the full N-Gage application to your device, press the multimedia key, an d scroll to Games. To open the application after downloadin g it, select N-Gage in the main menu. For the full N-Gage experience, you need internet access on your device, either through th e cellular network or wireless LAN. Contact your servi ce provider for more information on data services. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 28
For more information, visit www.n-gage.com . Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your de vice. You may need to select the cable mode. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use th e headset where it can endanger your safety. Some headsets come in two parts, a remote control unit and headphones . A remote control unit has a microphone and keys to answer or end a phone call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. To u se the headphones wi th a remote co ntrol unit, conn ect the unit to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) in the device, th en connect t he headphones to the unit. If a headset doe s not include a microphone, for handsfree phone calls, use such a headset with a compatible remote control unit or the microph one of the device. When using certain headset e nhancements, to adjust the volume during a call, use the volume key in the d evice. Some headset enhanc ements have multimedia volu me controls that are used to adju st the v olume only for music or video playback. Do not conn ect product s that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. D o not connec t any voltage source to the No kia AV Connector. When conn ecting any e xtern al device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Conn ector, pay special atte ntion to volu me levels. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease th e volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distanc e without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volu me may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeak er during a call, press Loudsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker, press Handset . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 29
Offline profile To activat e the offlin e profile, press the powe r key briefly, and select Offline . Or, press , and s elect Tools > Profiles > Offline . The offline profile lets y ou use th e device without connecting to the wireless network. When you act ivate the offline profile, th e connectio n to the wireless ne twork is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevented. I f yo u try to send messages, they are placed in th e outbox to be sent la ter. When the offline p rofile is active, you c an use your devi ce without a SI M card. Important: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any c alls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number progr ammed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate t he phone function b y changing profiles. If the d evice has been locked, e nter the lock code. When you have activated the offline profile, you c an still use the wireless LAN, for exampl e, to r ead your e-mail or browse on the int ernet. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements wh en establishing and using a wireless LAN con nection. You can also use Bluetooth connectivi ty while in the offline profile. To leave the offline profile, press the power key briefly, and select another pro file. The device re -enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). Fast downloading High-speed down link packet access (HSDPA, al so called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-s peed data downloads. When HSDPA sup port in the device is activated and the device is co nnected to a UMT S network that sup ports HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, and browser pages through th e cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . See "Display indica tors" , p. 24 . You can activ ate or deactivate sup port for HSDPA in the device settings. See "Packet data set tings" , p. 149 . For availability and subscr iption to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the downlo ad speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 30
Personalise your device You can pe rsonalise your de vice by changi ng the standby mode, main menu, tones, themes, or font size. Most of the personalisation options, such as changing the font size, can be acce ssed through the device setting s. See "Personalisation setti ngs" , p. 139 . Themes Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation > Themes . Chang e the look of your device Use Themes to ch ange the look of the display, such as th e wallpaper an d icons. To change the th eme that is used for all the applications in your device, select General . To preview a theme b efore activating it, select Options > Preview . To acti vate the th eme, select Opti ons > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated by . The theme s on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory card without the me mory card, save the t hemes in the device memory first. To change the layout of the main menu, select Menu view . To open a browser connec tion and download more themes, in Ge neral , select Download themes (network service). Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate securi ty and protection against harmful software. To have a wallpaper image or a slide show of changing images as the background in the standby mode, select Wallpaper > Image or Slide show . To have an animation or a slide show as the power saver, select Power saver > Animat ion or Slid e show . To change the background of the call bubble shown when a call comes in, select Call i mage . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 31
Audio themes In Audio themes, yo u can sele ct a sound scheme such as 'Space' to cover all device events, such as calling, batte ry low, and mechanical events . The sounds can be tones, synthesised voice tags, or a combination of both. Select the sound sche me you want to use in Active audio theme . Note that activating an audio theme changes all your previous sound settings . If you want to return to using the defaul t tones, select audio theme 'Nokia'. You can change the sounds for differen t events individually by selecting on e of the sound groups, for example, Menu events . To add 3-D effects to th e audio theme, sele ct Option s > 3-D ringing ton es . See "3-D tones" , p. 33 . To change the langu age that is used for the synthesise d voice ta g, select Option s > Set Speech language . If you have changed t he tone s of indi vidual ev ents, you can save the t heme by select ing Options > Save theme . Set sounds for events To set the sound of an indivi dual event to silent, open an event group, se lect the even t, and change it to Silent . To set a synthesised voice ta g as the sound for an event, open an ev ent group, select t he event, and Speech . Enter the desired text, and press OK . Speech is not available if you have set Say caller's nam e on in Profiles . See "Voice dialling" , p. 117 . Set tones Press , and select Tools > Profiles . You can set and customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other to nes for different event s, environments, or caller groups. To change the profile , select a profil e, and Option s > Activate . To also change the profile, press the power key in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK . Tip: To switch betw een the general and silent profiles in the standby mode, press and hold # . To modify a profile, sc roll to the profile, and sele ct Options > Pers onalise . Scroll t o the setting you want to change, and press the scroll key to open the choice s. Tones stored on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . If you want to set a profile to be active a certain time, select Option s > Pers onal ise > Timed . When the set time expires the profile changes back to th e profiles th at was previously active . When a profile has been timed, you é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 32 in
can see in the stand by mode. Th e Offline profile cannot be timed. In the tones list, select Download sounds (network service) to open a list of bookmarks. You can sel ect a bookmark and start conne ction to a web page to download more tones. If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be spoken whe n your device rings, select Option s > Personalise , and set Say caller 's name to On . The callerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts. To crea te a n ew pro file, sele ct Options > Create new . 3-D tones Press , select Tools > Utilities > 3-D tones . With 3-D tones, you can enable three- dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. No t all ringing tones support 3- D effects. To enable the 3 -D effects, select 3-D ringing tone effects > On . To change the rin ging tone, s elect Ringing tone and the desire d rin ging tone. To change th e 3-D effect t hat is applied to the ringing tone, sele ct Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the effec t, select from the following settings: â Trajectory speed â Scroll left or right to adjust the speed at which sound moves from one direction to another. This setting is not available for all ringing tones. â Reverberat ion â Select the ty pe of echo. â Doppler e ffect â Select On to have the ringing tone sound louder when you a re cl oser to your devic e, and softer when you are farther away. When you get closer to the device , the ringing ton e appears to become louder, and softer when yo u move away from it. This setting is not available for all ringi ng tones. To listen to the ringing ton e with the 3- D effect, selec t Options > Play tone . If you enable the 3-D tones but do not select any 3-D effe ct, stereo widening is applied to the ringing tone. To adjust the ringing tone volume, select Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . Modify the standby mode To change the look of the standby mode, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Standb y theme . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 33
The active standby display shows application shortcuts, and events from applicat ions such as calendar and player. To change the selection key shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the active standby mode, select Tools > Settings > Gen eral > Personalisation > Stan dby mode > Shortcuts . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you cannot chang e them. To change the cl ock shown in the standby mode, press , and select Applications > Clock > Opti ons > Settings > Clock typ e . You can also change the stan dby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver in the device settings. See "Change the look of your dev ice" , p. 31 . Tip: To chec k whether there are application s running i n the backgrou nd, press an d hold . To close the app lications you do not use, scroll to an application in the list, and press C . Leaving applic ations runnin g in the back ground increa ses the demand on battery power. Modify the main menu To change the main menu view, in the main menu, press and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Themes > Menu view . You ca n change the main menu to be shown as Grid , List , Horseshoe , or V-s haped . To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Mo ve to fol der , or New folder . You can move applications used less frequentl y into folders and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 34
Positioning (GPS) You can use applications such as Maps and GPS data to find out your location, or measure distances and coordinates. These applicatio ns requir e a GPS con nection. About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide ra dio navigation system that incl udes 24 satellites a nd their ground stations that moni tor the operation of the satellites. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low- power radio signals from the satellites an d measures the travel time of the signals. From the travel t ime, the GPS rec eiver can calculate its location to the a ccuracy of metr es. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positi oning System (GPS) is op erated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data c an be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made b y the Un ited States government and is subject to c hange with th e United St ates Department of Defense civil GP S policy and the Fed eral Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry . Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and we ath er conditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outd oors to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you shou ld never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular radio networks for positioning or navigation. To enable or disable differe nt positioning methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Posi tioning > Positioning methods . Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports Assisted GPS (A-GPS) . A-GPS is a network service. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data c onnection , which assists in calculating é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 35
the coordinates of you r current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite information from an assi stance data server over the cellular network. W ith the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the G PS position faster. Your device is prec onfigured to use th e Nokia A-GP S service, if no service provid er-specifi c A-GPS settings are available. The assistance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service se rver only when needed . You must have an internet a ccess point defined in the device to retrieve assistan ce data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a pack et data connecti on. To define an acc ess point for A-GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Positioning > Posit ioning server > Access point . A wireless LA N access point cannot be used for this service. Only a pack et data internet ac cess point can be used . Your device as ks for the int ernet acce ss point when GPS is used for th e first time. Hold your device correctly The GPS receiver is located in the to p of the dev ice. When using the receiver, make sure that you do not cover the antenna with your hand. See "Antenna locations" , p. 22 . Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connecti on in a vehic le may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receive r may drain the batt ery faster. Tips on creating a GPS connection If your device cannot find t he satellite si gnal, consider the following: â If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a be tter signal. â If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 36
â Ensure that your hand does not c over the GPS antenna of your device. See "Hold your device correctly" , p. 36 . â If the weather conditions are bad, the signal strength may be affected. â Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) win dows, which may block the satell ite signals. Check satellite signal statu s To check h ow many satelli tes your devi ce has found, and whether your devi ce is receiv ing satellite signals, press , and select Tools > Co nnectivity > GP S data > Position > Options > Satellite status . Or, in the Maps application, select Option s > Map opti ons > Satellite info . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The long er the bar, th e stronger the satellite signal. When your d evice has re ceived enough data from the sat ellite signal to calculate the coordinates of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of y our location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible t o continue calculati ng the coordinates of your loc ation with three satellites. However, th e accuracy is ge nerally bette r when more satellites are found. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position inform ation. Serv ice prov iders may offer information about loc al topics, such as weather or traffic condit ions, based on the location of y our device . When you receive a position request, a message is displayed showing the service that is maki ng the request. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 37
Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks Press , and select Tools > Conn ectivity > Landmarks . With Landm arks, you can s ave the position information of spec ific l ocation s in y our device. You can sort the saved locations in to different catego ries, such as business, and add other information to them , such as addresses. You can use your save d landmarks in compatible application s, such as GPS data and Maps . GPS coordinates are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS- 84 coordinate system. To crea te a new landma rk, select Options > New landmark . To make a positioning request for your current location, se lect C urrent p ositio n . To enter the position i nformation manually, selec t Enter manual ly . To edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address), scroll to a landmark, and select Option s > Edit . Scroll to the desired field, and enter the information. You can sort your landmarks into preset ca tegories, and create new c ategories. To edit an d create new land mark categories, scroll right in Landmarks, and select Options > Edit categories . To add a landmark to a category, scrol l to the landmark in Landmarks, and select Options > Add to category . Scroll to each cat egory to which you want to add the landmark, and select it. To send one or several landma rks to a compatible device, select Option s > Send . Your received landmarks are placed in the In box folder in Messa ging. GPS data GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a selected destination, position information about your curre nt location, and traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and approximat e duration of travel. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS data . The coordinates in the G PS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format usin g the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, th e GPS receiver of your d evice must initially receive position in formation from at least four satellites to calc ulate the c oordinates of your location. When the initial calculation h as been made, it may be é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 38
possible to continue calculating the coordinat es of your location with three satellites. Howev er, the accuracy is generally better wh en more satellites are found. Route guidance Press , and select Tools > Conn ectivity > GPS data > Navigation . Start the route guidance ou tdoors. If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receiv e the necessary information from the satell ites. Route guidance uses a rota ting co mpass on the device display. A red ball shows the direct ion to the destinat ion, and the approximat e distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacl es, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken in to account when calculating the distance. Route guidance is ac tive only when you move. To set your trip de stination, select Option s > Set destination and a landmark as the destination, or enter the lati tude and longitud e coordinates. Select Stop navigation to clear th e destination set f or your trip. Retrieve position in formation Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Position . In the position view, y ou can view the p osition information of your current location. An estimate of the accuracy of the location is displayed. To save your current loca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save po sition . Landmarks are saved locations with more informatio n, an d they can be used in other compatible applicatio ns a nd transferred between compatible devices. Trip meter Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Trip distance . Select Options > Start to activate trip distance calculation, and Stop to deactivate it. The calcul ated values remain on the display . Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. Select Reset to set the trip distance and time and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation. Select Rest art to set the o dometer and total time to zero. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 39
The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accurac y can also be affe cted by availabili ty and quality of GPS signal s. Maps About Maps Press , and select Maps . With Maps, you can see your current l ocation on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and different points of interest, plan routes from one location to anot her, and save locations as landmarks and send them to com patible device s. You can also purchase extra services, such as guides and a turn-by-turn navigation se rvice with voice gu idance. Tip: You can try out th e turn-by- turn navigation service for three days using free lic ence. See "Navigation" , p. 44 . Maps uses GPS. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 35 . You can defin e the pos itioni ng meth ods used with yo ur device i n the device set tings. See "Positioning settings" , p. 143 . For the most accurate locati on information, use either the internal GPS or a compatible external GPS receiver. When you browse a map in Maps, th e map data for the area is automatically download ed to yo ur device th rough the interne t. A new map is do wnloaded only if you scrol l to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. Some maps may be pre-loaded on the memory card in yo ur device. Yo u can download more maps using Nokia Ma p Loader PC software. See "Downloa d maps" , p. 42 . Downloading maps may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your ser vice provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Tip: You can also download maps by using a wireless LAN connecti on. When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to define an internet access point for downloadin g map information for your current location. To change the default access point later, select Opt ions > Settings > Network > Default acc ess point . To receive a note when your device registe rs to a network outside your home cellu lar network , select Optio ns > Settings > Networ k > Roamin g warn ing > On . Contact your netw ork servic e provider for details and roaming costs. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 40
Almost all digital cartograp hy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this devi ce. Browse maps The ma p coverage va ries by country. When you open th e Maps application, Maps z ooms in to the location that was saved from your last session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps application z ooms in to the capital cit y of the coun try you are in based on the information the dev ice receives from the cellular network. At the same time, the map of the location is downloaded, if it has not be en downloaded during previous sessions. To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your current location, select Options > Find place > GPS po sitio n [0] , or press 0 If the power saver turns on wh ile the devic e is attempting to establish a GPS connection, the att empt is interrupte d. A GPS indicator is shown on the display when you browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS connection, th e circles are yellow. W hen the device receives enough data from the satellites to calcu late the coordinates of your current l ocation, th e circles turn green. To view informatio n about satellites w hen you are u sing Maps, select Opt ions > Map opti ons > Satellit e info . Move on the map Your current location is indicated on the map with . To move on the map, sc roll up, down, left, or right. When y ou browse the map on the display , a new map is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. These maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through y our service provid er's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contac t your service provider. The maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). Edit the map view To zoom in or out, press * or # . To switch between the 2D and 3D views, select Option s > Map opt ions > 2D/3 D . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 41
To define what kinds of points of interest are shown on the map, select Opt ions > Map options > Cat egories and the desired categories. To adjust the network, routing, and general setting s, select Options > Settings . Find and sav e locations To find a location , select Op tions > Find place . You can ch o os e t o go t o y ou r GP S p os i t io n , f i n d a n a dd re s s , f i nd a point of interest b y entering a keyword, find locations nearby, or browse a guide (extra service). To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting point for a nearby search, to pl an a route, view its details, or start navigation (extra serv ice), press the scroll ke y, and select the desired option. To save a location as a land mark, in the desired location, press the scroll key, select Save > As landmark , ente r a name for the landmark, and select the categories you want to include i t in. To take a screen shot of your location, select Save > As imag e . The screen shot is saved in Photos. To send the screen shot, select Option s > Use this pl ace > Send , and the method. You can also send the screen shot in Photos. To view saved landmarks, select Options > Fi nd place > Landmark . To send a landmark to a compatible device, in the landmarks view, press the scroll key, and select Send . If you send the landmark in a text message, the information is converted to plain text. Download maps When you browse a map on the display in Maps, a new map is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by ma ps already downloaded. You can view the amount of transf erred data from the data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter shows the amount of network traffic wh en you browse map s, create routes, or search for locations online. To prevent the dev ice from automatically downloading maps through the internet, for examp le, when y ou are outside your home cellular network, or other map related data required by the extra services, select Options > Settings > Networ k > Use network > Never . To define how much memory card space you want to use for saving maps or voi ce guidance files, select Op tions > Settings > Networ k > Max. memory card u se (%) . This option is available on ly when a compatib le memory card is inserted. When the memory is full, the oldest map data is deleted. The saved maps data can be deleted using Nokia Map Loader PC software. Nokia Map Loader Nokia Map Loader is PC software that you can use to download and install maps from th e internet to a é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 42
compatible memory card. You can also use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn navigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, you must first install it to a compatible PC. You can download the PC software from Follow the instructions on the screen. You must use the Maps application and browse maps at least once before using No kia Map Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses th e Maps history information t o check the version o f map data to be down loaded. After you h ave installe d the PC software to your PC, to download maps, do the following: 1. Connect your device to th e PC by using a compatible USB data cable. Select Mass storage as the USB connection mode. 2. Open Nokia Map Loader in your PC. Nokia Map Loader checks the version of map data to be downloaded. 3. Select the maps or voice guidance files yo u want, and download and insta ll th em to your d evice. Find a place To view points of interest near your current location or other locations on the map, select Option s > Find place > Nearby and a category. To search for a point of interest by name, select Options > Find place > Keyword search or start entering the first le tters of the name, and select Find . To search for a location by address, select Option s > Find place > By address . You must enter the city and count ry. To use an address you have saved t o a contact card in Contacts, select Options > Find place > By address > Options > Select from contacts . To view a search result on the map, press the scroll key, and select Show on map . To return to the results list, select Back . T o v i e w a l i s t o f y o u r p r e v i o u s l o c a t i o n s , s e l e c t Option s > Find place > Recent . Plan a route To plan a route from one loca tion to anothe r (for exam ple, from your home to your office), do the following: 1. Scroll to a point on t he map, press the scroll key, and select Route from . 2. Scroll to From , and select Option s > Select and the desired option. To adju st the rou ting se ttings, s uch as the mode of transportation, select Options > Setti ngs > Routing . é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 43 th e in te rne t at . www.nokia-asia .com/maps
3. To select the desti n ation, scroll to To , and select Option s > Select and the desired option. 4. To view the route itinerary, select Options > Show route . The route is cal culated using the selected routing settings. To view the it inerary route on the map, select Option s > Show on map . To run a simulation of the route, select Options > Start simulati on . Tip: You can also use a compati ble GPS receiver with Bluetooth conn ectivity with Maps. For ex ample, in a c a r , a n ex t e r n a l G P S re ce i v e r c a n b e p o s i t i o n e d s o that it has a clear view of the sky. Enable the use of an external GPS receiver in positioni ng settings. See "Positioning se ttings" , p. 143 . Extra services for Maps You can purchase a licence an d download differen t kinds of guides, such as city an d travel guides, for d ifferent cities to you r device. You can al so purchase a licence for a turn- by-turn navigation s ervice wi th voice guidance to use it in Maps. A navigation licenc e is region specific (region selecte d when purc hasing t he licenc e), and i t can only be used on the sel ected area. The down loaded guides are automa tically sa ved to yo ur device. The licence you p urchase fo r a guide or navigation is device -specific an d cannot be transferred from your device to another device. Navigation Tip: To try out navigation for three d ays using free licence, in Maps, select Options > Start navigation . Accept the term s and conditions. Maps checks if a free lic ence is available for yo ur device. To activat e the licenc e, select OK . You can only use the lice nce once. To purchase a navigation se rvice with voice guidance to use in Maps, sele ct Options > Extra services > Add navigation . You can pay for the service using a credit card or have the amount charge d to your phone bill (if supported by your cellul ar network service provider). After purchasing t he navigation upg rade, the service is available through Maps. To start navigation to the desired destination with GPS using voice guidance, select any loc ation on the m ap or in a results list, and Options > Find place > Navigate to . When you u se navigat ion for the first time , you are prompted to select the lang uage of the voice guidance and download the vo ice guidance files of the selected language. You can also down load voice guidance files é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 44
using Nokia Map Loader. See "Download maps" , p. 42 . To change t he language l ater, in the Maps ma in view, s elect Option s > Settings > Gene ral > Voice guidance and a language, and download the voice guidance files for the selected language. To discard the created route and use another route, select Option s > Alternative route . To view only th e next turns and hi de the map, select Option s > Map option s > Arrow mode . To stop navigation, select Options > Stop navigation . Guides To purchase and download di fferent kinds of guides, such as city and travel guides, for di fferent citie s to your device, select Options > Extra services > Guides . The guides provid e inform ation about attractions, restaurants, hotels, and othe r points of interest. The guides must be downloaded and purchased before use. To browse a downloaded guide, on the My guides tab in Guides, select a guide and a subcategory (if available). To download a new guide to yo ur device, in Guides, scroll right to the Nearest guides or All gu ides tab, sele ct the desired guide, and press Yes . The purchase process starts automatically. You can pay for th e guides through a credit card or have the amount charged to your phone bill (if supported by your cellul ar network service provider). To confirm the purchase, select OK tw ice. To receive a confirmation of the p urchase through e-mail, en ter your name and e-mail address, and select OK . Music folder Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure t o h igh volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the devi ce near your ear when the loudspeake r is in use, because th e volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 45
You can also use Music play er to listen to podcast episodes. Podca sting is the method for delivering audio or video content ove r the in ternet using eit her RSS or Atom technologies for playback on m obile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your devi ce. See "Transfer music t o your device" , p. 48 . Play a song o r a podcast ep isode You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have updated the s ong or p odcast se lection in your device. To add all available items to the library, in the Music play er main view, sel ect Options > Refresh . To play a song or a podcas t episode, do the follow ing: 1. Press , and select Music > Music player . 2. Sele ct Music or Podcasts . 3. Sele ct categorie s to navig a te to the song or podca st episode yo u want to he ar. If the Navi wheel setting is set on in the settin gs, to browse the lists, slide your finger on the rim of th e scroll key . 4. To play the selected file s, press the scroll key. To pause playback, p ress the sc roll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. To fast forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the it em, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds after a song or podcast has started. To s witch r andom play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ) , o r t o s w i t c h r e p e a t off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffl e and repeat are automatically switched off. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhanc e bass, select Options > Audio settings . To view a visualisation during playba ck, select Option s > Show visualisation . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 46
To return to the standby mode and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key, or to switch to another open applic ation, press and hold . To close the player , select Op tions > Exit . Music menu Press , and select Music > Music pl ayer > Music . The music menu shows the available musi c. Select the desired option in th e music menu to view all songs, sorted songs, or playlists. When the Music player is playing in th e background, to open the Now playin g view, press and hold the multimedia key. Playlists Press , and select Music > Music pl ayer > Music . To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . To view details of the pl aylist, select Options > Playlist details . Create a playlist 1. Sele ct Options > Create playl ist . 2. Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3. To add songs now, select Yes ; or to add the son gs later, select No . 4. If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you want to include in th e playlist. Press the scr oll key to add items. To show the song list under an arti st title, scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 5. When you have made your selecti ons, select Done . If a compatible memory card is inserted, th e playlist is saved to the mem ory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add song s . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Option s > Add to pl aylist > Saved playlist or Ne w play list . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This d oes not delete th e song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist , scroll to th e song you wan t to move, and selec t Options > Reorder list . To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 47
Podcasts Press , and select Music > Music pl ayer > Podcasts . The podcast menu displays th e pod casts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states: never played , partially played, and completely played. If an episode is partially played, it pl ays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is never played or completely playe d, it plays from th e beginning. Home network with m usic player You can play content stored in your Nokia device remote ly on compatible device s in a home network. You can also copy file s from your Nokia devi ce to other devices that are connected to the home network. Ho me network must be configured first. See "About home network" , p. 78 . Play a song or a podcast rem otely 1. Press , and select Musi c > Music p layer > Music or Podcasts . 2. Sele ct categorie s to navig a te to the song or podca st episode you want to he ar. Slide your finger a round the rim of the scroll key to browse the lists. 3. Select the desired song or podcast and Opt ions > Play > Via home netw ork . 4. Select the devic e in which the file is played. Copy songs or podcasts wirelessly To copy or transfer media files from your device to another co mpatible de vice in a home ne twork, select a file and Options > Copy t o home netw ork . Content sharing does not have to be switched on in the home network settings. See "Set sharing on and define content" , p. 81 . Transfer music to your device You can tr ansfer music from a co mpatible PC or other compatible devices using a c o mpatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivit y. PC requirements for music transfer: â Microsoft Windows XP operating sy stem (or later) â A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. Yo u can get mo re detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from your device's product pages on the Nokia website. â Nokia Nseries PC Suite 2.1 or later Windows Medi a Player 10 may cause playback delays to WMDRM tech nology protected files after they have been transferred to your dev ice. Check Micro soft support website for a hotfix to Windows Media Pl ayer 10 or get a newer compatible version of Windows Media Player. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 48
Transfer music from PC You can use three different met hods to transfer music: â To view your devic e on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compat ible USB data cable or Blueto oth connectivity . If you are using the USB cable, select Mass stor age as the connection mode. A compatible memory card need s to be inserted in the device. â To synchronise music with Windows Media Play er, connect the compatible US B data cable and select Media tran sfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in th e device. â To use Nokia Music Mana ger in Nokia Nseries PC S uite, connect the compatible USB data cable and select PC Suite as the connection mode. Use Mass storage and Media transfer modes to tr ansfer files to a compatible memory card. To chan ge the defa ult USB connec tion mode, press , and select Tools > Connectivit y > USB > USB connec tion mode . Both Windows Media Player an d Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been opt imised to tran sfer music files. For information about transferring music with Nokia Music Manager, see the help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or visit th e Nokia support pages. Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation func tions may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Medi a Player guides and help . The following instructions are for Windows Media Player 11. Manual sync hronisation With manual synchronisation , you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your devi ce in the navigation pane on the right, if more than one device is connected. 2. In the left navigation pane, browse the music files on your PC which you want t o synchronise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the right. You can see the amount of available memory in your device above the Sync List . 4. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the Sync List , right-click, and select Remov e from list . 5. To start the synchronisation, click Start Sync . Automatic synchronisation 1. To activate the autom atic synchronisation function in Windows Media Player, click the Sync tab, sele ct Nok ia Handset > Set Up Sync... , and check t he Sync this device automatically check box. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 49
2. Select the p laylists yo u want to syn chronis e automatically in the Availabl e playlists pane, and click Add . The selected items are t ransferred to th e Playlists to sync pane. 3. To fin alise the setu p for automatic synchronisatio n, click Fi nish . When the Sync th is device a utomatica lly check box is checked and you connect your device to the PC, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on the playlists you select for syn chronisation in Windows Media Player. If no playlists have been se lected, the whole PC music library is sele cted for synchronisation. If there is not enough free m emory in your dev ice, Windows Media Player selects manual sync hronisation automaticall y. To stop automatic sync hronisation, click the Sync tab, and select Stop Sync to 'Nokia Handset ' . Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store (netwo rk service) yo u can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your dev ice. To purchase music, you firs t need to register for th e service. To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visit music.n okia.com. To access the Nokia Music Stor e, you must have a valid internet acce ss point in th e device. To open Nokia Music Store, press , and select Musi c > Music store . To find more music in d ifferent categories of t he music menu, select Options > Find in Music store . Nokia Music Store settings The availability and appear ance of the music store settings may vary. The settings may also be predefined and not editable . If the settings are not prede fined, you may be asked to sele ct the access poin t to use w hen connecting to the music store. To select the access poin t, select Default acc. pt. . In the music store, y ou may be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings . FM transmitter About the FM transmi tter The availability of this fea ture may vary by country. Some countries may restrict the use of the FM tran smitter. Before using the feature in a foreign country, pl ease chec k from www.nseries.com/fmt ransmitter that use is permitted. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 50
With the FM transmitt er, you can play songs in your device through any compatible FM re ceiver, such as a car radio or a home stereo system. The opera ting distance of the FM transmitter is up to a maximum of 3 metres (10 feet ). The transmission may be subject to interfer ence due to obstructions, such as walls, other electronic devices, or from p ublic radio stations. Higher frequenc ies are likely to give bett er results. The FM transmitter may cau se interference to nearby FM receivers operating on the same frequency. To avoi d interference, always searc h for a free FM frequenc y on the receiver before usin g the FM transmitter. The FM transmitter cannot be us ed at the same time as the FM radio of your device. The operating freque ncy range of the transmitter is from 88.1 MHz to 10 7.9 MHz. When the transmit ter is on and transmitting sound, is displayed in the standby mo de. If the transmitte r is on, but not trans mitting any thing, is displayed and a periodic tone sounds. If the t ransmitter is not transmitting anything for seve ral minutes, it switches off automatically. Play a song using FM transmitter To play a song stored in yo ur device through a co mpatible FM receiver, do the following: 1. Press , and select Mu sic > Music player . 2. Select a song or a playlist to be played. 3. In the Now playin g view, select Options > FM transmitter . 4. To activat e the FM transmitte r, set FM transmitter to On , and enter a frequency that is free from other transmissions. For example, if the frequency 107.8 M Hz i s f r e e i n yo u r a r e a a n d y ou t u n e y o u r FM r e c e i v e r to it, you must also tune the FM transmitter to 1 07.8 MHz. 5. Tune the receivin g device to th e same frequenc y, and select Option s > Exit . To adjust the v olume, use th e vol ume function in the receiving device. Liste n to music at a moderat e level. Continuous exposure to h igh volume may damage your hearing. To deactivate th e FM transmitter, selec t Option s > FM transmitter , and s et FM transmitter to Off . If music is not played for se veral minute s, the transmitter switches off automatically. FM transmitter s ettings Press , and select Music > FM transmitt er . To activate the FM transmitter, sel ect FM transmit ter > On . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 51
To set a frequency manual ly, select Freq uency and enter the desired value. To list the previously use d frequencies, select Options > Last frequencies . Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcasting ap plication (netwo rk service), you can search, discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure t o h igh volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the devi ce near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because t he volume may be extremel y loud. Podcasting s ettings Before usin g Nokia Podc asting, set your conn ection and download settings. The recommended conn ection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider fo r terms and data service fees before using other connecti on s. For example, a fl at rate data plan can allow large data transf ers for one monthly fee. Connection s ettings To edit the c onnect ion settings, press , and se lect Music > Podcasting > Options > Settings > Connection . Define the following: â Default acce ss point â Select the access poin t to define your connection to the int ernet. â Search service URL â De fine the pod cast search service to be u sed in searches. Download settings To edit the do wnlo ad settings, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Options > Settings > Download . Define the following: â Save to â Define the location where you wa nt to save your podc asts. â Update interval â Defi ne how often podcast s are updated. â Next update date â Define the date of the next automatic up date. â Next update time â Define the time of next automatic up date. Automatic updates only occu r if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podcasting is running. If Nokia Podcasting is not running, the automatic up dates are no t activated. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 52
â Download limit (%) â D e f i n e t h e s i z e o f t h e m e m o r y that is used for p odcast downloads. â If limi t exceeds â D e f i n e w h a t t o d o i f t h e d o w n l o a d s exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retr i eve podcasts automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provi d erâÂÂs netw ork. Contact your service provider for informat ion about data transmission charges. To restore the def ault settings, selec t Optio ns > Restore default in the settings vie w. Search podcasts Search helps you to find podca sts by keyword or title. The search engine uses the po dcast search service y ou set up in Podcasting > Options > Settings > Connecti on > Searc h service URL . To search for podcasts, press , select Music > Podcasting > Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks fo r podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not sp ecific episodes. General topic s, such as football or hip -hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to mark ed channels and add them to your podcasts, select Subscrib e . You can also add a podcast by selecting one. To start a new search, select Options > New search . To go the website of the podcast, select Options > Open web page (network service). To see the details of a podcast, select Options > Descriptio n . To send selected podcasts to another compatib le device, select Option s > Send . Directories Directorie s help you to find n ew podcast episodes to which to subscribe. To open directories, press , and select Musi c > Podcasting > Directories . Contents of the d irectories chan ge. Select th e desired directory folder to update it (network service). The colour of the fo lder changes, whe n the update is complete. Directories can inclu de top podcasts liste d by popularity or themed folders. To open the desired folder topic, select it and Open . A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a pod cast, select the title, and Update . After you have sub scribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and pl ay them in the podcast s menu. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 53
To add a new direct ory or folder, selec t Options > New > Web directory or Folder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline processor markup lan guage) file, and Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edit . To import an .opml fi le st ored o n your device, select Option s > Import OPML file . S elect the location of the file, and import it. To send a di rectory fo lder as a multimedia message or using Bluetooth connectivity, select th e folder and Option s > Send . When you receive a message with an .opml file using Bluetooth c onnectivity, open the file to save the file into the Received folder in directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcasts. Downloads After you have subscribe d to a podcast, from direct ories, search, or by entering a UR L, you can mana ge, download, and play episodes in Podcasts . To see the podcast s you have subscr ibed to, selec t Podcasting > Podcasts . To see individual episode t itl es (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select th e episode tit le. To download or to continue to download selected or marked episodes, select Download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a p odcas t during download or after partial downloading, select the podcast and Options > Play preview . Fully downloaded podcasts c an be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown unti l the library is refreshed. Play and manage podcasts To display the available episodes from th e selected podcast, in Podcasts , select Open . Under each ep isode, you see the f ile format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the po dcast is fully do wnloaded, to play the full episode, select it and Play . To upda te the select ed podcast or marke d podcasts, fo r a new episod e, select Option s > Update . To stop the updating, select Options > Stop update . To add a new podcast by ente ring the URL of the podc ast, select Option s > New podcast . If you do not have an access point defined or if dur ing packet data connection é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 54
you are asked to enter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the UR L of the selected podcast, select Options > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc a s t o r m a r k e d p o d c a s t s f r o m your devi ce, selec t Options > Delete . To send the sele cted podcast or marked pod casts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Blue tooth connectivity, select Op tions > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Options to choose th e desired action. To open the w ebsite of the po dcast (network se rvice), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact wi th the creators by comment ing and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, selec t Options > View comments . Radio appl ications Press , select Music > Radio , and Visual Radio or Internet radio . Visual Radio You can use the radio as a traditional FM radio and automatically tune into and save station s. If you tune into stations that offer the Vi sual Radio service (network service), you will see inform ation related to the radio programme on the display. The radio supports Radio Data System (RDS) functionality. Radio stations supporting RDS may display information, such as the name of th e station. If activate d in the settings, RDS also attempts to scan for an al ternative frequenc y for the current ly playing station, if the reception is weak. When you open th e radio for th e first time, a wizard helps you to save loc al radio st ations (network service). If you cannot access the Visual Ra dio service, the operators and radio stations in your area may not support Visual Radio. Listen to the radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attach ed to the devic e for the FM radio to function properly. Press , and select Music > Radio > Visual Radio . Note that the quality of th e radio broadcast depends on the coverage of th e radio stat ion in that particular area. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 55
You can make a call or answ er an inco ming c all whi le listening to the radio. The radio is muted when ther e is an active call. To start a station search, select or . To change the frequ ency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . If you have saved radio stations in your de vice, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or . To adjust the v olume, use the v olume key. Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, selec t Option s > Activate loudspe aker . To view available stations based on location, select Option s > Station directory (network service). To save the s tation to whi ch you are c urrently t uned to your station list, select Options > Save station . To open the list of your saved stations, sele ct Options > Stations . To return to the standby mode whil e listening to the FM radio in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and co sts and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. To view available visual content wh en listening to a saved station that has a visu al service ID, select Options > Start visual service . Saved stations To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . To listen to a save d station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > Start visual service . To change station details, select Option s > Station > Edit . Visual Radio settings Press , and select Music > Rad io > Visual Radio > Options > Settings . â Alternative frequencies â To automatically searc h for alternative frequencies if th e reception is weak, select Auto scan on . â Auto-st art servic e â To start Visual R adio automatically when you se lect a saved station that offers Visual Radio service, select Yes . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 56
â Access point â Select the acce ss point used for th e data connection. Yo u do not need an access poin t to use the application as an FM radio. â Current region â Select the region where you currentl y are. Th is settin g is displayed only if there is no network c overage whe n you start the application. Nokia Internet Radio With the Nokia Internet Radio application (network service), you can listen t o av ailable radio stations on the internet. To list en to radio stations, you must have a WLAN or packet data access poin t defined in your device. Listening to the station s ma y involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WL AN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using ot her connection s. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to internet radio stations Press , and select Music > Radio > Internet radio . To listen to a radio station on the internet, do the following: 1. Select a station from your favourites or the sta tion directory, or search st ations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To ad d a st ation manua lly, s elect Options > Add station manually . You can also brow se for station links with the Web applicat ion. Compatible links are automatical ly opened in the Intern et Radio application. 2. Select Li sten . The Now playing view opens displaying informat ion about the currently play ing sta tion and s ong. To stop the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To adjust the volu me, use the vo lume key. Liste n to music at a moderate level. Conti nuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hol d the device ne ar your ear when th e loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view station in formation, select Op tions > Sta tion information ( not avai lable if you have sav ed the sta tion manually). If you are listening to a sta tion saved in your favourites, scroll left or right t o listen to the p revious or next saved station. Favourite stations To view and listen t o your favourite station s, press , and select Music > Radio > Internet radio > Favourites . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 57
To add a station manually to fa vourites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the web address of the station and a name that yo u want to appear in the favourites list. To add the currently playi ng station to favourites, select Option s > Add to Favourit es . To view station information, to move a stati on up or down in the list, or to delete a station from the favourite s, select Option s > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginn ing with particular letters or numbers, start entering the cha racters. Matching stations are displayed. Search for stations To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by their n ame, do the following : 1. In the application mai n view, select Search . 2. Enter a station name or the first letters of it in the search field, and select Search . Matching stations are displayed. To listen to a station, select it, and Listen . To save a station to your favourites, select it, and Option s > Add to Favourit es . To make another se arch , selec t Options > Search again . Station directory Press , and select Radio > Internet ra dio > Station directory . The station directory is mainta i n ed b y N o k ia . If y o u w a nt to listen to internet radio stations ou tside the directory , add station information manually or browse for stati on links on the intern et with the Web application. Select how you wan t the avail a ble stations to be sorted: â Browse by genre â View the available radio station genres. â Browse by language â View the languages in whic h there are stations bro adcasting. â Browse by country â View the countr ies in which there are stations bro adcasting. â Top stations â V i e w t h e m o s t p o p u l a r s t a t i o n s i n t h e directory. Internet radio settings Press , and select Music > Rad io > Inte rnet radio > Options > Settings . To select the de fault access point t o connect to t he network, select Default access point and f rom the available options. Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for th e access point every time you open th e application. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 58
To change the connect ion spee ds for different connection types, select from the following: â GPRS connection bitrate â for GPRS packet data connections â 3G connec tion bitr ate â for 3G packet data connections â Wi-Fi connecti on bitrat e â for WLAN connections The quality of th e radio broadcast depends on the selected connec tion speed. The higher the speed, th e better the quality. To avoi d buffering, use the highest quality only with h igh speed connections. Camera About the camera Your Nokia N78 has two cameras. The main, high resolution camera (up to 3.2 megapixels), is on the back of the device. T he secondary, lower resolut ion, camera is on the front. You can use both cameras to take still pictures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture re solution of 2048x1536 pixel s. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clips are automatica lly saved in the Photos application. See "Photos" , p . 69 . The cameras produce .jpeg images. Video clips are re corded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp 4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3g p file extensio n (sharing quality). See "Vide o settings" , p. 69 . To free memory for ne w images and v ideo clips, tran sfer files to a compatible PC usin g a compatible USB data cable, for example, and remove the files from your device. The device inf orms you whe n the memory is f ull, and asks whether you want to change the memory in use. You can se nd images and video cl ips in a multimed ia message, as an e-mail attachment, or by using other connection methods, such as B luetooth connectivit y or a wireless LAN conn ection. You can also upload them to a compatible online album. See "Share images and videos online" , p. 76 . Activate the camera To activate the main cam era, press and hold the capture key. To activ ate the main cam era when it is already o pen in the background, press and hold th e capture k ey. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 59
To close the main came ra, select Exit . Keep a safe distance when using th e flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. Image cap ture Still image camera indica tors The still image camera viewfinder di splays the following: 1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during image capture. See "Act ive toolbar" , p. 60 . 3 â Battery cha rge level indica tor 4 â Image resolution indicat or 5 â Image counter, which displays the est imated number of images you can captu re using the current image quality setting and memory in use. 6 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators, which show where images are sav ed 7 â GPS signal indicator. See "Location information" , p. 62 . Active too lbar The active toolbar provides you wit h shortcuts to different items and settings before and after capturing an image or recording a video. Scroll to items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. You can also define when the active toolbar is v isible on the display. The settings in t h e activ e toolbar return to the defau lt settings after you close the camera. To view the act ive toolbar before and after capturing an image or recording a video, select Options > Show icons . To view th e active toolbar only when you need it, select Option s > Hide ic ons . To acti vate the ac tive t o o l b a r w h e n i t i s h i d d e n , p r e s s t h e s c r o l l k e y . T h e t o o l b a r is visible for 5 seconds. Before capturing an image or recording a video, in the active to olbar, select from the followi ng: to switch betw een the video mode and the image mode to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 60
to activate the self-timer (images only). See "You in the pictureâ self-timer" , p. 64 . to activate the sequence mode (images only). See "Take pictures in a sequence" , p. 63 . to select a colour effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) to adjust white balance to adjust the exposure compensation (images only) to adjust sharpness (images only) to adjust brightness (image s only) to adjust contrast (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) The icons c hange to re fl ect the current setting. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. The available options vary dependi ng on t he capture mode and view you are in. See "After taking a picture" , p. 62 . Se e "After recording a video " , p. 66 . The activ e toolbar in Phot os has different options. See "Active toolbar" , p. 71 . Capt ure im ages When capturing an image, note the fol lowing: â Use both hand s to keep the camera still. â The quality of a digitally zoomed image is lower th an that of a nonzoomed image. â The camera goes into the bat tery saving mode if t here are no keyp resses for a moment. To continue capturing images, press the captur e key. To capture an image, do the following: 1. If the camera is in the video mod e, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 2. To lock the focus on an obje ct, press the capt ure key halfway down (main came ra only, not available in landscape or sport scene. See "Active too lbar" , p. 60 . ). A green locked focus indica tor appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, a red focus indicator appears. Release the capture key, and press it halfway down again. You can also capture an image without locking the focus. 3. To capture an image, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the im age is saved. To zoom in or out when capturing an image, use t he zoom key in yo ur device. To activate the front camera, se lect Options > Use secondary camer a . To capture an image, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 61
To leave the camer a open in the backgro und and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press and hold the capture key. Location information You can automatically add capture location information to the file details of the image . For example, in the Photos application y ou can then view t he location where an image was captur ed. To activate this feature in Ca mera, select Options > Settings > Record loca tion > Yes . Location i nformation indic ators at the bottom of the display: â â Location information unavailable. GPS stays on in the bac kground for sev era l minutes. If a satellite connection is found and th e indicator changes to within that time, all the images captured during that time are tagged based on the received GPS po sitioning informat ion. â â Location information is available. Location information is added to the image information. See "Still image camera settings" , p. 67 . Images with location information are indicated by in the Photos application. After taking a picture After you tak e a picture, sele ct from the fol lowing opti ons in the active to olbar (avail able only if you select Show captured image > On in the stil l image camera settings): â If you do not wan t to keep the image, select Delete ( ). â To send the image using a multimedia message, e- mail, or other connection meth ods, such as Bl uetooth connectivity, press the call key, or sel ect Send ( ). See "Write and send messages" , p. 104 . This option is not available during a call. You can also send the imag e to th e person you are talking to. Select Send to caller ( ) (only available during a call). â To add the image to an album, select Add to alb um â To view information about the image, select Details â To send the image t o a comp atible online album, select (avai lable on ly if you ha ve set up an account for a compatible online album). See "Share images and videos online" , p. 76 . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 62
To zoom in an image after taking it, press to open the image, and u se the zoom key on the sid e of your device. To use the image as wallpaper in the active standby mode, select Options > Set as wallpa per . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Option s > Set as contact call img. > Assign to contac t . To return to th e viewfinder to capture a n ew image, press the capture key. Flash The flash is available only in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using th e flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device ha s an LED flash for low light conditions. The following fl ash modes are av ailable for the still ima ge camera: Automatic ( ), Red-eye ( ), On ( ), and Off ( ). To change the flash mode, in th e ac tive toolbar, select the desired flash mode. Scenes Scenes are o nly available in the main camera. A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the curren t environment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. The default scene in the image mode is Auto , and in the video mode Automati c (both indicated with ). To change the scene, in the active toolbar, select Scene modes and a scene. To make your own sce ne suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Change . In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and col our settings. To copy the settings of anothe r scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes a nd return to the scenes list, press Back . To activate your own scene, scroll to User defined , press the scroll key, and select Select . Take picture s in a sequence The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera. To set the camera to take six pictu res or the desired number of pic tures in sequen ce (if enough memo ry is available), in the acti ve toolbar, select Sequence mode . To take six pictures, select Burst . To capture the pic tures, press the capt ure key. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 63
To take two or more pi ctures in a sequence, select the desired time interval. To cap ture pictures using th e selected time interval, pre ss the capture key. To stop taking pictu res, select Cancel . The n umber of pictures taken depends on the available memory. After you take the p ictures in the bu rst mode, they are shown in a grid o n the display. To view a picture, press the scroll k ey to open it. If yo u used a time interval, on ly the last take n picture is shown on the display. You can view the ot her pictures in th e Photos app lication. You can also use t he sequence m ode with th e self-timer. To return to the seq u ence mode v iewfinder, p ress the capture ke y. To switch off the sequence mode, in the acti ve toolbar, select Sequence mode > Singl e shot . You in th e pictureâÂÂs elf-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-ti mer to dela y the capture so that you can include yourself i n the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 s econds , 10 seco nds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-timer , select Activ ate . The device beeps when the timer is running and t he quadrangle blinks just before the imag e capture. The camera take s the picture after the selecte d delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the active too l bar, select Self timer > Of f . Tip: In the active to olbar, select Sel f timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Tips on taking good photograp hs Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quality. The camera has several picture quality modes. Use the highest setting to make sure that the came ra produces th e best pictu re quality available. Note howe ver, that better picture quality requires more stor age space. For multimedia message (MMS) and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use the smal lest pic ture quality mode optimised for MMS sending. You ca n define the quality in the camera sett ings. See "Still image came ra settings" , p. 67 . Background Use a simple background. For portrai ts and other pictures with peop le, avoid having yo ur subject in front of a cluttered, complex background that may distract attentio n from the su bject. Mov e the camera, o r the subject, when these con ditions canno t be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer portraits. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 64
Depth When shooting land scapes and scen eries, add dept h to your pictures by placing obje cts in the foreground. If the foreground object is too close to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the sou rce, amount, and directio n of light can change photog raphs dramatically. Here are some typical lighti ng c onditi ons: â Light source behind the subject. Avoid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behi nd the subjec t or visible i n the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted light effects. â Sidelit sub ject. Stron g side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too mu ch contrast. â Light source in front of the su bject. Harsh sunlight may cause the subjects t o squint their ey es. The contrast may also be too high. â Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft ligh t available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy day or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording Video capture indicators The video view finder displays t he following: 1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Video sta bilisat ion on in dicator See "Video settings" , p. 69 . 3 â Audio mute on indicator 4 â Active toolbar. The t ool bar is not displayed during recording. See "Acti ve toolb ar" , p. 60 . 5 â Batte ry charge le vel indicato r 6 â Video quality indicator. The options are High , Normal and Sharing . 7 â The video clip file ty pe 8 â Total available video re cording tim e. When you are recording, the current video length indicator also shows the elapsed time an d time remaining. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 65
9 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators that show where videos are saved To display all viewfinder indicators, select Options > Show icons . Select Hide i cons to display only the video status indicators, and duri ng the recor ding, the time remaining, zoom bar when zooming, and the selection keys. Record vide os To record a video, do the following: 1. If t he camera is in the imag e mode, select the vi deo mode from th e active toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the capture ke y. The red reco rd ico n ( ) is shown and a tone sounds, indicating that recording has started. 3. To pause recording at any time, press Pause . Select Contin ue to resume recording. Video recording automatically stops if rec ording is set to p ause and there are no keypresses within a minute. To zoom in or out of the subject, use the zoom key in your device . 4. To stop record ing, select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved in the Photos application. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. To activate the front camera, select Option s > Use secondary camera . To start recordin g a video, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. After recording a video After you record a video clip , select fro m the following options in the active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set to On in the video settin gs): â To immediately play the vide o clip you just recorded, select Play ( ). â If you do not want to keep the video, sel ect Delete ( ). â To send th e video clip using a mu ltimedia message , e- mail, or other connection meth ods, such as Bl uetooth connectivity, press the call key, or sel ect Send ( ). See "Write and send messages" , p. 104 . See "Send d ata using Bluetoot h connectivity" , p. 97 . This option is not available during a call . You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 file forma t in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a person you are talking to. Select Send to caller ( ) (only available during a call). â To add the video clip to an album, select Add to album é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 66
â To view information about the video clip, select Details â To upload the video clip to a compatible online album, select (only available if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). See "Share images and videos online" , p. 76 . â To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the camera: setup settings and main settings. The setup settings return to the defaul t settings after y ou close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To adjust the setup settings, use the options in the active toolbar. See "Setu p settingsâÂÂadjust colour and lighting" , p. 68 . To change the main settings, in the image or video mode, selec t Optio ns > Settings . Still image camera settings To change the main settings, in the image mode, select Option s > Settings and from the following: â Image q uality â Set the resolu tion Print 3M - Larg e (2048x153 6), Print 2M - Medium (1 600x1200), Print 1.3M - Small (1280x960), E-mail 0.8M - Med. (1024x768) , or MMS 0.3M - Small (64 0x480). The better the image q uality, the more me mory the image consumes. These resolutions are only available in the main camera. The number of images left for the memory in use with the ch osen resoluti on is shown on the display. â Add to album â Save the image to a certain album in Photos. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. â Use tag â Add a tag to the current image. See "Tags" , p. 72 . â Record locatio n â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select Yes . Receiving GPS signal may take time o r the signal may not be available . See "Location information" , p. 62 . â Show captured image â To see the c aptured image after it is taken, select On . To continue taking pictures immediately, select Off . â Default i mage name â Define the default name for the captured image s â Extended digital zoom (main camera only) â On (contin uous) allows the zoom increment s to be smooth and continuous betw een digital and exte nded digital zoom, On (p aused ) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and exte nd ed digital step point, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 67
â Flicker canc ellation â To avoid screen flic kering, select 60 Hz . â Capture tone â Set the tone that sounds when you take a picture . â Memory i n use â Choose wh ere to store your im ages. â Restor e camera settings â To return the default values to the camera settings, select Yes . Setup setting sâÂÂadjust colour and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colo urs and lighting more accura tely or to add ef fects to you r pictures or videos, scroll through the acti ve toolbar, and select from the following opt ions: â Flash mode ( ) (images mode only) â Sel ect the desired flash mode. â Colour tone ( ) â Select a colour effe ct from the list . â White balance ( ) â Select the current lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. â Exposure comp ensation ( ) (images mode only) â If you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such a s snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2. â Sharpness ( ) (images only) â Adjust th e sharpness of the image. â (images only) â Adjust the brightness of the image â Contrast ( ) (images only) â Adjust the difference between the lightest and darkest parts of the image. â Light sensitivi ty ( ) (images mode only) â Increase the light sens itivity in low light conditions to decrease the risk of images that are too dark. The screen display changes to match any setting s you make s o that you s ee ho w the chang e affects the pictur es or videos. The available settings vary dependin g on the se lected camera. The setup settings are camera-s pecific; if you change the settings in the secondary came ra, the settings in the main camera do not change. Th e setup settings are also shooting-mode specific; if yo u change the se ttings in the image mode, the settings in the video mode do not change. Switc hing between t he modes does n ot reset th e defined setu p settings. The setup set tings return to the d efault settings when you close the ca mera. If you select a new scene, the colour and lighting set tings are replaced by the selected scene. You can chan ge the setup settings after selec ting a scene if needed. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 68 .
Video settings To change the main settings , in the vide o mode, select Option s > Settings and from the following: â Video quality â Set the q uality of the video c lip. Select Sharing , if you want to send th e video clip using a multim edia mes sage. The cl ip is recorded with OCIF resolution, in 3GPP format, and th e size i s limited t o 300 kB (approximately 2 0 seconds). You may not be able to sen d video clips save d in the MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia messa ge. â Video stab ilisation â Select On to reduce the ef fects of the camera shaking when recording a video. â Audio recording â Select Mute if you do no t want t o record sound. â Add to album â to add the re corded video clip to a certain album in Photos. â Show captured video â to vie w the first frame of the recorded video clip after th e recording st ops. To view the entire v ideo clip, se lect Play from the active too lbar (main camera) or Option s > Play (secondary camera). â Default vide o name â Define the defaul t name for captured video c lips. â Memory in use â Select wh ere you want to store your video cl ips. â Restore came ra settings â to restore th e camera settings to de fault values. Photos About Photos Press , select Photos and from the following: â Captu red â to show all the photos and videos you have take n â Months â to show photos and videos categorised by â Albums â to show the default albums and those you have created â Tags â to show tags you have created for each item â Download s â to show items and videos downloaded from the web or r eceived via MMS or email â All â to view all items Files stored on your compatible memory card (if insert ed) are indicated with . To open a file, press the scro ll ke y. Vi deo cl ips op en an d play in RealPlayer. See "RealPlayer " , p. 100 . é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 69 the month the y w ere taken
To copy or move files to another mem ory location, selec t a file, Options > Move and copy , and from the available options. View imag es and video s Press , select Photos, and one of the following: â All â View all photos and videos. â Captur ed â View pictures taken and vide o clips recorded with the camera of your device. â Downloads â V iew downloaded video clips and video clips saved in Video Centre. See "Nokia Video Centr e" , p. 84 . Images and video clips can al so be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Blue tooth conne ctivity. To be able to view a received image or vide o clip in Photos, you must first save it. The images and video clip files are i n a loop and order ed by d ate and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files o ne by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. Or, if the Navi whee l setting is ac tivated, to brow se the file s, slide your finger on the rim of the scroll key. See "Personalisation settings" , p. 139 . To open a file, press the scroll key. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, press the zoom key on the side of your device. The zooming rat i o is not stored perman ently. To edit a video cl ip or a phot o, select Options > Edit . See "Edit images" , p. 73 . To see where an image mark ed with was captured, select Option s > Show on map . To pri nt your images on a co mpatib le prin ter, or to store them on a compatible memory card (if inserted) for printing, sele ct Option s > Print . See "Image print" , p . 75 . To move images to an album for later printing, sele ct Option s > Add to al bumPrint late r . View and edit file details To view and edit image or video properties, selec t Options > Details and from the following: â Tags â Contains currently used tags. Select Add to add more tags to the current file. See "Tags" , p. 72 . â Descriptio n â To add a free- form description of the file, select the field. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 70
â Loca tion â This field displays the GPS location informat ion, if a vaila ble. To e dit the locati on informat ion, selec t the field . â Title â This field contains a thumbnail image of the f il e a nd t he c ur r en t f il e n am e . To e di t th e n am e , se l ec t the field. â Albums â D i s p l a y s i n w h i c h a l b u m s t h e c u r r e n t f i l e i s located. â Resolution â D i s p l a y s t h e s i z e o f t h e i m a g e i n p i x e l s . â Durat ion â Displays the length of the video. â Usage rights â S e l e c t Vi ew to view the DRM rights of this file. See "Licence s" , p. 102 . Organise images and videos You can organise files in Photos as fo llows: â To view items in the Tags view, add tags to them. See "Tags " , p. 72 . â To view items by months, select Mo nths . â To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album in Photos, select the it em and Add to album from the active toolbar. See "Albums" , p. 72 . To delete an image or vide o clip, select the image and Delete from the active toolbar. Active toolbar The active toolbar is avai lable only when you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the activ e toolbar, scroll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. To hide the t oolbar, select Options > Hide icons . To activate the act ive toolbar when it is hidd en, press the scroll key. Select fr om the f ollowing: to play the select ed video clip to send the selec ted image or video c l ip to upload the selected image or video clip to a compatible online album (onl y available if you have set up an account for a comp atible online album). See "Share images and videos online", p. 76 . to add the selected item to an album to manage tags and oth e r properties of t he selected item to delete the selected image or video clip é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 71
Albums With albums, you can conven ie ntly manage your ima ges and video clips. To view the albums list in Photos, select Albums in the main view. To create a new album in the albu ms view, select Option s > New album . To add a picture or a video cl ip to an album in Photos, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Add to albu m . A list of albums open s. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip. Th e item you added to the album is still visible in Photos . To remove a file from an al bum, open the album, scroll to the file, an d select Options > Remove from album . Tags Use tags to c ategorize medi a items in Photos. You can create and delete tags in Tag manager. Tag manager shows the tags currently in use and the nu mber of items associated with each tag. To open Tag manager, se lect an image or video clip and select Options > Details > Tag manager . To create a tag, select Options > New tag . To view the list in most frequen tly used order, selec t Option s > Most use d . To view the list in alph abetical order, select Options > Alphabetical . To see the tags y ou have created, select Tags in the Photos main view. The size of the tag name correspon ds to the number of items th e tag is assigne d to. Select a tag to view all the image s associated with the tag. To assign a tag to an image, select an image and select Options > Add tags . To remove an image from a tag, open a tag and select Options > Remove from tag . Slide show To view your images as a sl ide show, select an image and Options > Slid e show . The slide show starts from the selected file. To view only th e selected images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images, and Options > Slid e show > Start to start the slide show. Select fr om the f ollowing: â Pause â to pause the slide show â Continue â to resume the slide show, if paused â End â to close the slide show To browse the images, sc roll left or righ t. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 72
Before starting the slide show, adjust the slide show settings. Select Optio ns > Slide sh ow > Settings , and from the following: â Music â to add sound to the slide show. Select On or Off . â Song â to select a music file from the list â Delay between slides â to adjust the tempo of the slide show â Transition â to make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to anot her, and zoom in and out in the images randoml y To decrea se or increase the volume du ring the slide show, use the vo lume key i n your device . Edit images Image editor To edit the pictures aft er taking th em or the ones alre ady saved in Photos, select Options > Edit . The image editor opens. To open a grid where you can select d i fferent e dit options indicated by small icons, select Options > Apply effect . You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast , and resolution; and add effects, te xt, clip art, or a f rame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop , and a predefined aspec t ratio from the list. T o crop the image size manually, se lect Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and sele ct Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adju st the first selected area, select Ba ck . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefined aspect rat io, select the upper left corner of the area t o be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll k ey. To freeze the selected area, press the scroll key. To mo ve the area withi n the picture, use the scroll key. To selec t the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Option s > Apply effect > Red eye reductio n . Move the cross onto the eye, and press th e scroll key. A loop appears on the disp lay. To resize th e loop to fit the size of the eye, use t he scroll key. To reduce the re dness, press the scroll key. When yo u have fi nished editing the image, press Done . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 73
To save the changes and return to the previous view, press Back . Useful shortcuts You can use the followin g shortcuts when editing images: â To view a full-scre en image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * again. â To rotate an image clock wise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . â To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0 . â To move on a zoomed image, scroll up , down, left, or right. Edit videos Edit videos To edit video clips in Phot os, scroll to a video c l ip, and select Options > Edit and an editing option. The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 v ideo file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. Edit video, sound, image, text, and transiti ons To create c ustom video cli ps, mark and select one or more video clips, and select Options > Edit > Video editor . To modify the video, select from the following options: â Edit video clip â to cu t the video clip; insert col our effects on t he clip; use sl ow motion; mute or unmute sound; or move, remove, or duplicat e the video clip â Edit text (shown only if you added text) â to move, remove, or duplicate text; ch ange the colo ur an d style of the text; define how long it stays on the screen; and add effects to the text â Edit image (shown only if you added an image) â to move, remove, or duplicate an image; define how long it stays on the screen; an d set a background or a colo ur effect to the im age â Edit sound clip (shown only if you added a sound clip) â to cut or move the soun d clip, to adjust its lengt h, or to remove or duplicate th e clip â Edit transition (shown only if you added a transition on the time line) â There are th ree types of transitions: at the start of a video, at the en d of a video , and between video clips. â Insert â Select Vid eo clip , Image , Text , Sound clip , or New sound clip . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 74
â Movi e â Preview the movie in full- screen or as a thumbnail, save the m ovie, or cut the movie to a pro per size to send it in a multimedia message. To take a snapshot of a vide o cli p, in the cut vi deo view, select Options > Take snapsh ot . In the thumbnail preview v iew, press the sc roll key, and select Take snapshot . To save your vide o, select Option s > Movie > Save . To define the memory in use, select Optio ns > Setti ngs . In the video edit or settings, you can also def ine the default video name, defa ult snapshot name, and resolution of the video clip. Edit video clips to s end To send a vid eo clip, select Options > Send , a nd the desired method. Contact yo ur network service provide r for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. To sen d a vid eo clip that is over the maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the cl ip using Bl uetooth connec tivity. See "Send data using Bluetooth connectivity" , p . 97 . You ca n also transfer your videos to a co mpatible PC usi ng Blu etooth connecti vity, a USB da ta cable, or a compatible memo ry card reader enhancement. You can also cut the video clip to send it in a multi media message. In the video edit or main view, select Options > Movie > Edit for MMS . The du ration a nd size of the vi deo clip is displayed. To edit the size of the clip, scroll left or right. When t he clip is the proper size to send, select Options > Send via MMS . If your video clip is in .mp4 format, you may not be able to send it in a multimedia message. To change the file format of the clip, sc roll to it in Phot os, and select Options > Edit > Video edit or > Optio ns > Settings > Resoluti on > MMS com patible . Return to the video editor main view, sele ct Options > Movie > Save , and enter a name for the c lip. The video clip is saved in .3gpp format and can be se nt in a multime dia messa ge. The fi le form at of the origina l vi deo clip does not change. Print images Image print To print images with Image print, select the image you want to print, and the prin t option in Photos, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your imag es using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth con nectivity. You can also print images usin g wireless LA N. If a c ompatible memory card is inserted, you can st ore the images to the mem ory card, and print them using a compatible printer. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 75
You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures take n with the camera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print, sele ct the image and the print option in Photos, camera, image editor, or image viewer. When you use Image p rint for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed. Sel ect a printer. Th e printer i s set as the defaul t printer. To use a printer compatible with PictBridge, connect the compatible data cable before you select th e print option, and check that the data cable mode is set to Image print or As k on connect ion . See "USB" , p. 100 . The printer is automatically di sp layed when you select the print opti on. If the default printer is not avail able, a list of availabl e printers is displayed. To change the defaul t printer, select Options > Settings > Default printer . Print preview After you select th e printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined lay outs. To change th e layout, scroll left or right to bro wse through the available layouts for th e selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, sc roll up or down t o dis play the additional pages. Print settings The available options v ary de pendin g on the c apabilities of the printing device you se lected. To set a default printer, select Op tions > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the l ist, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Print online With Print online, you can or der prints of images online directly to your home or to a store where you can pick them up. Y ou can als o order different products w ith the selected image, su ch as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depen d on the servic e provider. For more information on the application, see the guides available at the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Share images and videos online You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in ot her compatible online sharing é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 76
services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as draf ts and continue later, and view the conte nt of the al bums. The suppo rted content ty pes may vary depending on the service provider. To share im ages and videos online, y ou must have an account with an online imag e sharing service. You can usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. To up load a f ile from P hotos to the onli ne service, press , and select Photos . Select an album, scroll to the desired file, and select Op tions > Send > Post to web , or select the file and from the active toolbar. For more information on th e application and compatible service providers, see the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Gallery To access your images, video clips, and songs, or store an d organise sound clips and strea ming links, press , and select Appl ication s > Media > Gallery . Main view Press , and select Appl ications > Media > Gallery , and from the following: â Photos â t o v i e w i m a g e s a n d v i d e o s i n P h o t o s . See "About Photos" , p. 69 . â Video clips â to view videos in Video Centre â Songs â to open Music playe r . See "M usic player" , p. 45 . â Sound clips â to listen to sound clips â Streaming links â to view and open streaming links â Presentations â to view pres entations You can browse and open fo lders and copy and move items to folders. You can also create albums and copy and add items to albums. See "Albums" , p. 72 . Files stored on your compatible memory card (if insert ed) are indicated with . To open a file, press the scroll key. Video clips, RAM files, and streaming links open an d play in RealPlayer, and music and sound clips in Music player. See "RealPlayer " , p. 100. See "Music p layer" , p. 45 . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 77
To copy or move files to th e memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, selec t a file and Options > Move and copy > Copy to me mory card and from the available options. Sounds This fo lder cont ains all the sounds you have created with the Recorder applic ation or downloaded from the web. To listen to sound files, press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Gallery > So und cli ps . Scroll to a sound file, and press the scroll k ey. To pause playing, press the scroll key again. To fast forward or rewind, scroll right or left. To download sounds, sele ct the download link. Streaming links To open streaming links, press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Gallery > Streaming links . Select a link, and press the scroll key. To add a new stream ing link, select Opti ons > New link . Presentations With presentations, y ou can view SV G (scalable vector graphics) files, such as ca rtoons and maps. SVG images maintain thei r appearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view SVG files, press , and select Applications > Media > Gallery > Presentations . Scroll to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, selec t Options > Pause . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom o ut, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 de grees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively . To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9 . To switch between full and normal screen, press * . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 78
Home network About home network Your device is compat ible with UPnP. Using a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point device or a WLAN router, you can create a hom e network and conn ect compat ible UPnP devices that supp ort WLAN to th e network, su ch as your device, a compatible PC, a compatible printer, and a compatible sound system or television, or a sound system or a television equipp ed wi th a compatib le wireless multimedia receiver. To use the W LAN function of your devic e in a home network, you mu st have a working WLAN home connection set up and have other UPnP enabled home devices to connect to the same home network. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 93 . The home net work uses the security settin gs of the WLAN connection. Use the home network feat ure in a WLAN infrastructure network with a WLAN access point device and encryption enabled. You can share and synchronise media files in your mobile device with other comp atible UPnP devices usin g the home network. To manage yo ur home network settings, press , and select Tools > Co nnectivity > Ho me media . You can also use the home network to view, pl ay, copy, or print com patible me dia files from your mobile device. See "View an d share media files" , p. 81 . Your device is connec ted to the home network on ly if you accept a connection reques t from another compatible device, or selec t the option to v iew, play, print, or copy media files on your device or search for ot her devices in the Home netw ork folder. Important security information When you config ure your WLAN home network, enable an encryption method on y our access point device, then on the other devices you in tend to connect to your home network. Refer to the doc umentation of the device s. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from the devices. Y o u c a n v i e w o r c h a n g e t h e s e t t i n g s o f t h e W L A N i n t e r n e t access point in your d evice. See "Access points" , p. 147 . If you use th e ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible device, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN security mode when you configure the internet access point. See "Connection é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 79
settings" , p. 146 . This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party joining t he ad hoc network. Your device noti fies you if another device attempts to connect t o it and the h ome network. D o not accept connection requ ests from an unknown device. If you use WLA N in a network that does not have encryption, switch off shar ing your files with other devices, or do not share any private media files. See "Settings for home network" , p. 80 . Settings for home network To share media files saved in Photos with other compatible UP nP devices th rough WLAN, you must c reate and configure yo ur WLAN ho me internet access point, then conf igure the sett ings for ho me network in th e Home media application. See "WLAN internet access points" , p. 95 . See "Connection settings" , p. 146 . The options related to home network are not available in applications before the se ttings in the Home media application have been c onfigured. When you acc ess the Home med i a application for the first time, the setu p wizard open s and helps you define the home netw ork setting s for your devic e. To use the set up wizard later, in the Home media m ain view, se lect Option s > Run wizard , and follow the instruct ions on the display. To connec t a compatib le PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the related software. You get the s o f t w a r e f r o m t h e C D - R O M o r D V D - R O M s u p p l i e d w i t h y o u r device, or you c an download it from the device supp ort pages on the Nokia website. Configure settings To configure the settings for home network, sele ct Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Options > Settings and from the f ollowing: â Home access p oint â S el e ct Alwa ys ask if you want the device to ask for the home access point every time you connect to the home netw ork, Create new to define a new acc ess point th at is used automatically when you use the home netw ork, or None . If your home network does not have WLAN security settings enabled, you get a security warning. You ca n continue and switch the WLAN securi ty on later; or cancel defining the access point an d first switch on the WLAN security. See "Access points" , p. 147 . â Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compat ible devices in the home network. â Copy to â S e l e c t t h e m e m o r y w h e r e y o u w a n t t o s a v e copied media files. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 80
Set sharing on and define content Select Tool s > Connectivity > Home media > Share conten t and from the following: â Content sh aring â Allow or deny sharing media files with compatible devices. Do not set cont ent sharing on before you have configured all the othe r settings. If you set content sharing on, the other UPnP compatible devices in the home ne twork can view a nd copy your files yo u have select ed for shar ing in Images & vide o , and use playlists you have selected in Music . If you do not want the other de vices to access your files, set content sharing off. â Images & video â Select media files for sharing with other devices, or view the sh aring status of images and videos. To update the content of the fold er, select Options > Refresh co ntent . â Music â Select playlists for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing statu s and con tent of play lists. To update the cont ent of the folder, select Options > Refresh content . View and share media files To share your media files with othe r UPnP compatible devices in the home network, set cont ent sharing on. See "Set sharing on and define content" , p. 81 . If content sharing i s off in your d evice, yo u can still vie w and copy the media files stored in another home netw ork device if it is allowed by the other device. Show media files stored in your device To show your images, videos , and sound c lips in another home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following: 1. In Photos, select an image or a v ideo clip; or in Gallery, select a sound clip, and Options > Show via home network . 2. Select a compatible device in wh ich the media file is shown. The images are shown both in the other home network device and your de vice, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. 3. To stop sharing, select Options > Stop showing . Show media files stored in the other device To show media files that are stored on another ho me network device in your device (or in a com patible TV, for example), do the following: 1. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Browse home . Your device starts the search of other compatible devices. Device names start to appear on the display. 2. Select a devi ce from the list. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 81
3. Select the type of media yo u want to vi ew from the other device. The available file types depend on the features of the other device . To search files with di fferent cri teria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Option s > Sort by . 4. Select the media file or fo lder you wan t to view. 5. Press the scroll key, an d select Play or Show , and On devic e or Via home netw ork . 6. Sele ct the devi ce in which you want to sh ow the fil e. T o a d j us t t h e v o l u m e w h e n pl aying a video or sound clip, scroll left or right. To stop sharing the media file, select Back or Sto p (available when playing videos and music). Tip: You can print image s saved in Photos through a home netw ork with a UP nP compat ible printer. See "Image print" , p. 75 . Content sharing does not have to be switched on. Copy media files To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Photos and Options > Move an d copy > Copy to home network or Move to home net. . C ontent sharing does not ha ve to be switched on. To copy or transfer files fr om the other de vice to your device, select a file in the other device and t he desired copying option from the op tions list. Content sharing does not ha ve to be switched on. Home synchronisation Synchronise media file s You can synchroni se the media fi les in your mobile device with those in your home de vices. Make sure th at your mobile device is within rang e of your home WLAN and the home network has been set up. To set up home synchronisation, sel ect > Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync , and complete the wizard. To run the wizard later, in Home synchronisation main view, select Options > Run wizard . To manually synchronise cont ent in your mobile device with content in y our home devices, select Sync now . Synchronisation settings To change the synchronisation settings, sel ect Options > Synchronisati on settings , and from the following: â Synchronisation â Set automatic or manual synchronisation. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 82
â Source devices â Select the source devices for synchronisation. â Memory in use â View and select the memory used. â Memory m anager â To be informed wh en the devi ce is running out of memory, select Ask when full . Define incoming files To define and manage lists fo r incoming media files, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync > From home > Options > Open . To define the kinds of file s you want to transfer to your device, select them from the list. To edit the transfer se ttings, select Options > Edit and from the following: â List name â Enter a ne w name for the list. â Shrink images â Shrink images to save memory. â Amount â Define the maximum number or total size of the files. â Starting with â Define the download order. â From â D ef i ne t he d at e of t h e o l de s t f i le y o u w a nt t o download. â Until â Define the date of the la test file you want to download. For music files you can also specify the genre, artist, album, and track you want to download, and the source device used for downloading. To browse files in a speci fic category i n your dev ice, select a file type and Options > Show files . To create a predefined or customised list for incoming files, select Options > New list . To change the priority order of the filters in the list, select Options > Chan ge priority . Select the filter you want to select Drop to place it th ere. Define outgoing files To specify which types of files in your device to synchronise with your home media devi ces and how to synchronise them, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync > To home > Options > Open . Select the media type, Options , corresponding settings, and from the following: â Target devices â S e l e c t t a r g e t d e v i c e s t o s y n c h r o n i s e with or disable synchronisation. â Keep on phone â Select Yes to keep the m edia content in your device after successful synchronization. With images you can also select whether to keep th e original or a scaled version of it i n é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 83 mov e and Grab , move the filter to the new location, and
your device. Select ing the original size consumes more memory. Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (n etwork service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video se rvices using packet data or WLAN. You can also transfer video clips from a compat ible PC to your device and vi ew them in Video Centr e. Using packet data access poin ts to download videos may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provi d er's network. Contact your service provider for informat ion about data transmission charges. All videos are p layed in th e landscape mode by default. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the prici ng in the service or from the service provider. View and download videos 1. Press , and select Vid eo centre . 2. To connect to a service, scroll left or right, and select the desired video service. The device updates and displays the content available in the service. 3. To view videos by c ategories (if available), scroll down. To search for videos in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. 4. To view information about a video, select Options > Video details . 5. Some video clips can be st reamed over the air, but others must be first down loaded to your dev ice. To downlo ad a video cl ip, select Opti ons > Download . To stream a video clip or view a downloaded clip, select Option s > Play . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 84
To schedule an automatic download for videos in a service, select Option s > Schedule downloads . Automatic downloads are pe rformed daily during the time you define. Vide os already in My videos are not downlo aded. When the clip is playing, u se the scroll key and the selection ke ys to control the pl ayer. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Downloads continue in the ba ckground if you exit the application. The download ed videos are saved in Vi deo centre > My videos . To connect to th e internet to browse available services that you can add to Video Cent re, select Add new services . Internet videos Internet videos are video clip s distributed in the internet using RSS-based fee ds. You can add new feeds to Internet videos in the settings. You can view your feeds in the Internet video s folder in Video Cen tre. To add or delete feeds, selec t Options > Feed subscrip tions . To view the vi deos available in a feed, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view information ab out a video , select Options > Video details . To download a video, sc roll to it, and select Options > Download . To play the downloaded video, press the scroll key. Play downloaded videos The downloaded videos are saved in Video centre > My videos . To play a down loaded video, press the scroll ke y. To play a downloaded video in the home network, sele ct Options > Show via ho me network . Home network must be configured first. See "About home network" , p. 79 . When the clip is pla ying, use the scroll key and the selection k eys to control the play er. If there is not enough fre e space in the device memory and compatible memory card, the application automatically deletes some of the oldest vide os when new videos are downloaded. indicates videos that may soon be delet ed. To prevent a video from being automatically deleted ( ), select Optio ns > Protect . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 85
Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own v ideos to Video Centr e from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. To transfer videos from a compatible PC to the memory card in your device, do the following: 1. T o v ie w yo ur dev ic e o n a PC as a ma ss mem or y d ev ic e ( E:\ ) where you c an transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatib le USB data cable. 2. Sele ct Mass storage as the c o nnection mod e. A compatible memory card need s to be inserted in the device . 3. Sele ct the videos you want to copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the videos to E:\My Videos in the memory card. The transferred vide os appear in the My videos folder in Video Centre. Video files in other f olders of your device are not displayed. Video Centre settings In the Video Centre main view, select Options > Settings and from the following: â Video ser vice selecti on â Select the video services you want to appear in Vide o Centre. You can also view the details o f a video service. Some services require a user nam e and a password that you receiv e from the service provider. â Default access points â Sel ect Always ask or User- defined to choose the access p oints used f or the data connecti on. Using packe t data acce ss points to download files may involve the transmissi on of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Con tact your servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. â Parental control â Activate the parental lo ck for video services, if the servic e provider has set age limits for videos. â Preferred memory â Select where the downloaded videos are save d. If the se lected memory becomes full, your device saves the content to a nother memory, if available, or deletes so me of the oldest files automatically. â Thumbnails â Select whe ther to view thumbnail images in video lists. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 86
Web browser With the We b browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) web pages on the internet as origin ally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or th e wireless markup language (WML). If the web page i s unrea dable or not support ed and garbage code is found whil e browsing, you can try to press , and select Web > Op tions > Setti ngs > Page > Default encoding , and select a corresponding encoding. To browse the web , you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. Browse the web Press , and select Web . Shortcut: To start the browser, press and hold 0 in the standby mode. Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and pr otection against harmful software. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To bro wse a w eb page , in th e bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter the address in th e field ( ), and press the scroll key. Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of m emory while loading such a page, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web pages without graphics, to save memory, select Option s > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . To enter a new web page address you want to visit, select Options > Go to web address . Tip: To visit a web page saved as a bookmark in the bookmarks view, while browsing, press 1 , and select a bookmark. To ret rieve the l atest conten t of the pa ge from the serve r, select Option s > Navigation opti ons > Re load . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 87
To save the web address of the current page as a bookmark, select Option s > Save as bookmark . To use visual history to view snapsh ots of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (available if History li st is set on in the browser settings and the current page is not t he first page you visit) . To go to a previo usly vis ited page , select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Optio ns > Tools > Save page . You can save pages and browse them later wh en offline. You can also group these saved pages into folders. To access the pages you have saved, select Options > Bookmarks > Saved pages . To open a sublist of commands or actions for the p age that is open , select Options > Service options (if supported by the web page). To allow o r prevent the aut omatic op ening of mult iple windows, select Optio ns > Windo w > Block pop- ups or Allow po p-ups . Shortcuts while browsing â Press 1 to open your bookmarks. â Press 2 to search for keywords in the current page. â Press 3 to return to th e previous p age. â Press 5 to list all open windows. â Press 8 to show t he page ov erview of the c urrent page. Press 8 again to zoom in and view th e desired section of the page. â Press 9 to enter a new web address. â Press 0 to go to the home page (if defined in settings). â Press * and # to zoom in or out on the page. Tip: To return to the standby mode with the browser open in the background, press twice or the end key. To return to the browser, press and hold , and select the browser from the list. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar he lps you select frequently used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar, press and h old the scroll k ey on an empty spot on a web page. To move within t he toolbar, scroll left or righ t. To select a feature, press the scroll ke y. In the toolbar, select from the following: â Frequently us ed links â View a list of the web addresses you visit frequently. â Page overview â See an overvi ew of the c urrent we b page. â Find â Search for keywords within the current page. â Reload â Refresh th e page. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 88
â Subscribe to web feeds (if available) â View a list of available web feeds on th e current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Navigate p ages Mini Map and pa ge overview help you navigate web pages that contain a large am ount of information. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the web page you browse. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired l ocation , stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and leaves you at the selected location. When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you can also use Page over view to vie w what kind of information the p age contains. To show th e page over view of the current page, press 8 . To find the desi red spot on the page, scroll u p, down, left, or right. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are use d by the weblog community and news organisations to share the latest headlines or text, for example, news feeds. Blogs o r weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feed s use RSS and Atom technologies. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web application automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web feed, select Options > Subscribe to web feeds . To view the w eb feeds to which y ou have subscr ibed, in the bookmarks view, select Web f eeds . To update a web feed, select it and Options > Refresh . To define ho w the web fe eds are updated, select Options > Settings > Web feeds . Widgets Your device supports widgets. Widgets are small, downloadable web applications that deliver multimedia, news feeds, and other informat ion, such as weather reports, to your device. Installed widgets appear as separate applications in the Applications folder. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 89
You can download widget s using the Down load! application or from the web. The default access point for wi dgets is the same as in the web browser. When ac tive in the background, some widgets may update information automatically to your device. Using widgets may involve the tra nsmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Content search To search for keywords, phone numbers, or e-mail addresses within the current web page, select Opt ions > Find and the desired option. To go to the prev ious match, scroll up. To go to the next match, scroll down. Tip: To search for keywords within the p age, press 2 . Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringin g tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purc hase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your device , for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Photos. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To download an item, do the following: 1. Select the link. 2. Select the appr opriate option to p urchase the item (for example, Bu y ). 3. Carefully read al l the information provided. 4. To continue or cance l the download, select the appropriate option (for example, Accep t or Cancel ). When you start a down load, a list of ongoing a nd completed downloads from th e current browsing session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Downlo ads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Option s to cancel ongoing download s, or open, s ave, or de lete comp leted downloads. Bookmarks The bookmarks view open s when you open the W eb application. You can select web addresses from a list or é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 90
from a collection of bookm a rks in the Recently vi sited pages folder. You can also enter th e URL address o f the web page you wa nt to visit direc tly into the field ( ). indicates the start ing pa ge defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the internet . You can also save addresses received in messages to your bookmarks and send saved bookmarks. To open the bookmarks vi ew while browsing, press 1, or select Options > Bookma rks . To edit th e details of a book mark, such as the title, sele ct Option s > Bookm ark man ager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also open other browser folders. The Web applicatio n allows you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the c ontent of the p ages you have saved offlin e. Web also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Re cently vi sited pages folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web feeds , you can view sa ved links to web feed s and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web fee ds are commonly found on major news organisat ion web pages, personal weblogs, online communities th at offer the latest headlines, and article summaries. Web feeds use RSS and Atom te chnologies. Empty the cache The information or services you hav e accessed are stored in the cache memo ry of the dev ice. A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have t ried to access or have acc essed confidential information re qu iring passwords, empty the cache after eac h use. The information or servic es you have accessed ar e stored in the c ache. To empty the cache, sele ct Options > Clear pr ivacy data > Cache . End the connection To end the c onnection and view the browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect ; or to end th e connection and close t he browser, select Op tions > Exit . To take the browser to th e background, press the end key once. To end th e connection, press and hold the en d key. To delete the informatio n the network server collects about yo ur visits to va rious web pages, select Op tions > Clear priva cy data > Cookies . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 91
Connection security If the security in dicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, th e data transmission betw een the d evice and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indic ate that the d a ta transmission betw een the gatew ay and the content server (or place wh ere the requested resource is stored ) is secure. The service pr ovider secures the data transmission betw een the gatew ay and the content server. Security ce rtificates m ay be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identity of the server is not au thentic or if you do not have th e correct security certificat e in your de vice. For mo re information, contact yo ur service provider. Web settings Press , and select Web . Select Option s > Settings and from the following: General settings â Access point â Chan ge th e defau lt ac cess poi nt. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change , create, edit, o r remove th em. â Homepage â Define the home page. â Mini map â Set Mini Map on or off. See "Navigate pages" , p. 89 . â History list â While browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set Histor y list on. â Security warnings â Hide or show security notifications. â Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. Page settings â Load content â Select whethe r you want to load images and other objects wh ile browsing. If you select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, select Options > Tools > Load i mages . â Screen size â Select between fu ll screen and th e normal view with the options list. â Default e ncoding â If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select anot her encoding according to language for the current page. â Block pop-up s â Allow or block automatic opening o f different pop-up s while browsing . â Automati c reload â If you want th e web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On . â Font si ze â Define the font siz e that is used for web pages. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 92
â Recently visited p ages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If yo u want to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently visited pages folder, bu t hide the f older from the bookmarks view, sele ct Hide folder . â Form data saving â If you do not want the data you enter to different forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time y ou open the page, select Off . â Cookies â Enable or di sable the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings â Automat ic upda tes â Define whet her you want the web feeds to be updated automatically and how often you want to update them. Se tting the applicat ion to retrieve we b feeds aut omaticall y may involve th e transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transm ission charges. â Acc. point fo r auto-update â Select the d esired access point for updating. This op tion is only available when Automati c updates is on. Connections Your device offers several opt ions to connect t o the internet or to another co mpatible device or PC. Wireless L AN Y o u r d e v i c e s u p p o r t s w i r e l e ss local area network (WLAN). With WLAN, you can connect y our device to the in ternet and compatible device s that have WLAN. About WLAN To use WLAN, it must be available in the location, an d your device must be connected t o the WLAN. Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Features that use WL AN, or that are allowed to run in the background while u sing other features, increa se the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Your device supports the following WLAN features: â IEEE 802.11b/g standard â Operation a t 2.4 GHz â Wired equivale nt privacy (W EP) with ke ys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protec ted access (WPA), and 802.1x é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 93 Privacy settings
encryption methods. Th ese functions can b e used only if they are supp orted by the network. WLAN connection s To use WLAN, you must create an internet access point (IAP) in a wireless LAN. Use the access point for applications t hat need to conn ect to th e internet. See "WLAN internet access points" , p. 95 . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption met hods to incr ease the security of your wireless LAN conne ction. Using en cryption reduce s the risk of unauthorized access to your data. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection u sing a WLAN internet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connecti on. You can use WLA N during a voice call or when p acket data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Rememb er t o comp ly with any applicable safety requirements wh en establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check th e unique med ia access contro l (MAC) address that identi fies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a W LAN and manage your WLAN connecti ons. The WLAN wizard shows th e status of your WLAN connections in t he active standby mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and select it. If the search finds WLANs, for example, WLAN network found is displayed, to create an internet access point (IAP) and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Start Web browsing . If you select a secured WLAN network, you are asked to enter the relev ant passcodes. To connect to a h idden network, you must enter the co rrect networ k name (service set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN . If you are connected to a WLAN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web browse r using this IAP, select the status and Cont inue Web browsin g . To end the con nection in the WLAN, select the status and Disconne ct WLAN . If WLAN scanning i s off and you are not connected to any WLAN, WLAN s canning off is displayed. To set scanning é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 94
on and search for available WL ANs, select the status and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, select the status and Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, select the status and select WLAN scanning off . To access the WLAN wizard ap plication in the menu, press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. . WLAN internet acce ss points Press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. Select Op tions and from the following: â Filter WLAN netw orks â Filter out WLANs in the li st of found networks. The select ed networks are filtered out the next time the application se arches for WLANs. â Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an acti ve conn ection, the connection details are displayed. â Define access point â Create an internet access point (IAP) in a WL AN. â Edit access point â Edit the details of an existing IAP. You can also use connection manag er to create internet access points. See "Active data con nections" , p. 95 . Operating modes There are two operating modes in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communica tion: wi reless device s are connecte d to each other through a WLAN access point device, or wi reless devices are connecte d to a wired LAN through a WLAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly with each other. Connection manager Active d ata connec tions Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > Conn . mgr. > Activ e data con nections . In the active data c onnections view, you can see t he open data connections: data calls packet data connec tions WLAN co nnection s Note: The actual time invoiced for c alls by your service provid er may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 95
To end a connection, select Options > Disconne ct . To close all open connections, select Opti ons > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, sel ect Options > Details . T he details shown depend on the conn ection type. Available WLAN networks Press , and select Tools > Conn ectivity > Co nn. mgr. > Availa ble WLAN networ ks . The available WLAN view shows a list of WLANs within range, their netw ork mode (inf rastructure or ad hoc), and signal strength indicator. is shown for networks with encryption, a nd i f y o u r d e v i c e h a s a n a c t i v e c o n n e c t i o n in the netw ork. To view the details of a network, select Options > Details . To create an internet acce ss point in a network, select Option s > Define access point . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth conne ctivity You can make a wireless connection to other compatible devices with Blue tooth connectivity. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enhanceme nts such as headsets and car ki ts. You can use Bluetooth conne ctivity to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; make a wireless connection to your compatible PC (for exampl e, to transfer files); and connect t o a compatible printer t o print im ages with Image print. Since dev ices with Bl ue tooth wirele ss technology communicate using radio waves, they do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. Howe ver, they must be within 10 metres (33 feet) of each ot her, although the connect ion may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant wi th Bluetooth S pecification 2.0 supporting the following profil es: Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile, Advanced Audio Distribution Profile, Audio/Video Remote Control Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, Basic Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Human Interface D evice Profile, Object Push Profile, SIM Access Profile, Synchronization Profile, S erial Port Profile, and Phonebook Access Profile. To ensure in teroperability between other devices supp orting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhancements for th is model. Check with the manufact urers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 96
There may be restrictions on usin g Bluetooth technolo gy in some locations. Check wi th your local authorities or service provider. Features using Blu etooth technology, or allowin g such features to run in t he background while using othe r features, increase th e demand on batt ery power an d reduce the battery life. When the de vice is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connecti vity. Settings Press , and select Tools > Blue tooth . When you open th e application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your dev ice. You can c hange the name la ter on. Select from the following: â Blueto oth â To make a wireless connection to another compatible device, first set Bluetoot h connectivity On , th en establish a connection. To swit ch off Bluetooth conne ctivity, select Off . â My phone' s visibili ty â To allow your device to be found by othe r devices with Blue tooth wirele ss technology, select Sh own to all . To set a time after which the visibility is set from sh own to hidden, select Define period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . â My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluet oot h wireless technology. â Remot e SIM mode â To enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhanc ement, to us e the SIM card in your device to co nnect t o the network, se lect On . See "Remote SIM mode" , p. 99 . Securi ty tips Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . When you are not using Blu etooth connectivity, to control who can find your devi ce and connect to it, select Bluetoot h > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with or accept conn ection requests f rom an unknown device. This protects your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth conn ections can be active at a time. For example, if you ar e connecte d to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. 1. Open the a pplication where the item you wa nt to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible de vice, open Phot os. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 97
2. Sele ct the item and Option s > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless tec hnology that are within rang e are displayed. Device icons are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt the search, select Stop . 3. Sele ct the devi ce with wh ich you want to connect. 4. If the other device requires pairin g before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair device s" , p. 98 . When the conne ction is established, Sending data is displa yed. Tip: When searching for devi ces, some devices may show only the unique address (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# in the sta ndby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create your own passcode (1 to 16 digits), and agree with th e owner of the othe r device to use the same code. Dev ices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode . The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices that are with in range are displayed. 2. Select the devic e, and enter the pa sscode. Th e same passcode must be entered on t he other devic e as well. 3. Some audio enhancemen ts connect aut omatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise , scroll to the enhancemen t, and select Options > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorised or unau thorised, scro ll to the device, and select from the following op tions: â Set as au thorised â Connections between your device and the auth orised device can be made without your knowle dge. No se parate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for you r own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC or devices that belong to so meone you trust. indicates authorised devices in th e paired devices view. â Set as unautho rised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted se parately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and sele ct Options > Delete . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 98
If you want to cancel a ll pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Blueto oth connecti vity When you receive data through Bluet ooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to acc ept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in th e Inbox folder in Messaging. Messages received through Blue tooth connectivity are indicated by . Block devices Press , and select Tools > Blue tooth . To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your de vice, scroll right to open Paired devices . Select a device you want to block and Options > Block . To unblock a device , scroll right to Blocked devices , select a device, and Option s > Delete . To unb lock all blocked devices, select Options > Delete all . If you reject a pairing requ est from another device, you are asked if you want to block all future co nnection requests from this dev ice. If you accept th e query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mode Before the remote S IM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digi t passcode, and set the other device as authorised. To use the remote S IM mode with a compat ible car kit enhanceme nt, activate Bluetooth conn ectivity, and enable the use of the rem ote SIM mode with your device. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. W h e n th e r e m o t e S I M m o d e i s o n i n y o u r d e v i c e , Remote SIM mode is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless ne twork is turned of f, as indica ted by in the signal strength indicator area, and you cannot use SIM card s ervices or features requir ing cellular network coverage. When the w ireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compa tible connected enhancemen t, such as a car kit, to make or re ceive calls. Yo ur wireless devi ce will not make an y calls while in this mo de, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device. To make calls from your device, you must leave the remote SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press th e power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 99
USB Press , and select Tools > Conn ectivity > USB . To have th e device ask the purpose of t he connection each time a compat ible data cable i s connected, se lect Ask on connec tion > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you w ant to ch ange the mode during an active conne ction, select USB connec tion mode and from the following: â PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Nseries PC suite, and Nokia Software Updater. â Mass storage â Transfer data between your device and a c ompatible PC. Us e thi s mod e also for downloading maps with the Nokia Map Loader PC applica tion. â Image transf er â Print images on a compatible printer. â Media transfer â Synchronise music with Windows Media Player. â Multimedia â Synch ronise your images, videos, and messages and their p roperties between your Nokia device and a compatible PC. PC connections You can use your dev ice with a variety of compat ible PC connectiv ity and data communication s applications . With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, transfer images between your devi ce and a compatible PC. For information on Appl e Macintosh support and connecting your device to an Apple Macintosh device, visit www.nseries.com/mac. Media folder RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play video clips or stream me dia files over th e air without saving t hem to the devic e first. RealPlayer supports files with extensi ons such as . 3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlayer do es not necessarily support all file formats or all the va riations of file formats. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 100
Play video clips Press , and select Appl ications > Media > RealPlaye r . To play a saved media file, select Video cl ips , a clip, and Play . To list previously played fi l es, in the application main view, sel ect Recently played . To adjust th e volume, u se the volum e key. After you select a media file, select Options and from the following: â Send â Send a file using a multimedia message, e- mail, or other connection me thods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. â Use video â Assign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. â Mark/ Unmark â Mark items in the list to send or delete multiple item s at the same time. â View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, a nd duration. â Settings â Edit the settings for video playback and streaming. Stream conten t over the air Many service p roviders require y o u to use an in ternet access point (IAP) for your default a ccess point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp :// URL address. However, RealPlayer plays a .ram file if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. To stream content over t h e air (network service), in RealPlayer or Photos, select a streaming link saved in the Streaming links folder. You can also receive a streaming link in a text message or multimedia message, or open a link on a web p age. Before li ve conte nt begi ns streamin g, your device conn ects to the site and starts loading the content. The conte nt is not saved in your de vice. RealPlayer settings Press , and select Applicati ons > Media > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer se ttings in a special message from the servic e provid er. Fo r more information, contact your service provider. Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Vide o â Select whether video clips are played in full screen or in the normal view, and w hether the clips are automatically repeated af ter they finish playing. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 101
â Streaming â Select wh ether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range used when c onnecting. Co ntact your service prov ider for the correct settings. Advanc ed settings To edit the advanced se ttings, in the settin gs view, select Streaming > Network > Options > Advanced settings . To select the ba ndwidth used for a network, select the network setting and the desired value. To edit the bandwidt h yourself, sele ct User def ined . Adobe Flash Player Press , and select Appl ications > Media > Flash Player . Use Adobe Flash Player to vi ew, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices. To open a flash file, select it, and Open . Licences To view di gital ri ghts lic ences, p ress , and sele ct Applicati ons > Media > Licences . Digital rights management Content owners m ay use different types of digit al rights management (DRM) tech nologies to protect th eir intellect ual property, inc l udin g copyri ghts. Thi s devic e uses various types of DR M software to access DRM- protected conten t. With this device you can access content pr otected with W MDRM 10, OMA DRM 1 .0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If c ertain DRM software fail s to protect th e content, c ontent owners m ay ask that su ch DRM software's ability to acce ss new DRM-protected conte nt be revoked. Revocation may also prevent rene wal of such DRM-protected content already i n your device. Revocation of such DRM software does n ot affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM- protecte d content. Digital rights management (DRM) protected content comes with an associated acti vation key that defines your rights to use th e content. If your device h as OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activ ation keys and the content, use the backu p feature of Nokia Nseries PC Su ite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the ac tivation keys which need to be restored with th e content for y ou to be able to c ontinue the use of OMA DRM- protected con tent after the de vice memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the activation keys in case the files on your dev ice get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM pr otected content, both the activation ke ys and the conten t will be lost if the dev ice é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 102
memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and the co ntent in case the files on your device get corrupted. L osing the activation keys or th e content may limit you r ability to use the same c ontent on you r device again. For more informatio n, contact your service provider. Some licences may be c o nnected to a sp ecific SIM card, and the protected content can be accesse d only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. In the main v iew, select from the followin g: â Valid li cences â View licences that are connec ted to media files or whose validity period has not beg un. â Invalid licence s â View licences that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a protected med ia file in the device but no connected activation key. â Not in use â View licences that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time for a med ia file, sel ect an inv alid licence and Opti ons > Get new licence (web service messages must be enabled). See "Web service message settings" , p. 113 . To view detailed information, such as the validi ty status and ability to send the file, scro ll to an activation key, and press the scroll key. Recorder Press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can re cord voice memos and telephone con versations. To record a telephone co nversation, op en Recorder during a voice call. Both pa rties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. Messaging Only devi ces that h ave comp atible features can receive and display multimedia messa ges. The appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Messaging main view Press , and select Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 103
Messaging contains the follow ing folders: â Inbox â Received messages, exce pt e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. â My folders â Organise your messages into folders. Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use text s in the Templates folder in My folders . You can also create and save your own templates. â New mailbox â Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e- ma il messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messag es offline. â Draft s â Draft messages that have not been sent are st ored he re. â Sent â The last messages that have been sent, excluding messages sen t using Bluetooth connect ivity, are stored here. You can cha nge the number of messages to save in this folder. â Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in t he outbox, for examp le, when your device is outside netw ork coverage. â Reports â You c an request the ne twork to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter and send service re quests (also kn own as USSD commands), su ch as activatio n commands for net work services, to your serv ice provi der, selec t Op tion s > Service commands in the Me ssaging main view . Cell br oadcast (network service) al lows you t o receive messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For ava ilable topics and re levant topic numbers, contac t your service provider. In th e Messaging main view, se lect Op tions > Cell br oadcast . Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A pack et data connection may prev ent cell broadcast reception. Write and send messages Press , and select Messaging . Before you can cr eate a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the co rrect connection sett ings in place. See "Define the e- mail settings" , p. 107 . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 104
The wireless network may limi t the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exce eds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If yo u attempt to sen d an e-mail message that exceeds the size limi t of the e-mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to resend it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and con tinuous attempts to resend the e- mail may increase your phone bill. In t he Outbox folder, you can delete such a messa ge or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. Sele ct New message > Message to send a text message or a multimedia message (MMS), Audio messa ge to send a n audio message (a multimedia message that includes one sound clip), or E-mail to send an e-mail. 2. In the To field, press the sc roll key to select recipients or groups from c ontacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs pho ne number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients, press * . You can also co py and paste the number or addre ss from the clipboard. 3. In the Subject field , enter the subject of the e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Message header fields . 4. In the message field , write the message. To insert a templa te or n ote, sele ct Opti ons > Insert > Insert text > Template or Note . 5. To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Optio ns > Insert , the o bject type or source, and the desired object. To insert a business card, slide, note, or some other file to the message, select Options > Insert > Insert oth er . 6. To capture an image or record video or sound for a multimedia message, select Options > Insert > Insert image > New , Insert video clip > New , or Insert so und clip > New . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , Note , or Other for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8. To send the message, select Options > Send , or press the call key. Note: Yo ur device may indica te that your message was sent to the message center number programmed é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 105
into your de vice. Yo ur device ma y not indica te whether the message is receiv ed at the inte nded destination. For more details about messagin g services, contact your service provider. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Longer messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may ch arge a ccordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single messa ge. You may not be a ble to send video cli ps that are saved in the .mp4 f ormat or th at exceed the size li mit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Tip: You ca n combine images, video, sound, and text to a presentation and send it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedia message, and se lect Op tions > Insert > Insert presentation . The option is shown only if MMS creation mode is set t o Guided or Free . See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 110 . Messaging inbox Receive messages Press , and select Messa ging > Inbox . In the Inb ox folder, indicates an u nread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new message are shown in the standb y mo de. To open th e message, select Show . To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To repl y to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia messa ge objects ma y conta in malicious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notifi cation that a multimedia message is waiting in the mu ltimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multi media message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound i s included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects t hat have been inclu ded in the multimedia message, select Options > Objec ts . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 106
If the message includes a multimedia p resentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Data, settings, and web service messag es Your device can receive many kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, calendar entr ies, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive settings from your service provider or company information mana gement department in a configuration message. To save the data from the message, select Options and the corresponding option. Web service messages are notifications (for exa mple, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscrip tion, contact your service provider. Message reader With Message reader you ca n listen to tex t, multimedia , and audio messages and e-mail. To change the message read ing settings in the Sp eech application, select Options > Speech . See "Speec h To listen to new messages or e-mail, in the standby mode, press and hold the left sel e ction key until Message reader starts. To listen to messages from yo ur Inbox or e-mail from your Mailbox, select a message and Options > Listen . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause and continue the reading, press the scroll key. To skip to the next message, scroll right. To r eplay the current message or e-mail, sc roll left. To skip to the previous message, scroll le ft in the beginning of the message. To adjust the volu me, s croll up or d own. To view the c urrent message or e-mail in text fo rmat without t he sound, select Options > View . Mailbox Define the e-mail settings Tip: To define your mailbox settings, press , and select Messaging > Mail boxes . To use e-mail, you must have a valid intern et access point (IAP) in the device and de fine your e-mail settings correctly. See "Access po ints" , p. 147 . See "E -mail settings" , p. 111 . You must hav e a separate e-mail account. Fol low the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provid er (ISP). é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 107 " , p. 138 .
If you select New mailbox in the Messagi ng main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to d o so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox gu ide, select Start . When you create a ne w mailbo x, the name you give to the mailbox replaces New mailbox in the Messaging main view. You ca n have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox Press , and select Messa ging and a mailbox. When you open the mailbox, the devic e asks if you want to connect to the mailbox ( Connect to mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbo x and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you v iew messages onlin e, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrie ved e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E-mail in the Messaging main view or Options > Cre ate message > E-mail in your mailbox. See "Write and send messages" , p. 104 . Retrieve e-mail me ssages Press , and select Messa ging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to the remot e mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail message s may co ntain malicio us software or otherwise be harm ful to your device or PC. 1. When you h ave an open conn ection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retriev e e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrie ve only the messages that have been marked, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2. To clos e the conn ection and v iew the e-mai l messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3. To open an e-mail message, pr ess the scroll key. If the e-mail message has not be en retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachment s, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; select Op tions > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail messages automatically, select Options > E-mail settings > Automatic r etrieval . See "Automatic retrieval settings" , p. 113 . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 108
Setting the device to retrie ve e- mail auto matically m ay involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provi d er's network. Contact your service provider for informat ion about data transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages Press , and select Messa ging and a mailbox. To delete the con tents of an e- mail message from th e device while still reta ining it in the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete . In Delete e- mail from: , selec t Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headi ngs in the remote mailbox. Although you d elete the message content, th e e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to rem o ve the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, then make a c o n n e c t i o n f r o m y o u r d e v i c e t o t h e r e m o t e m a i l b o x a g a i n to update the stat us. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel deleting an e -mail from the device and server, scroll to an e-ma il that has been marked to be dele ted during the next connection , and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, t o end the data c onnection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disc onnect . View messages on a SIM card Press , and select Messaging . Before you can view SIM me ssages, you must copy them to a fold er in your dev i ce. 1. In the Messaging ma in view, select Opt ions > SIM messages . 2. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3. Select Options > Copy . A li st of folders opens. 4. To start copying, select a folder and OK . To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigu red in your device, or you may receiv e them in a message . To enter settin gs manually, fi ll in all fields mark ed with Must be define d or an asterisk. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 109
Some or all message centre s or access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remov e them. Text message settings Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: â Message ce ntres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. â Message cen tre in use â Select which message centre to use to deliver text messages. â Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support . â Receive report â S elect whether th e network sends delivery reports on your messages (network service). â Message vali dity â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first atte mpt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. â Message se nt as â Contact your service provider to learn if your messag e centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. â Preferred connection â Select the connection to use. â Reply via same centre â Select whe ther you want th e reply message to be sent using the same text message centre numb er (n etwork servic e). Multimedia message s ettings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select fr om the f ollowing: â Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. â MMS creation mode â If you select Guided , the device informs you if you t ry to send a message that may not be supported by th e recipient. If you select Restri cted , the device pr events you from sending messages that may not be supported. To include content in your messages withou t notifications, select Free . â Access point in use â Selec t which ac cess p oint is used as the preferre d connection. â Multimedia retrieval â Select how you w ant to receive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellular netw ork, select Auto in home netw. . Outside your home cell ular network, you receive a not ification th at there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia messa ge centre. Outside your home ce llular network, sendin g and receiving multimedia messa ges may cost you more. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 110
If you select Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic , your devi ce automa tically m akes an acti ve packet data connec tion to retrieve th e message both in and outside your home cellular network. â Allow anonymou s msgs. â Select whet her you want to reject messages from an an onymous sender. â Receive adverts â Defi ne whethe r you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. â Receive reports â Select whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network servic e). â Deny repo rt sendin g â Select whethe r you want to prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. â Message vali dity â Select for how long the message centre resends your message if the first atte mpt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within this time period, t he message is dele ted from the message centre. E-mail se ttings Manage mailboxes Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > E-ma il . To select whi ch mailbox you w ant to use to send e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mail box . To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , scroll to the desired mailbox, and press C . To create a new mailbox, in Mailboxes , select Options > New mailbox . The name you giv e to the new mailbox replaces New mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to ch ange the connection settings, user settings, retrieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Connection settin gs Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Connection settings . To edit the settings for th e e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail , and from the following: â User name â Enter your user name given to you by your service provider. â Password â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you a re prompted for the passwo rd when you try to con nect to your re mote mailbox. â Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. â Access point in use â S e l e ct a n i n t e r ne t a c c e s s p o in t (IAP). See "Access points" , p. 147 . â Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 111
â Mailbox type â D efines the e-mail protocol t hat your remote mailbox service pr ov ider recommends. The options are PO P3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. â Security â Select the se curity option use d to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. â Por t â Define a port for t he connection. â APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP3 protoco l to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail serv er while conn ecting to th e mailbox. To edit the settings fo r the e-mail you send, select Outgoi ng e-mai l and from the following: â My e-mail address â Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. â Outgoing mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server th at sends your e-mail. You may onl y be able to use the ou tgoing server of your service provider. Co ntact your serv ice provid er for more information. The settings for User name , Passwor d , Access point in use , Security , and Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e-mail . User settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User settings . Select fr om the f ollowing: â My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-ma il address in the recip ientâÂÂs device wh en the recipientâÂÂs device su pports this function . â Send message â D e f i n e h o w e - m a i l i s s e n t f r o m y o u r device. Sele ct Immediately for the devi ce to connect to the mail box when you sel ect Send message . If you select During n ext conn. , e-mail is sent wh en the connecti on to the remot e mailbox is avail able. â Send copy to self â Sele ct whether y ou want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. â Include signature â Se lect whethe r you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. â New e-mail alerts â Select whether you want to receive th e new e-mail indic ations (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Retrieval settings . Select fr om the f ollowing: é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 112
â E-mail retrieval â Define which parts of the e-mail are r etrie ved: Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). â Retrieval amount â Define how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. â IMAP4 fo lder path (for IMAP4 only) â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. â Folder subscriptio ns (for IMAP4 only) â Subscribe to other folders in the remo te mailbox, and retrieve conten t from those fol ders. Automatic retrieval settin gs Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > E-ma il > Mailbox es , a mailbox, and Automat ic retrie val . Select from the following: â E-mail notifications â To automatically re trieve the headings to your device wh en you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto -updat e or Only in home netw. . â E-mail retrieval â To automatically retriev e the headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enab led or Only in home netw . . Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at th e same time. Setting the de vice to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provid er's network. Con tact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Web service message settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service messa ge . Select wh ether you w ant to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content w hen you receive a service message, select Download me ssages > Automati cally . Cell br oadcast se tting s Check the ava ilable topics and relate d topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast . Select fr om the f ollowing: â Recept ion â S elect whe ther you w ant to re ceive cell broadcast messages. â Language â Select the langua ges in whi ch you wa nt to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 113
â Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically searc hes for new topi c numbers, and saves the ne w numbers withou t a name to th e topic list. Other settings Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: â Save sent mess ages â Select whether you want to save a copy of th e te xt messages, multimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Sent folder. â Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sen t messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reach ed, the oldest message is deleted. â Memory in use â Select the memory where you want to save your messages. Make calls Voice calls 1. In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C . For international ca lls, press * twice for the characte r (which replaces the in tern ational access code), and enter the country cod e, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2. To end the call, press th e call key. 3. To end the call (or to cancel t he call attempt), press t he end key. Pressing the end key always ends a call, ev en if another application is active. To make a call from Contacts, press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. Matching contacts are listed. To call, press the call key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 114
Options during a call To adjust the volume du ring a call, use the volume key on the side of your device. You ca n also use the scroll key. If you have set the vo lume to Mu te , select Unmute first. To send an image or a video clip in a multimedi a message to the other parti cipant of th e call, sele ct Options > Se nd MMS (in UMTS netw orks only). You can edit th e message and change the recipient before sending. Press the call key to send th e file to a compatible devic e (network service). To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming cal l, select Opti ons > Hold . To switch between the active and th e held call, select Option s > Swap . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Ente r the DTMF string or search for it in Contacts. To enter a wait character (w) or a pause character (p), press * repeatedly. To send the tone, sele ct OK . You c an add DTMF ton es to the p hone number or DTMF fields in a contact c ard. Tip: When you have only one act ive voice call, to put the call on hold, press t he call key. To ac tivate the call, press the call key again. During an activ e call, to ro ute the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Options > Ac tivate loudspeaker . If you have attached a compa tible headset with Blueto oth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select Opti ons > Activ ate handset . To end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Re place . If you have several calls active, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that yo u can use during a v oice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or vide o mailbox (network services, video mailbox available only in the UMTS ne twork), press and hold 1 in the standby mode, and selec t Voice mailbox or Video ma ilbox . To change the phone number of your voice or video mailbox, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Option s > Change number . Enter the number (obtaine d from your network service provider), and sele ct OK . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 115
Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, select Silence . If you do not wan t to answer a call, press the end key. If you act ivate th e Call divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settings to divert ca lls, declining an incoming call also diverts th e call. When you select Silence to mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call, informin g the caller that you cannot answer the call. Se lect Options > Send message . To set up this option and write a standard text message, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Ca ll > Reject call with message . Make a conference call 1. Make a call to the first participan t. 2. To make a cal l to anot her participan t, sele ct Option s > New c all . The first call is automat ically p u t on hold. 3. When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conference call, select Option s > Conferen ce . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Confer ence > Add to conference . Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six participants, including yoursel f. To have a privat e conversation wit h one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Se lect a particip ant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still cont inue the conference c all. After you finish the priv ate con versation, select Optio ns > Conference to re turn to the conf erence call. To drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the part icipant, and select Drop . 4. To end the active conference call, p ress the end k ey. Speed dial a phone number To activate the feature, pre ss , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling . To assign a phone number to one of the number ke ys (2-9), press , and select Tools > Utilities > Speed dial . Scroll to the key t o which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 is é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 116
reserved for the voice or vi deo mailbox, and for starting the web browser. To call in the standby mode, press the assigned key and the call key. Call waiting You can answer a call w hile you have another call in progress if you have a ctivated call waiti ng in Settings > Phone > Call > Call waiting (network service). To answer the waiting call, press t he call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two ca lls, select Swap . To connec t an incoming call or a ca ll on hold with an active call and to disconnect yoursel f from the ca lls, select Options > Transfer . To end the active call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Option s > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device supports e nhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are no t dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user does not record vo ice tags in advance. Inste ad, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in con tacts, and compare s the spoken vo ice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to r ecognise the voice comm ands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesised voice ta g, open a co ntact card, a nd select Op tions > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficu lt in a noisy environment or during an e mergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice di aling in all circumstances. When you u se voice dialling , the loudspeaker is in use . Hold the device at a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 1. To start voice dialling, i n the standby mode, pr ess and hold the right sele ction ke y. If a co mpatible headset with the headset key is at tached, press and hold t he headset key to start voice dialling. 2. A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card . 3. The device plays a synthe sised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name an d number. After a time-out of 2.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised c ontact was not co rrect, select Next to view a list of othe r matches or Quit to cancel voice dialling. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 117
If several numbers are sa ved under the n ame, the device selects the default number if it has been set. If not, the device select s the first availa ble number in a contact card. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-wa y video between you and the recipient of the call. The live vid eo image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video cal l recipien t. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to vide o call services, contact your network service p rovider. A video call can only be mad e between two parties. The video call can be made to a c o mpatible mobile dev ice or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nnot be made while another voice, video, or data c all is active. Icons You are not receiving vi deo (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmittin g it). You have deni ed video sending from your device. To send a still image in stead, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied video send ing during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video call, ente r the phone number in the standby mode, or select Cont acts and a contact. 2. Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the cal l is not successful (for example, vi deo calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The vide o call is ac tive when you see two vi deo images, and hear the sound through the l oudspeaker. The call recip ient may deny v ideo sending ( ), in which c ase you only hear th e sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. 3. To end the vid eo call, press the end key. Options during a video call To change between showing video or hearin g only sound, select Option s > Enable , or Disable and the desired option. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 118
To use the main camera to send video, select Options > Use main camera . To switch back to the secondary camera, select Options > Use secondary ca mera . To take a snapshot of the video you are sending, selec t Option s > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to the recipi ent. The snapshot is not saved. Press Cancel to resume sending video. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To route the audio to a compatible headset with Bluetooth c onnectivity attached to your device, sele ct Option s > Activate handsfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeake r of your device, select Options > Activate handset . To chan ge the vide o quality, select Options > Video pref erence . Normal quality is framerate 10 fps. Use Clearer detail is lower framerate for small, static details. Use Smoo ther motion for moving image that requires a higher framerate. To adjust the volume during a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, is display ed. To answer the video c all, press the call key. All ow video image to be sent to ca ller? is displayed. To start sending live vi deo imag e, select Yes . If you do not ac tivate the video c all, video sending is not activated, and you only hear the sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces t he video image. To rep lace the grey screen with a still image captured by th e camera in you r device, select Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call > Image in video call . To end th e video call, press the end key. Video sharing Use video sharing (network serv ice) to send live video or a video clip from your mo bile device to another compatible mobile dev ice during a voice call. The loudspeaker is ac tive when you activate Video sharin g. If you d o not want to use the loudspe aker for the voice call wh ile you share video, y ou can also use a compatib le headset. Requirements Video sharing requires a UMTS conn ection. Your abilit y to use video sharing de pends on the av aila bility o f the UMTS network. Contact your service provi der for more é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 119
information on the service an d network av ailability and fees associated with using this service. To use video sharing you must do the following: â Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. â Ensure you have an active UMTS conn ec tion and are within UMTS network coverage. If you start th e sharing session while you are within UMTS network covera ge and a hand over to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. You cannot start video sharing if y ou are not wi thin UMTS network coverage. â Ensure that bot h the sender and recipien t are registered to the UMTS n etwork. If you inv ite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network cov erage, does not ha ve video sharin g instal led, or p erson - to-person connections set up, the recipient does not know that you are sending an invitation. You receiv e an error message that indicates that the recipient cannot accept the invitati on. Settings To set up video sharing, you need person-to-person and UMTS connection settings. Person-to-person connection setti n gs A person-to-person connection is a lso known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you ca n use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. Your service provider may send yo u the settings over th e air or give you a list of the need ed paramete rs. To add a SIP address to a contact card, do the f ollowing: 1. Press , and select Con tacts . 2. Open the c ontact card (or sta rt a new card for that person). 3. Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 4. Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (yo u can use an IP address instead of a domain name). I f y o u d o n o t k n o w t h e S I P address for the contact, you can use t he phone number of the recipient, includ ing the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider ). UMTS connect ion settings To set up your UMTS conne ction, do the foll owing: â Contact your servic e provider to establish an agreemen t for you to use the UMTS net work. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 120
â Ensure that y our device UMTS access p oint connection settings are configured p roperly. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video : 1. To share live video du ring the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Recorded clip . Select a clip you want t o share. You may ne ed to conver t the video clip int o a suitable format to be able to share it. Clip must be conver ted for sharin g. Continue? appears. Select OK . 2. To share the vi deo, select Option s > Invite . If you share live video, your device sends t he invitation to the SIP address you have added to the recipient's contact c ard. If the con tact inform ation of th e recipient is saved in Contacts, and the contac t has several SIP addresses or ph one numbers in cluding the country co de, select the de sired address or number. If the SIP address o r phone number of the recipient is not available, en ter the SIP address or the phone number of the recipien t including the coun try code, and select OK to send th e invitation . Sharing begins automatically when the recipi ent accepts th e invita tion. Options during video sharing to zoom the vi deo (available for se nder only) to adj ust the brightne ss (avail able for sende r only ) or to mute or unmute the microphone or to switch the lo udspeaker on and off to switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only) 3. To end the sharin g session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press t he end key. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you shared, selec t Save when prompted. The shared vide o is saved in Photos. If you access other applicatio ns while you are sharing a video clip, the sharin g is paused. To retu rn to the v i deo sharing view and to continue sharing, in the active standby mode, select Options > Contin ue . Accept an invi tation When someone sends you a video sharing invitation, the invitation message displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is no t set to silent, it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you wil l not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an inv itation, select fr om the follo win g: é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 121
â Accept â Activates the sharing session. â Reject â D eclines the invitati on. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitat ion. You can also press the end key to de clin e the sharing session and disconnect the voice ca ll. When you receive a video clip , to mute the sound of the clip, sele ct Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the acti ve voice cal l ends. Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. T he device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports t hese functions, the device is switched on, and within the network se rvice area. Recent calls Press , and select Tools > Lo g . To monitor the phone n umbers of missed, receiv ed, and dialled voice calls, select Recent cal ls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these fun ctions, the device is swit ched on, and within the netw ork service area. To clear all recent call lists, select Option s > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main vie w. To clear one of the call registers, open the register yo u want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the ev ent, and press C . Call duration Press , and select Tools > Log . To monitor the approximate duration of your inc oming and outgoing calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual time invoiced for c alls by your service provid er may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Option s > Cl ear timers . For this you need the loc k code. Packet data Press , and select Tools > Log . To check the am ount of data sent and received during packet da ta connect ions, select Packet data . F o r example, you may be charged fo r your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 122
Monitor all communicatio n events Press , and select Tools > Lo g > Recent ca lls . Icons in the log are as follows: Incoming Outgoing Missed commun ication events To open the general log wher e you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and WLAN connections registered by the d e vice, scro ll right. Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data connection s, are logged as one commun ication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or web pages are shown as packet data connecti ons. To add an unknown phone numbe r from the log to your contacts, se lect Option s > Save to Contact s . To filter the log, select Option s > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery report s permanently, select Options > Clear log . Select Yes to c o n f i r m . T o r e m o v e a single event from one of t h e recent calls logs, press C . To set the l og duration, select Optio ns > Settings > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register, and me ssaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. Tip: In the details view, you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example. Select Options > Copy number . To view from the packet data counter how much dat a is transferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indica ted by Pack. , and select Options > View details . Contacts (phonebook) In Contacts, you can save and update contact information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a th umbnail image to a contact card. You can also creat e contact group s, which allow you to sen d text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 123
Save and edit name s and numbers 1. Press , and select Conta cts > Options > New contact . 2. Fill in the fields that you wa nt, and select Done . To edit co ntact cards, sc roll to a cont act, and select Option s > Edit . You can also search for the desired contact by en tering the first letters of t he name to th e search field. To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open the contact card, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Manage names and numbers To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group (shown only if you have created a group). To check to which groups a contact belongs, sele ct the contact and Options > Belongs to groups . To delete a c ontact card, sele ct a card, and press C . To delete several cont act ca rds at the same time, select Option s > Mark/Un mark to mark the desired contact cards, and press C to del ete. To send contact informa tion, select the card yo u want to send, Option s > Send , and the desired option. To listen to the voice tag assigned to the contact, se lect a contact card and Op tions > Play voice tag . Default numbers and addresses Press , and select Contacts . You can assign de fault numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to the contact to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1. In the contacts list, select a contact. 2. Select Options > Defaults . 3. Select a defau lt to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4. Select a number or an address you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Add ringing tones for contacts Press , and select Contacts . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 124
To define a ringing t one for a contact or a contact group , do the following: 1. Press the scroll key to open a con tact card or go to th e groups list, and select a contact group. 2. Sele ct Opti ons > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3. Sele ct the ringing t one you want to use for the individual contact or the members of the se lected group. When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the c hosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with th e call and your devic e recognises it). To remove the ringing tone, select Default to ne from the list of ringing tones. Copy contacts When you op en Contacts for the first time, you can choose to c opy SIM con tacts to the dev ice memory or to view SIM cont acts in the contacts dire ctory. The device asks you if you want to copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your device. To start copying, press OK . Press Cancel if you do not want to copy the SIM cont acts to the de vice memory. The device asks you if you want to view the S IM contacts in th e contacts di rectory. Press OK , Contacts opens and you can see names st ored on your SIM card marked with . SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and info rmation on using SIM card services, contact you r SIM card vend or. This may b e the service provid er or other vendor. To see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card, select Option s > My number s . In the SIM d irectory you can add and edit contacts, and you can m ake calls. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Options > SIM numbers . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To restrict ca lls from you r device to selected phone numbers, select Options > Fixed dial contacts . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit y our fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider if you do no t have the code. To add new numbers to the f ixed di alling list, select Options > Ne w SIM contact . When you use fixe d dialling, packet data conn ections are not possible, except when se nding text messages over a packet da ta connectio n. In this case, th e message centre é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 125
number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list. When fixed dialling is activa ted, calls may be possible to the official emergency number progr a mmed in to your device. Manage contac t groups Create co ntact groups 1. In Contacts, scroll right to open the groups list. 2. Sele ct Options > New gr oup . 3. Write a name for the group or use the default name, and select OK . 4. Select the group and Options > Add members . 5. Scroll to a contact, and press the scrol l ke y to ma rk it . To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6. To add the c o ntacts to the group, select OK . T o r e n a m e a g r o u p , s e l e c t Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1. In the groups list, select th e group you want to modify. 2. Scroll to the contact, and select Opti ons > Remo ve from group . 3. To remove the con tact from the group, select Yes . Time management Clock Alarm clock Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Clock . To set a new quick alarm, select Options > New quick alarm . Quick alarms are set for the next 24 hours an d they cannot be repeated. To view your active and inacti ve alarms, scroll right to the alarm tab. To set a new alarm, select Options > New alarm . Define th e repetition, if needed. When an alarm is active, is shown. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for a certain time period, select Snooze . If y our device is switched off when an alarm is due, your device switches itself on and star ts sounding the alarm tone. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 126
Tip: T o d e f i n e t h e t i m e p e r i o d a f t e r w h i c h t h e c l o c k alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . To cancel an alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . To change the time , date, and cloc k type set tings, select Option s > Settings . To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zon e information to your device (network service), i n the settings, select Automatic time update > On . World clock Press , and select Appl ications > Clock . To open th e world clock v iew , scroll right to the world clock ta b. In the w orld clock vi ew, you can view the tim e in different cities. To add cities to the list, select Option s > Add city . You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your cu rrent city, scr oll to a city, and select Option s > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your device is changed acco rding to the cit y selected. Ensu re that the time is correct and matches y o ur time zone. Calendar Create a calendar entry Press , and select Applicati ons > Calend ar . 1. To add a new cale ndar entry, scroll to the desired date, and select Option s > New entry and one of the following: â Meeting â t o r e m i n d y o u of an appointment that has a specific date and time â Meeting request â to create and send a new meeting request. You must have a mailbox set up for sending requests. See "Manage mailboxes" , p. 11 1 . â Memo â to write a general entry for a day â Annivers ary â to remind you of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeat ed annually) â To-do â to remind you of a task that must be done by a specific date 2. Fill in the fields. To set an alarm, select Alarm > On , and enter the alarm time and date. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 127
To add a description for an entry, select Option s > Add description . 3. To save the entry, select Done . Tip: In the day, week , or month calendar view, press any key ( 1 -0 ). An appointment en try opens, and the characters you enter are added to the subject field. In the to-do view, a to-do note en try opens. When the calendar alarm sounds for a note, select Silence to turn off the cale ndar alarm tone. Th e reminder text stays on the screen. To st op the ca lendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . Tip: To defi ne the time peri od after which the calendar alarm sounds again w hen you set it to snooze, press , and select Appl ications > Calendar > Op tions > Settings > Alarm snooze t ime . Calendar views To change the start ing day of the wee k or the view that is shown when you open the calend ar, select Options > Settings . In the settings, you can also modify the calend ar alarm tone, alarm snooze ti me, and the title for the week view. To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today, press # . To switch between th e month view, week vi ew, day view, and to-do view, press * . To send a c alendar note to a compatible device, s elect Options > Send . If the other device is not compati ble with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the ti me informatio n of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly. Manage calendar entri es To delete several eve nts at a time, go to the month view , and select Options > De lete e ntry > Before date or All entries . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-do view, and select Options > Mark as done . You can synchronise your cal e ndar with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a calendar entry, set the desired synchronisation option. Lunar calendar To use the Lunar calen dar function, the device language must be Chinese. To view det ailed Lunar cale ndar information of the currently high lighted date: 1. In calendar views, select Options > Settings > Lunar calendar , and set Lunar calendar item as on. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 128
2. When you go back to the calen dar views, Lu nar information is displayed in the navigation pane. To view more detailed Luna r information in a pop-up window, select Options > View lunar data . This option is displayed only when the Luna r cale ndar setting item is on. Office folder Quickoffice With the Quic koffice applications, you can view .doc, .xls, .ppt, .pps, and .txt docu ments and download software. Not all file formats or feature s are supported. Apple Macintosh is not sup ported. To view a file, press , and select Appl ications > Office > Quickoffice . Select the location from which you want to view files, browse to the desired folder, and select a file. The file s open in the respe c tive applications depending on the file format. To download software u sin g Quickmanager, in the main view, sel ect Quick manage r ; or, when browsing files, scroll to the Quickmanager tab. If you experience problems with t h e Quicko ffice applications, visit www.quickoffice.com, or send e-mail to supportS60@quick office.com. Quickword With Quick word, you can v iew native Microsoft Word documents wi th your device. Quickword supports the view ing of documents saved in .doc and .txt for mats created with Microsoft Word 97, 2000, XP, and 2003. Not all variations or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickword that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Options > Updates and upgrades . The upg rade is chargeable. Quicksheet With Quic ksheet, y ou can view nat ive Microsof t Excel files with your device. Quicksheet su pports the vi ewing of spreadsheet files saved in .xls format crea ted with Microso ft Excel 97, 2000, XP, or 2003. Not all variations or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 129
To upgrade to a version of Quick sheet that supports editing, when you have a fi le open, select Options > Updates and upgrades . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickpoint With Qui ckpoint , you can v iew native Microsoft PowerPoint presentations with your device. Quickpoin t supports the v iewing of presen tations saved in .ppt and .pps formats created with Microsoft PowerPoint 20 00, XP, and 20 03. Not all variation s or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickpoint that supports editing, when you have a fi le open, select Options > Updates and upgrades . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickmanager With Quickmanager, you can download software, including updates, u pgrades, and other u seful applications. You can pay for the downloads by phone bill or credit card. Notes Press , and select Appl ications > Offic e > Notes . To write a note, start entering the text. The note e ditor opens automatically . To open a note, scroll to it, and select Op en . To send a no te to other compatible devices, sel ect Options > Send . To delete a note, press C . Tip: To dele te severa l notes, select Options > Mark/Unmark to mark the notes, and press C . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronisati on . Select Start to start synchr onisation o r Settings to define the synchronisation sett ings for th e note. Adobe PDF reader Press , and select Applicati ons > Office > Adobe PDF . With the PDF reader you can read PDF docume nts on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Converter Press , and select Applicati ons > Office > Converter . With Convert e r, you ca n conv ert measures from one unit to anothe r. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 130
The convert er has limite d ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. 1. In the Type field, select th e measure you w ant to use. 2. In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to conve rt. 3. In th e next Unit field, se lect the unit to which you want to conve rt. 4. In th e first Amount field, ente r the value you want to convert. The other Amount field change s automatically to show the co nverted value. Convert currenc y Select Type > Cu rrency . Before you ca n make currency conversions, you must sele ct a base cu rrency and add exchange rates. The default base currency is Home . The rate of the base cu rrency is always 1. 1. Sele ct Options > Currency rates . 2. The default name for the curren cy items is Foreign . To rename a currency, select Optio ns > Rename currency . 3. Add the exchange rates for the currencies, and press Done . 4. In th e second Unit f ield, select the currency to whic h you want to convert. 5. In the first Amount field, e nter the value you want to convert. The ot her Amount field changes automatically to show th e converted value. To change the base currency, select Option s > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . Note: When you change base currency, you must enter new exch ange rates because all previously set exch ange r ates are c leared. Chinese-English bilingual dictionary To look up a Chinese word for English translation and an English word for Chinese translation , press , and select Applications > Office > Dictionar y . The dictionary database may be preset in memory card. If you take out the memory c ard, or use the memory card which is not installed with the dictiona ry database, you will not be able to use the dictionary function. Search fo r words in t he dictionary Select an input m ethod as needed, the n enter the Chin ese characters or English words you wish to look up. When you enter text in the inputtin g window, the device will automatically filter those entries matching to your é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 131
text from the Bilingual dict ionary and show a candidate list in the display. The most matched entry will b e highlighted and loc ated at the top of the candidate list. 1. Scroll up or down to h ighligh t your needed entry, when you are movi ng the highlight bar, the text in the input window stays unchanged. 2. You could use the below m ethods to selec t entry: â Press the scroll key. â Select Select word from the opt ion menu. Your selected entry will be automatically shown in the input window (if this en try is different from your input Chinese characters or English words), and its translation will be shown on the screen to replace the p revious candidate entr y list. Meanwhile, th e cursor will locat e in the translation window. Sometimes, the screen cannot display the whole translation content. Press th e up or down scroll key to view th e whole c ontent. Return to the state of lo oking up in dictionary If you want to continue to look up the tran slation of other Chinese characters or English words in dictionary, please implement any of the following options: â Enter the Chi nese characters or English words you want to look up. â First press the cle ar key to empty the c o ntents in th e input window, and then enter th e Chinese characters or English words you want to look up. â Press Back . The dic t ionary will return to the state of showing candidates entry list, but the entry in the inputting window is still highlighted. You could directly input text or move the cursor by scrolling left or right to edit the text in the input window. Applications folder Calculator Press , and select Appl ications > Calcu lator . Note: This calcu lator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 132
To make a calculation, enter the fir st number of the calculation. Sele ct a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the sec ond number of the calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operat ions in the order they are entered. The result of th e ca lculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number o f a new calculation. To save the results of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . The saved result replaces t he previously stored result in the memory. To retrieve the results of a calcu lation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Option s > Memory > Rec all . To view the last sa ved result, select Options > Last result . Exiting the Calculator ap plication or switching off the device does not clear th e memory. You can recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application. Application manager With Application manag er, you can see the software packages installed in your de vi ce. You can view det ails of installed applications, remo ve applica tions, and define installation settings. Press , and select Applicati ons > App. mgr. . You can i nstall t wo types o f applications and software to your device: â J2ME applicat ions based on Java technology with the extension .jad or .jar â Other applications and so ftware suitable for the Symbian operating sy stem with the extension . sis or .sisx Only install software specifica lly designed for your device: Nokia N78. Software provider s will often refer to the official model number of th is product: Nokia N78-1. Install applicatio ns and software Installation files may be tran sferred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during b rowsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachment or using other connecti vity methods, such as Bluetooth conne ctivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Nseries PC Su ite to install an application to your device. If you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, save the file to a compatible memory card (local disk). indicates a .sis or .sisx application, a Java application, that the appl ication is not fully install ed, and that the application is installed on the memory card. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 133
Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces , suc h as appli cat ions that are Symbian Si gned or hav e passed the Java Verif ied TM testing. Before installati on, note the follow ing: â To view the applic ation ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . To display the security certificate details of the applica tion, in Details: , scroll to C ertif icate s: , and select View deta ils . See "Certificate management" , p. 141 . â If you install a file that cont ains an update or repair to an existing ap plication, you can only restore the original applicati on if you have the original installation file or a full backu p copy of the removed software package. To restore the original applicati on, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup copy. The .jar file is requ ired for installin g Java application s. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access poin t defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the su pplier or manu facturer of th e application. To install an application or software, do the following: 1. To locate an installation file, press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or a comp atible memory card (if inserte d) in File ma nager, or open a message i n Messaging > In box that cont ains an ins tallation fi le. 2. In Applicatio n manager, select Options > Install . In other applications, scroll to the installation file, and select it to start the installation. During install ation, the device shows information about the progress of the inst allation. If you install an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warn ing. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed applicatio n, locate it in the menu, and select it. If the ap plication does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applications folder in the main menu. To see which softwa re packages are installed or remove d and when, select Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one a pplication é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 134
with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation o r cause the dev ice to sto p functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use N okia PC Suite to back u p installation files to a compatible PC, then us e the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment , delete the message from the Messaging inbox. See "File manager" , p. 135 . Remove applications and software Press , and select Appl ications > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package, and select Optio ns > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove softwa re, you can only reinstall it if you have the origin al software packag e or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to o p en docume nts created wi th that so ftware. If another software package depends on the softwa re package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the doc umentation of the installed software packa ge for details. Settings Press , and select Applicati ons > App. mgr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Software insta llation â Select whe ther Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. â Onlin e certifica te check â Select to check the online certificates before inst all ing an application. â Default web address â Set the d efault address used when checking onlin e certificates. Some Java applications ma y require that a message be s e n t o r a n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i o n b e m a d e t o a s p e c i f i c a c c e s s point to download ext ra data or components. In the Applica tion manage r main view , scroll to an app lication , and select Options > Open to change settings related to that specific application. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 135
Tools folder File manager Press , and select Tools > File mgr. . With File manager, you can browse, manage, and open files on your device, memo ry card, or a compatible external drive. File manager main view The available options d epend on the memory you highlight. S elect Options and from the following: â Remove memory card â Remove the memory c ard safely from the device without any loss of data . â Back up phone memory â Create a backup of the device memory to a memory card. â Restore from mem. card â Restore a backup of the device memory saved on a compatible memory c ard. This option is only available if you have created a backup of the device memory. â Remote drives â Define settin gs for a compatible remote drive c onnected to your device , or map or delete drives. â Find â Find a file in the memory. Enter a search t ext that matches t he file name. Phone memory and m emory card views The available options depend on the memory you selec t. Select Options and from the following: â Send â Send a file using available connection methods. â Organ ise â Move and copy files and folders, or create new folders in the memory. â Mark/Unmark â Mark files or folders to delete multiple items at the same time. â Rename â Rename a file or a folder. â Detai ls â View the detai ls of the memo ry or the selected item. â Memory card options â Rename or format a memory card. â Memory card password â Password protect a memory card. Voice command s Press , and select Tools > Utilit ies > Voice comm. . You can use enhanced voic e commands to control your device. See "Voice di alling" , p. 11 7 . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 136
To activate enhance d voice commands to start applications and profiles, press and hold the right selection key in the standby mode. To use enhan ced voice c ommands, press and hold the right selection key in the st a ndby mode, and speak a voice command. The voice command is th e name of the application or profile displayed in the list. To edit the voic e commands, in the Voice command s application, select an item, such as an appl ication or a profile, a nd Edit . To listen to the synthe sised voice tag, select Options > Playback . To remove a voice command that you added manually, select Options > Remove voice command . Select Op tions > Settings and from the following: â Synthesi ser â to switch on or off the synthesiser that plays recognised voice tags and commands in the selected device language â Playba ck volume â to adjust the playback volume for the voice commands â Recognition sensitivity â to adj ust how easily the synthesiser recognis es speech. If the sensitivity is set too high, it may not accept commands because of background noise. â Command verificat ion â to sele ct whether the spoken command is accepted manually, by voice, or automatically â Remove voice adapts. â to reset voice recognition learning, for exam ple, when th e main user of the device has changed Sync Press , and select Tools > Sync . Sync enables you to synchr onise your not es, calendar entries, text and multimedia messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts wit h various compat ible applications on a compatible computer or on th e internet. You may rece ive synchronisat ion setti ngs in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile cont ains the necessary settings for synchronisation. When you open th e application, the de fault or previously used sync pr ofile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item and select Mark to include i t in the profi le or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync profiles, sele ct Options and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Opti ons > Synchronise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Ca ncel . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 137
Device manager Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Device mgr. . Use Device manager to connec t to a server and re ceive configuration setting s for yo ur device, to create new server profiles, or to view and manage existi ng server profiles. You may receive serv er profiles and different configuration setting s from your service providers and company information manage ment department. These configuration sett ings may include connection and other settings used by different application s in your device. Scroll to a server pr ofile, and select Option s and f rom the following: â Start configuration â Co nnect to th e server and receive configuration se tt ings for your devi ce. â New server prof ile â Create a server profile. To delete a server profil e, scroll to it, and press C . Speech With Spee ch, you ca n set the l anguage, vo ice, and voice properties for the message reader. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Speech . To set the language for the message reader, select Language . To download addition al languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . Tip: When you downl oad a new language, you mus t download at least one voice for that l anguage. To set the speaking voice, sel ect Voice . The v oice depends on the sele cted language. To set the speaki ng rate, select Speed . To set the speaking vol ume, sele ct Volume . To view details of a voic e, scroll right to the voice tab, scroll to the v oice, and select Option s > Voice details . To listen to a voice, scro ll to th e voice, and select Options > Play voice . To delete languages or voices, scroll to the item and select Options > Delete . Message reader setting s To change the message reader settings, scroll to the Settings tab, and define the following: â Language detection â turn autom atic reading language detection on or off. â Continuous reading â turn continuous re ading of all selected messages on or off. â Speech pro mpts â select whether the message reader inserts prompts in messages. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 138
â Audio source â select whet her you want to liste n to the message through the loudspeaker or the device. Settings Some sett ings may be preset fo r the device by yo ur service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General settings In general settings, you can edit the general settings of your devi ce or resto re the devi ce to origina l default settings. You can adjust time and date setting s also in the clock. See "Clock " , p. 126 . Personal isation settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation . You can edit settings relate d to the display, standby mode, and gene ral function s of your device. Themes allows you to ch ange the loo k of the display. See "Change the l ook of your device" , p. 31 . Voice commands opens the settings for the Voice commands application. See "Voice commands" , p. 136 . Tones all ows you to chang e the tones of the calendar, clock, and cu rrentl y activ e profile. Display â Brightness â Scroll left or right to adjust the brightness of the display. â Font si ze â Adjust the size of the te xt and icons on the display. â Power saver time-out â Select the time-out peri od after which the power sa ver is activa ted. â Welcome note / logo â The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the d e vice. Select De fault to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Photos. â Light time-out â Select a time-o ut afte r which the backlight of the displa y is switched off. Standby mode â Shortcuts â A ssi gn shortcuts to the selection keys to be used in the standby mode and select which applications are shown in the active toolbar. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 139
If the active standby is se t off, you can assign keypad shortcuts for the d i fferent presses of the scroll key. â Change Menu view â Select Ho rizonta l icon bar to view a horizont al tool bar and the content from different applic ations on the screen. Select Vertical icon b ar to view a ve rtical t oolbar on the screen. The content from different applicat ions is hidden. To display the content, select a shortcut and press the scroll key left. Select Basi c to switc h off active toolb ar. â Operator logo â This setting is only availabl e if you have received and saved an operator logo. Selec t Off if you do not want the l ogo to be shown. Language Changing the settings for the phone lan guage or writing language affects every applicat ion in your de vice until you change these settings a gain. â Phone language â Change the language of the display text in your device . This also affects the format used for date and time and the separa tors used, for example, in calculations. Automati c selects the language accordin g to the information on your SIM card. After you chan ge the displ ay text langua ge, the device restarts. â Writing language â Change the writ ing langu age. This affects the c h aracters available when writing text and the p redictive text dictionary used. â Predictive te xt â Set predicti ve text inp ut on or off for all editors in t he device. The pr edictive text dictionary is not available for all la nguages. Enhancement settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Gener al > Enhancement . Some enhancement conne ctors indicate which type of enhanceme nt is connected to the device. See "Dis play indicators" , p. 24 . The available settings depe nd on the type of enhancement . Select an enhancemen t and from the following: â Default pr ofile â Se t the profile th at you want activated e ach time yo u co nnect a certain compatible enhancem ent to your devi ce. â Automati c answer â Se lect whethe r you want the device to answer an incoming call automaticall y after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disabled. â Lights â S et whether lights remain on or are switched off after th e time-out. This se tting is not av ailable for all enhance ments. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 140
Security settings Phone and SIM Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Pho ne and SIM card . â PIN co de request â When ac tive, the code is requested each time the d e vice is switched o n . Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. â PIN co de , PIN2 code , and Lock code â You ca n change the lock code, PIN co de, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the nu mbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget the PIN or the PIN2 c ode, contact your service provider. If you forget the lock co de, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. See "Access codes" , p. 19 . Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prev ent accidental dialling of the emergency number. â Keypad au tolock p eriod â Select whethe r the keypad is locked when your device has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip: To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press the left selection key, then * . â Phone auto lock period â To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a time-out after wh ich the device automatically locks. A lock ed device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the autolock peri od, select None . Tip: To lock the device manually, press the power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . â Lock if SIM card changed â You can se t the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your dev ice. The device m aintains a list of SIM cards that are recogn ised as the ownerâ s cards. â Closed user group â You can specify a group of people to whom you ca n call and who can c all you (network service). â Confirm SIM services â You can set t he device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certificate management Press , and select Tools > Settings > Gener al > Security > Ce rtific ate m anagem ent . Digital certificates do not guarantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certific ate management main view, you can see a list of authority cert ificates that are stored in your device. Scroll right to see a list of pe rsonal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or anothe r site or remo te server for actions tha t involve transferring conf idential é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 141
information. They shou ld also be used i f you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious softwa re and be sure of the auth enti city of software when downloading and inst alling software. Important: Even if the use of certifi cates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in or der to benefit fro m increased security. The existence of a certi ficate does no t offer any prote ction by itself; the certificate mana ger must contain correct, authentic, or trus ted certificates for inc reased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certi ficate not valid yet" is shown even if the cert ificate should be va lid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. Before ch anging an y certif icate s ettings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificat e and that the certificate really belongs to the listed own er. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signatu re and the period of validit y of a server certificate h ave been chec ked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Option s > Certif icate detai ls . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following not es may be display ed: â Cert ifica te not t rusted â You have not set any application to use the certificate. â Expired certificate â The perio d of validi ty has ende d for the selected ce rtificate. â Certif icate not valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected ce rtificate. â Certifi cate corrupt ed â The certificate cannot be used. Contac t the cert ificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before changing any certific ate settings, you must make sure that you reall y trust th e owner of th e certificate and that the certificate really belo ngs to the li sted owner . Scroll to an a uthority certificate, and select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certif icate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: â Symbian installa tion : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. â Internet : Yes â Th e certificate is able to certify servers. â App. ins tallatio n : Yes â The certif icate is able to certify the origin of a new J ava⢠appl ication. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 142
Select Options > Edit trust setting to chan ge the va lue. Security module Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Security module . To view or edit a security module (if available), scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, scroll to it, and select Options > Security details . Restore original settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Factory setti ngs . You can reset some of the sett ings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, the dev ice may take a longer t ime to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Navi wheel settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Navi wheel . Navi wheel When the Navi wheel setting is se t on, you c an browse through files and lists in certain applications by sliding your finger on the rim of the scroll key. See "Navi wheel " , p. 26 . When the Navi wheel setting is set off, to move up, down, left, or right, press the scroll key in the desired direction. Breathing The rim around the Navi whee l illuminates slowly when the de vice is in s leep mo de and qu ickly when there are missed calls or received me ssages. To switch off th e illumination, select Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Navi wheel . Positioning settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Gener al > Positioning . Positioning methods â Integrated GPS â Use the inte grated GPS rec eiver of your dev ice. â Assist ed GPS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from an assistance data server. See "Assisted GPS (A-GPS)" , p. 35 . â Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with B luetooth connecti vity. â Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positioning server To define an access point, and positioning server for A- GPS, select Position ing server . The positioning server é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 143
may be preset by your service prov ider, and you may not be able to edit the settings. Notation settings To select which measure ment system you want to use for speeds and distances, select Measurement system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is shown in your device, select Coordinate format , and the desired format. Phone settings In phone settings, you ca n edit settings related to phone calls and network. Call settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ph one > Call . â Send my call er ID â You can set your p hone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or th e value may be set by your service p rovider wh en you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network service). â S e n d m y i n t e r n e t c a l l I D â You can set your internet caller ID to be displayed to or hidden from the person to whom you are calling. â Call w aiting â To be alerted for incoming calls (network service) w hile you are in a call, select Activate . To chec k whether the function is activated, select Check status . â Reject call with message â To send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the cal l, select Yes . â Message text â Write a text to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. â Image in video call â If video is not sent during a video ca ll, you can sel ect a still image to be displayed instead. â Automat ic redial â Select On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsucce ssful call attempt. To stop automatic redialling, press the end key. â Show call duration â Activate this setting if you want the leng th of a call to be displaye d during the call. â Summary after call â Activate this setting if you want the lengt h of a call to be display ed after the call. â Speed dial â Select On , and the numbers assigned to the number ke ys (2 to 9) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See "Speed dial a phone number" , p. 116 . â Anyk ey answer â Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, except the power key. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 144
â Line in use â This setting (network service) is show n only if the SIM card support s two subscriber numbers, that is, two pho ne lines. Select wh ich phone line you want to use for maki ng calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line . If you select Line 2 and have not subscribe d to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip: To switch be tween the ph one lines, pres s and hold # in the standby mod e . â Lin e chan ge â To prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need th e PIN2 code. Call divert Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call divert . Call dive rt allows yo u to divert your inc oming calls to yo ur voice mailbox or another p hone number. For details, contact your se rvice provider. Select whic h calls you want to divert and th e desired diverting option. Set the option on ( Activate ) or off ( Deacti vate ), or check whether the op tion is act ivated ( Check st atus ). Several di verting optio ns can be active at the sam e time. When all c alls are dive rted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring a nd call diverting cannot be a ctive at the same time. Call barring Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . Call barring (network service) allows you to restrict the calls that you make or rece ive with the devi ce. To change the settings, you need the barring passw ord from your service provid er. Call barring a nd call diverting cannot be a ctive at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Voice call barring Select th e desire d barring option , and set it on ( Activ ate ) or off ( Deactivate ), or check w hether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 145
Network settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ph one > Network . Your devi ce can automa tically sw itch between th e GSM and UMTS netwo rks. The GSM netw ork is indicated with in the stand by mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . â Network mode â S e l e c t w h i c h n e t w o r k t o u s e . I f y o u select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatic ally, according to the ne twork parameters and the roamin g agre ements between the wireless service providers. Contact your n etwork service provider for detail s and roaming costs. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider. â Operator selection â Select Automati c to set the device to search for and se lect one of the available networks, or Manual to manually se lect the network from a list. If the c onnection to the manually selected network is lost, the de vice sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a netw ork. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. A roaming agreement is an agreement be tween two or more service providers to enable t he users of one service provider to use t he services of other servic e providers. â Cell in fo display â Sele ct On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular netw ork (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Connection settings In connection settin gs, you can edit access points and other connectiv ity setting s. You can als o edit s ettings fo r Bluetooth connectivity in the Bluetooth conne ctivity application. See "Settings" , p. 97 . You can al so edit s ettings for data cable connections in the USB application. See "USB" , p. 100 . Data connections and access points Your dev ice supports p acket data co nnection s (network service), such as GPRS in the GS M network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, m ultiple data connections can be activ e at the same time, and access points can share a data con nection. In th e UMTS netw ork, data connec tions remai n active during voice ca lls. You can also u se a WLAN data con nection. Only one connection in o ne wireless LAN can be activ e at a time, but several applicat ions can use the same intern et access point. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 146
To establish a da ta conne ction, an access point is required. Yo u can define different kinds of acce ss points, such as the following: â MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages â Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connec t to the inte rnet Check the t ype of access point you ne ed with yo ur service provider for th e service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Access poin ts Create a new access point Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or al l access po ints may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you open one of the access point groups ( , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point. indicates a packet data access point. indicates a WLAN access point. Tip: You can create int ernet access points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new access point, select New access point . The device asks to check for available conn ections. After the search, connections that are already available are shown and can be shared by a new access point. If you skip this step, you are as ked to sele ct a connection method and to define the sett ings needed. To edit the settings of an access point, open one of the access point groups, sele ct an access point and Edit . Follow the instruct ions from your se rvice provid er. â Connection name â Enter a descri ptive na me for the connecti on. â Data bearer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data c onnection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fi ll in al l fields m a rked with Must b e defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your servic e provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Packet data access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connect ion > Destination s > New access point , and fol low th e é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 147
instructions on the screen. Or, open one of the acce ss point groups, select an access point marked with , and select Edit . Follow the instructions fr om your service pro vider. â Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service prov ider. â User name â The u ser name may be needed to make a data connect ion, and is usually provided by the service provider. â Prompt password â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a serv er, or if y ou do not want to save your password in the devi ce, select Yes . â Passwo rd â A password may b e needed to make a data connection and is usu all y provided by th e service provider. â Authentication â S e l e c t Secure t o a l w a y s s e n d y o u r password encrypted or Normal to send your password encryp ted when possibl e. â Home page â Depending on the access point you are setting up, enter th e web address or the address of the multimedia messaging centre. Select Op tions > Adv anced settin gs to change the following settings: â Network type â Select th e internet prot ocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other settings depend on the selected network type. â Phone IP address (for IPV4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. â DNS address es â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. Contact your internet service provider to obtain these addresses. â Proxy server address â Enter the address of the proxy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the port number of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Destination s > New access point , and follo w the instructions on the screen. Or, open one of the access point groups, select an access poi nt marked with , and select Edit . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. â WLAN network name â Select Enter manually or Search for networks . If you se lect an exist ing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the se ttings of its access point device. â Network status â Define whether the network name is displayed. â WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to creat e an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 148
receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc net work, all devices mu st use the same WLAN network name . â WLAN security mode â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/ WPA2 . If you se lect Open network , no encryption is used. The WEP, 80 2.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. To ente r the setting s for the selected security mode, select WLAN security settings . Security settings for WEP â WEP key in u se â Select the wired equivalent privacy (WEP) key number . You can create up to four WEP keys. The same settings must be entered on the WLAN access point device . â Authentication type â S e l e c t Open or Shared for the authentic ation type bet ween your devic e and the WLAN access point device. â WEP key settin gs â Enter WEP encryption (leng th of the key), WEP key f ormat ( AS CII or Hexadecimal ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the selected format). Security settings for 802.1x and WPA/WPA2 â WPA/WPA2 â Select th e means of auth entication: EAP to use an e xtensible authen tication protoco l (EAP) plug-in, o r Pre -shared key to use a password. Complet e the appr opriate settings: â EAP plug-in settings â Ente r the settings as your service provider instructs. â Pre-shared key â Enter a password. The same password must be entered on the WLAN access point device . â WPA2 only mode â Only WPA2 enabled devices are allowed to establish a c onnection in this mode. Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Adva nced se ttings and from the following: â IPv4 settings â Enter the IP address of your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. Contact your internet se rvice provider for these addresses. â IPv6 settings â Define the type of DNS address. â Ad-ho c channel (only for Ad-hoc ) â To enter a channel number ( 1-11) manual ly, select User defined . â Proxy server address â Enter the address for the proxy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the pr oxy port number. Packet data settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Packet data . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 149
The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connec tion. â Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the dev ice registers to the packet d ata network. St arting an active packet data connec tion (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data coverage, the devi ce periodically tries to establish a packet dat a connection. If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection only if you star t an application or action that needs it. â Access point â The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. â High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network serv ice) in UMTS networks. Wireless LAN settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . â Show WLAN availa bility â Select whether is displayed in the standby mo de when a wireless LAN i s availa ble. â Scan for networ ks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , select how often th e device searches for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view ad vanced settings, se lect Options > Adv anced settings . Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommended. SIP settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (S IP) settings are needed for certain network services usi ng SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Configurations Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Config uratio ns . You may receive trusted server settings from your service provider in a configuration message. You can save view or delete these settings in configurations. Access point name control Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > APN contro l . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 150
With the access point n ame control service, yo u can restrict packet dat a connections and allow your device to use only certa in packet data ac cess points. T h i s s e t t i n g i s o n l y a v a i l a b l e i f yo u r S I M c a r d s u p p o r t s th e access point control service. To set the control servic e on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To ch ange the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provi der for the code. Application settings To edit the settings of some of the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Settings > Applications . To edit the settings, you can also s elect Options > Settings in each appl ication. Troubleshooting Q: What is m y passwor d for the lock , PIN, or PUK codes ? A: The default lock code is 12345 . I f y o u f o r g e t o r l o s e t h e lock code , contact you r device dea ler. If yo u forget or lose a P I N o r P U K c o d e , o r i f y o u h a v e n o t r e c e i v e d s u c h a c o d e , contact your netw ork servic e provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or network service p rovider. Q: How do I c lose an application that is n ot responding? A: Press and hold . To close an application, scroll to it, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Music player, select it from the list, and Option s > Exit . Q: Why do im ages look smu dgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type o f display. Some d i sp l a y s m a y c o n t a i n p i x e l s o r d o t s t h a t r e m a i n o n o r o f f . This is norm al, not a fault. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 151
Q: Why can't my device establish a GPS connecti on? A: Find more information about GPS, GPS receiver, satellite signals, and location information in thi s user guide. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 35 . Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectiv ity? A: Check that both devices ar e compatible, have activated Bluetoot h connectiv ity, and are not in hidde n mode. Check also that th e distance between the two devices is not over 10 met res (33 feet) and t hat there are no walls or other obstructions between th e devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetoo th connection? A: If another device is conne ct ed to you r device , you can either end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating Bluet ooth connectivity. Press , and select Tools > Bluetoot h > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on my devic e in the home network? A: Make sure that you have config ured the home network settings, content sharing is tu rned on in your device, and the other device is UPnP compatible. Q: What can I do if my home netw ork connection stops working? A: Switch off the wireless LAN (WLAN) connection f rom your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on again. If this does not help, restart your compatible PC and your device. If the connect ion still does not work, reconfigure th e WLAN settings in both your compatible PC and device. See "Wireless LA N" , p. 93 . See "Connection settings" , p. 146 . Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the home network? A: If you are using a fire wall application in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server to use the external connect ion (you can add Home media server to the firewall applic ation's exceptions list). Check from the firewall settings th at the firewall application allows traff ic to the fo llowing ports: 1900, 49152, 49153 , and 49154. Some WLAN acc ess point devices have a built- in firewall. In such cases, ch eck that the firewall in the access point device doe s not block traffic to the following ports: 1900, 49 152, 49153, an d 49154. Check t hat the WLAN settings are th e sa me in your device and compatible PC. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 152
Q: Why can't I see a wireless LA N (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier ( SSID). You can onl y access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN Internet access point for the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wire less LAN (WLAN) of f on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia de vice swit ches off w hen you are not trying to c onnect, not con nected to another access point, or not scanning for ava ilable networks. To further reduce batte ry consumpti on, you can s pecify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for available netw orks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To chan ge the backg r ound scan settings: 1. Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connect ion > Wireless LAN . 2. To increase th e background scan time interva l, adjust the time in Scan for networks . To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availability > Never . 3. To save your changes, press Back . When Sho w WLAN av ailab ility is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. However, you can st ill manually scan for available WLAN networks , and conn ect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: To save data , use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to make a back- u p c o p y o f a l l d a t a t o a c o mpatible computer; send images to your e-mail address, then save the images to your computer; or send data us ing Bluetooth con nectivity to a compatible device. You can also store dat a on a compatible mem o ry card. Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The cont act card does not h ave a phone number, an address, or an e-mail address. Press , select Contacts , and edit the cont act card. Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connectio n again and again? A: The device ma y be trying to re trieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message centre. To stop the device from making a data connection, press , and select Messaging > Opti ons > Settings > Multimedia me ssage > Multimedia retrieval and Manual to have the mult imedia messaging centre save messages to be retr ieved later, or Of f to i gnore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receiv e a notification w hen there is a n ew multimedia message that you can retriev e in the multimedia message centre. If you selec t Off , the device doe s not make any é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 153
network connect ions related to multime dia mes saging. To set the dev ice to use a pa cket data connec tion only if you start an application or action that needs it, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not he lp, switch the device off, and switch it on again. Q: Why do I have problems connecting the device to my PC? A: Ensure that you have the la test version of Nokia Nseries PC Suite and that it is in stalle d and running on your compatible PC. For further information on how to use Nokia Nseries PC Suite, see the help function on Nok ia Nseries PC Suite or visit the Nokia support pages. Q: Can I use my device as a f ax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your dev ice as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (ne twork service) , you can dive rt incoming fax calls to anoth er phone number. Nokia original enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, c h argers, and enhancement s approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other ty pes may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. An extensive range of enhancements is av ailable for your device. Please visit www.nokia- asia.com /enhancements for more details. For availability of the e nhancements, please check with your local dealer. Enhancements Practical rules about acce ssories and enhancements â Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reac h of sm all chi ldren. â When you disconnect the po wer cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 154
â Check regularly that en hancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating pro perly. â Installation of any complex car enhanc ements must be made by qualified personnel only . Battery Type Talk time Standby BL-6F Up to minutes ( GSM) Up to Important: Battery talk and standby times are estimates only and depend on signal strength, ne twork condition s, features use d, battery age and condition, temperatures to w hich battery is exposed, u se in digital mode, and many other factors. The amount of time a device is used for calls wi ll affect its standby time. L i k e w i s e , t h e a m o u n t o f t i m e t h a t t h e d e v i c e i s t u r n e d o n and in the standby mode wi ll affect its talk time. é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 155 320 260 hours ( GSM)
Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventua lly wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorte r than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia app roved batteries, and rec harge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for th e first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonge d period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical pl ug and the device when not in us e. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, sinc e overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If le ft unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the batte ry is completely discharged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicat or appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the batte ry only for its inten ded purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short -circuit the batt ery. Accidental sho rt- circuiting can occur when a me tallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct conn ection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of th e battery. (These look like metal strip s on the battery. ) This might happen , for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the c onnecting ob ject. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or w inter cond itions, will reduce th e capacity and lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep the battery be tween 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a h ot or cold battery may not work temporar ily, even when th e battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatu res well below fr eezing. Do not dispose of batterie s in a fire as they may explo de. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as househ old waste. Do not dismantle or shred cell s or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, d o not allow th e liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 156
flush your skin or eyes imme diately wit h water, or seek medical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia deal er, and inspect the h ologram label using the foll owing steps : Authenticate holo gram 1. When you look at th e hologram on the label , you should see the N okia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhanc ements lo go when lookin g from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 do ts on each side respectively. What if your b attery is not authentic? é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 157 Successful com pletion of th e steps is not a total assurance of th e authenticit y of the battery. If you have any reason to belie ve that your b attery is not an authentic, original No kia battery, you should refrain from using it. If authen ticity cannot be verified, return the ba ttery to th e place of purchase. If you cannot confirm that your Noki a battery with the hologram on the labe l is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device a n d its enhanceme nts. It may also inval idate any appr oval or warranty applying to the de vice.
To find out more about orig inal Nokia batteries, visit Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will he lp you protect your warranty coverage. â Keep th e device dry. Pre cip itation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circui ts. If you r device does ge t wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. â Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty area s. Its moving parts and electronic components c an be damaged. â Do not store the de vice in hot areas. Hi gh temperatures can shorten the life of elect ronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. â Do not store th e device in cold areas. W hen the device returns to its normal temp erature, moist ure can form inside the device and damage elec tronic circuit boards. â Do not attempt to o pen the device other than as instructed in this gu ide. â Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handlin g can break inte rnal circuit boards and fin e mechanics. â Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning sol vents, or strong detergents to clean the device. â Do not paint the dev ice. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. â Use a soft, clean , dry cloth t o clean any len ses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. â Use only the sup plied or an appr oved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. â Use charge rs indoors. â Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes. â To reset the device from ti me to time for op timum performance , power off th e device and remove the battery. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 158 www.nokia-asia .com/batterycheck.
These suggestions apply e qually to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, tak e it to the nearest auth orized service facility for service. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its en hancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment To transmit data files or messa ges, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a conn ection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magn etic. Metallic materials may be attracted to t he device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the devi ce, because information st ored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere wit h the func tionality o f inadequately protected me dical devices. Consult a physician or the man ufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately sh ielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch o ff your device in healt h care faci lities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care faci lities may be u sing equipment that could be sensitive t o external RF en ergy. Implanted medical dev ices Manufacture rs of medica l devices recom mend that a é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 159 This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in th e normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 centimeters ( case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it sh ould not c ontain metal and should position the device the above- stated distance from your body . millimeters) away from the body. When a carry 15 millimet ers ) minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters ( 15 3
should be maintained betw een a wireless device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibr illator, to avoid potential interference wit h the medical device. Pe rsons who ha ve such devices should: â Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 the wireless device is turned on. â Not carry th e wireless device in a breast pock et. â Hold the wirele ss device to the ear opposi te the medical de vice to minimi ze the potent ial for interfer ence. â Turn the w ireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspe ct that interfe rence is taking plac e. â Read and follow the direction s from the manufactu rer of their implanted medical device. If you have any question s about using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, c o nsult your health care provider. Hearin g aids Some digital wire less devices may in terfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, con sult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel inje ction systems, e lectronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed cont rol systems, and air bag system s. For more information, check with t he manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipm ent that has been added. Only qualified pers onnel should service the device or install the devi ce in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any wa rranty that may apply to the device. Chec k regularly that al l wireless device equip ment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as th e device, its pa rts, or enhan cements. For vehicles equ ipped with an air bag, re member that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objec ts, including install ed or portab le wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipm ent is improperly in stalled and the air bag inflates, se rious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircra ft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operat ion of the airc raft, disrupt the wirele ss telephone network, and may be illegal. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 160 device when from the medical centimeters millimet ers ) ( 15 3
Potentially explosive environments S w i t c h o f f y o u r d e v i c e w h e n i n a n y a r e a w i t h a p o t e n t i a l l y explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially ex plosive atmospheres include areas where you woul d normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. S parks in such areas could ca use an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refue lling points such as near ga s pumps at service stations. Obse rve restrictions on the use of radio equipme n t in fuel d epots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are i n progress. Areas with a potentially explosive a tmosphere are o ften, but not alwa ys, clearly marked. They includ e below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage faciliti es and areas where the air contains chem icals or partic les such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You shou ld check with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butan e) to determine if this device c an be safely used in th eir vicinity. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using ra dio signals, wireless network s, landline networks, and user-programmed fu nctions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, swit ch it on . Check fo r adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by loca tion. 4. Press the call key. If certain features a re in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. If the device is in the offlin e or flight profile mode, you may need to chan ge the profil e to activate the pho ne function bef ore you can make an emergenc y call. Consult this guide or your service pr ovider for more information. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 161
When making an emerge ncy call, giv e all the n ecessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only mean s of communicat ion at the scene of an acci dent. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets gui delines for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radi o transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to rad io waves recommended by intern ational guidelin es. Thes e guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organization ICNIRP and incl ude safety margins designed to assure the pro tection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices emp loy a unit of measurement kn own as the Sp ecific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR l imit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averag ed over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using sta ndard operating positions w ith the device tr ansmitting at its h ighest certified power leve l in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operat ing device can be below the maximum value because the device is designed t o use only the pow er required to reach the ne twork. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value un der the ICNIRP guid elines for use of the device at the ear is 1 .23 W/kg. Use of devic e accessories and en hancements may resu lt in different SAR value s. SAR values may var y depending on national reporting and te sting requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 162 www.nokia .com.
é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. Index A access codes 19 access poin ts 95, 147 accessor ies See enhance ments active standby mode 33, 139 active toolbar 62 in camera 60 in Photos 71 address book See contacts alarm clock 126 alarm, calendar note 128 albums, media 72 anniversary notes 127 answering calls 116 antennas 22 application manager 133 applications 133 assisted GPS (A-GPS) 35 attachments 106, 108 audio messages 104 audio themes 32 auto-update for time/date 126 B backing up device memory 1 36 backlight time-out 139 battery power saver setting 139 saving power 20 birthday notes 127 blogs 89 Bluetoot h connectivity blocking devices 99 device address 98 device visibility 97 pairing devices 98 receiving data 99 security 97 sending data 97 settings 97 switching on/off 9 7 bookmarks 90 browser bookmarks 9 0 browsing pages 87, 89 cache memory 91 downloads 90 security 92 settings 92 widgets 89 C cable connection 100 cache memory 91 calculator 132 calendar 127 call wa iting 117 calls 114 answering 116 conferenc e 116 duration of 122 log for 123 options during 115 recording 103 reject ing 116 settings 144 camera colour 68 flash 63 image quality 67 imaging mode 61 indicators 60 lighting 68 163
location information 62 options 62 scenes 63 self-timer 64 sequence mode 63 settings 67 video mode 66 video quality 69 cell broa dcast messages 104 certificates 141 charts, spread sheet 129 clock 34, 12 6 comput er connections 100 See also data connections conference calls 1 16 configu ration See settings connection manager 95 contac ts copying 125 default information 1 24 deleting 124 editing 124 groups 126 images in 124 ringing tones 1 24 saving 124 sending 124 synchronising 137 voice tags 124 converter 130 copyright prot ection 102 currency converter 130 D data connections cable 100 device manager 138 PC connectivity 1 00 synchronisation 137 date and time 126 declining calls 116 device manager 138 dialled numbers 122 dismissing calls 116 display setti ngs 139 documen t applica tions 129 downloads 90 DRM (digital r ights management) 102 duration of calls 122 E e-mail messages 107 end all calls option 117 enhancements setti ngs 140 Excel, Micros oft 129 F factory se ttings, resto r ing 143 feeds, ne ws 89 file man ager 136 Flash Player 102 FM radio 5 5 FM transmi tter 50 playing songs 51 settings 51 font settings 139 G gallery sounds 78 streaming links 78 general information 18 GPS (Global Posit ioning System) 35 grid view of menus 34 H headset 29 é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 164
help application 18 home network 48, 79 copying f iles 82 sharing content 81 home synch ronisation incoming files 83 setting up 82 settings 82 HSDPA (h igh-sp eed down link packet access ) 30 I IAPs (internet access points ) 95 images editing 73 printing 75 , 76 sharing online 76 inbox, message 106 indicators and icons 24 installati on of applicatio ns 133 internet connection 8 7 See also browser internet radio favourites 57 listening 57 settings 58 station directory 58 J J2ME Ja va appl icatio n support 133 Java scripts/a pplications 133 K keyguard 26, 141 keypad 26, 141 L landmarks 38 language settings 140 licences 102 light settings 139 list view of menus 34 location information 35 lock code 19 locking keypad 26, 141 loudspeaker 29 M mailbox e-mail 107 video 115 voice 115 main menu 34 Maps 40 media Flash Player 102 music player 45 radio 55 RealPlayer 100 streaming 101 voice reco rder 10 3 meeting notes 127 meetings, setting up 127 memo notes 127, 13 0 memory cleari ng 21 web cache 91 message reader 107 selecting voice 1 38 messages e-mail 107 folders for 103 icon for incoming 1 06 multimedia 106 settings 109 voice 1 15 Mini M ap 89 MMS (multimedia message service) 104, 10 6 multimedia menu 27 multimedia messages 104, 106 é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 165
music player 45 playlists 47 transferring music 49 muting soun d 11 6 my numbers 123 N Navi wheel 26 navigation tools 35 network settings 146 news feeds 89 Nokia original enhancements 154 notes 130 O offline mode 30 operator logo 1 40 option s menu for calls 115 outbox, mess age 104 P packet data connection access point settings 14 7 counters 122 settings 149 page overview 89 PDF reader 130 personal ce rtificates 14 1 personalisation 31, 139 phonebook See contacts photograp hs See camera Photos active toolbar 66 organising files 71 photos editing 73 file details 70 red-eye 73 tags 72 viewing 70 PictBridge 76 PIN code 19 PIN2 c ode 19 playing messages 107 podcasting directories 53 downloads 54 playing 54 searching 53 settings 52 positioning info rmation 35 positioning set tings 143 power saver 13 9 PowerPoint, Micr osoft 130 presen tations, multi media 78, 107, 130 printin g images 75 profiles offline restrictions 30 proxy settin gs 148 PUK codes 19 Q Quickmanager 130 Quickpoi nt 130 Quicksheet 12 9 Quickword 129 R radio 55 RDS (Radio Data System) 55 RealPlayer 100, 101 recording calls 103 sounds 103 recording video clips 66 red-eye removal 73 redial feature 144 é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 166
rejec ting call s 116 remot e ma ilbox 107 remote SIM mode 99 ringing to nes 32, 33 roaming 146 S scenes, image and vide o 63 screen settings 139 scroll key 2 6 securit y certificat es 141 web browser 92 WEP 149 WPA 149 security code 19 security module 14 3 self-ti mer, camera 64 sent messages folde r 104 service commands 10 4 service messages 107 setting wi zard 22 settings access point name control 150 access points 147 applications 151 Bluetoot h connect ivity 97 call barring 145 call divert 145 calls 144 camera 67 certificates 141 configuration 150 display 139 enhancemen ts 140 FM transmitter 51 home network 80 internet radio 58 language 14 0 Navi wheel 143 network 146 packet data 149 packet data access points 147 personalisation 139 podcasting 52 positioni ng 143 RealPlayer 1 01 SIP 150 standby 139 Video Centre 86 video sharing 120 Visual Radio 56 web browser 92 WLAN 149, 15 0 WLAN internet access points 148 shared video 119 shooting modes, camera 63 signature, digital 142 SIM card contacts 125 messages 109 SIM card security 141 SIP 150 slide sho w 72 SMS (short message service) 104 software ap pl ications 133 software updat e 19 songs 45 sounds 32 speaker phone 29 Speech 138 speed dialli ng 116 standby mode 33, 139 streaming li nks 78 streaming media 101 Symbian applications 13 3 synchronisation settings 82 synchronisatio n of data 137 é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 167
T text messages receiving and reading 106 replying to 106 sending 104 settings 110 SIM messages 109 themes 31 time and date 126 time zone sett ings 127 time-ou t for bac klight 139 tones ring settings 32, 33 settings 139 toolbar 60, 71 transferrin g data 23 transf erring mu sic 48 troubleshooting 151 trust se ttings 142 U unlocking keypad 26, 141 UPIN code 1 9 UPnP (Univers al Plug and Play architecture) 79 UPUK co de 19 USB cable connection 100 useful information 18 V video calls 118 , 119 options during 118 Video Centre 84 downloading 84 viewing 84 video clips editing 74 effects 74 sending 75 shared 119 sound clips in 74 transitions 74 video settings 69 Visual Radio 55 settings 56 voice applications 136 voice calls See calls voice commands 117, 13 6 voice recorder 103 volume controls 29 W wallpaper 31 web conne ction 87 web logs 89 week settings, calendar 12 8 welcome 22 welcome note 139 WEP 149 widgets 89 wireless LAN (WLAN) 93 wireless LAN setti ngs 150 Word, Microsof t 129 world clock 127 WPA 149 Z zooming 61, 6 6 é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 168
Nokia Care Online The Nokia Care web suppo rt provides you wit h more inform ation on our onli ne services. INTERACTIV E DEMONSTRATIONS Learn how to set up your phone for the first time, and find out more about its features. Intera ctive Dem o nstr ations give step-by - step instructions on using your phone. USERâÂÂS GUIDE The online UserâÂÂs Guide contains detailed in formation on your phone. Remembe r to check regularly for updates. SOFTWARE Make the most of your phone with software fo r your phone and PC. Nokia PC Suite connects your phone and PC s o you can manage your calendar, contacts, mus ic and images, while other applications complement its use. SETTINGS Certain phone funct ions, such as multimed ia messaging, mobile browsing and email*, may require settings before you can use them. Ha ve t hem sent to your phone free of charge. *Not available on all phones. INTERACTIVE DEMONSTRATI ONS SOFTWARE USERâÂÂS GUIDE SETTINGS
HOW DO I USE MY PHONE? The Set Up section, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup , helps you prepare your phone for use. Fa miliarise yourself wi th phone functions and features b y referring to t he Guides and Dem os section at www.nokia-asia.com/guides . HOW DO I SYNCHRONISE MY PHONE AND PC? Connecting your phone to a compatible PC with the requisite Nokia PC Suite version from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite lets you synchronise your calendar and contacts. WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR MY PHONE? Get more out of your phone with downl o ads from the Soft ware section at www.nokia-asia.com/software . WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON Q UESTIONS? Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to you r questions on yo ur phone and other Nokia products and services. HOW DO I KEEP UP WITH NOKIA NEWS? Subscribe online at www.nokia-asia.com/signup and be the first to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia Connections" to receive monthly updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up for "Be The First To Know" to get exc lusive previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promotional Communication s" for upcoming even ts. Should you still require furthe r assistance, please refer to www.nokia-asia.com/contactus . For additional informati on on repair services, please visi t www.nokia-asia.com/repair . Please visit your own country site for more details: Australia and New Zealand www.nokia.com.au/support Malaysia www.nokia.com.my/suppo rt India www.nokia.co.in/support Philippine s www.nokia.com.ph/support Indonesia www.nokia.co.id/support Singapore www.nokia.com.sg/support Japan www.nokia.co.jp/support Th ailand www.nokia.co.th/support If your country is not lis ted above, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/support .
DECLARATIO N OF CONFOR MITY Hereby, NOKIA CORP ORATION declares th at this RM-23 5 product is in compliance with the essential requi r ements and other relev ant provisions of Directive 1999/ 5/EC. A copy of the Declaratio n of Conformity can be fo und at h ttp://www.nokia .com/phones/ declaration_of_conformit y/. é 2008 Nokia. All ri ghts reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connect ing People, Nokia Origi n al Enhancements logos, Nseries, N78, Navi , N-Gage, Visual Radi o, and Nokia Care are trademarks or r egistered trademarks of Nokia Co rporation. Noki a tune is a soun d mark of N okia Corp oration. Other product and company n ames m entioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective o wners. Reproduct ion, transf er, distrib ution, or st orage of part or al l of the contents in this docu ment in any form wi thout the prior written permission of Nokia is proh ibited. This product in cludes software licensed f rom Symbian S oftware Ltd é 1998-2007. Symb ian and S ymbian OS a re trademark s of Symb ian Ltd. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input softwar e Copyright é 1997-2007. Tegic Co mmunications, Inc. All ri ghts reserved. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsys tems, Inc. Portions of the Noki a Maps software are co pyright é 1996-2002 T he FreeType Project. All rights reserved. This product is licensed under th e MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portf olio License (i) fo r person al and noncommercial use in co nnection with information which has b een encoded in compl iance with the MPEG- 4 Visual Standar d by a cons umer engaged in a personal and no ncommercial ac tivity and (ii) f or use in connect ion with MPEG-4 video provid ed by a licensed vid eo provider . No license is granted or s hall be implied for any other use. Additional informatio n, including that rel ated to promotio nal, internal, and commercial uses, may be ob tained from MPEG LA, LL C. See http://www. mpegla.com. Nokia opera tes a policy of ongoing devel opment. Nokia reserves the righ t to make cha nges and impro vements to a ny of the pr oduct s descri bed in this do cument without prior notice. TO THE MAXI MUM EXTENT PE RMITTED BY A PPLICAB LE LAW, UNDER N O CI RCUMSTANCES SHAL L NOKIA OR A NY OF ITS L ICENSORS BE RES PONSIBLE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQU E NTIAL OR INDIRECT D AMAGES HOWSOEVER CAU SED. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVID ED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS RE Q U I RE D B Y A P PL I C A B L E L AW , N O W A R R A NT I E S O F A N Y K I N D , EI T H E R E X P RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT ED TO, THE IM PLIED WARR ANTIES OF ME RCHANTABILIT Y AND FITNESS FO R A PARTICULA R PURPOSE, ARE MADE IN RELATI ON TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS O F THIS DOCUM ENT. NOKIA R ESERVES THE RIGHT TO RE VISE THIS D OCUMENT OR WITHDRAW I T AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIO R NOTIC E.
The third-party applications provid ed wit h your device may have been created and may be owned by per sons or ent ities not affili ated with or rela ted to Nokia. Nokia does not own the copyrights or intellectua l property rights to the third-party a pplica tions. As such, N okia does not ta ke any r esponsibility f or end-user support, functionality of the applications, or the info rmation in the applications or thes e material s. Nokia does not pro vide any warra nty for the thi rd-party application s. BY USING THE APPLICATIONS YOU ACKNOWLE DGE THAT THE APPLICATIONS AR E PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRAN TY OF ANY KI ND, EXPRESS OR IMP LIED, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTE D BY APPLICABLE L AW. YOU FURTHER ACK NOWLEDGE THAT NE ITHER N OKIA NOR ITS AFFIL IATES MAKE AN Y REPRESENT ATIONS OR W ARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED , INCLUD ING BUT N OT LIMITED TO WARR ANTIES OF TI TLE, MERC HANTABILI TY OR FITNE SS FOR A PARTI CULAR PURPO SE, OR THAT THE APP LICATIONS W ILL NOT INFRING E ANY THIRD-PARTY PATENTS, COPYRIGH TS, TRADEMARK S, OR OTHER RIGHTS. The availability of particular products an d applications and services for these products may vary by region. Pleas e check with your Nokia dealer for details, and availabilit y of language opt ions. Export controls This device may contain commo dities , technology or softwa re subject to export la ws and regulations from the US and other countr ies. Diversion contra ry to law is prohibited.
Contents For your s afe ty . .......... ........ ........ ........ ........ ....... 10 About your device........... .................. .................. .................. ...11 Network services............................................ ...................... ...12 Enhancements, batteries, and chargers................................12 Get started...... ............. .......... ............. .......... ......13 Keys and parts (front)..... .......... ............... ............... ............ .....13 Keys and parts (bac k)................................................... ...........14 Insert (U)SIM card an d battery............... ............. .............. .... .14 Switch the device on...............................................................15 Charge the battery. ..................... ...................... .......................16 Wrist strap.......... ...................... ...................... ...................... ....16 Get connected......... ......... ........ ......... ........ .........17 Find help............. ........... .......... ........... .......... .....18 Instructions inside - In-device help................. ........... ....... ....18 Software updates......................................... .......................... .19 Settings... ................. ...................... .................. ................. ........19 Access codes..................... ............................... ........... ..............19 Prolong battery life.............................. ....................... ...... ......20 Free memory......................................... ...................................21 Your device....... ............ ................... ............... ....22 Antenna locations. .................. ................... ................... ........ ...22 Welcome......................... .............................. ........................... .22 Nokia Switch................................................. ...........................2 3 Transfer content............................. ................... ...................2 3 Synchronise, retrieve , or send content............................... 24 Display indicators.................................................... ................2 4 Shortcuts............................................. ............................. ........26 Lock the keypad...................... .................................................2 6 Navi⢠wheel.... .................. ................. .................. .............. ......26 Multimedia menu............................... .......................... ...........2 7 Mobile search. .......................................................................... 28 Games.......................................................................................2 8 Headset...................... .......................... ............................... ...... 29 Volume and loudspeaker control............. ..............................2 9 Offline prof ile...........................................................................30 Fast downloading............. ............................. ..........................3 0 Personalise your device........ ........... ........ ......... .30 Themes.....................................................................................3 1 Change the look of your device...........................................3 1 Audio th emes........................................................................32 Set tones......... .................... .................... ................... ...............32 3-D tones..................................................................................3 3 Modify the standby mode. ......................................................3 3 Modify the main men u.................................. ..........................3 4 Positioning (GPS)............... .................. ...............35 About GPS................................................................................ .34 Assisted GPS (A-GPS).......................................... ..................... .35 Get start e d... ......................... ..... ................. ..... ..... ................. ...18 Additi o n al ap plica tions.................... ............................. ..........1 8
Hold your device correctly.......................... .................... ........36 Tips on creating a GPS connection................. ........................36 Position requests ....................................... ..............................37 Landmarks....... ..................... ........................... .........................38 GPS data... ..................... ................ .................... ................. .......38 Route guidance......................................................... ............39 Retrieve position information.............................................39 Trip meter...... .......................... ............................ ..................39 Maps............................................................... ....40 About Maps...... ................. ................. .............. ................. ........40 Browse maps.. .............. .................. .................. .............. ..........41 Download maps ............................... ........................................42 Find a place............................................................................ ..43 Plan a route........ ....................................... ...............................43 Extra services for Maps.............. ................................... ...........44 Navigation................ .............................................................44 Guides........................................... .........................................45 Music folder...................... ..................................45 Music player..... ............... .......... ............... .............. ............... ....45 Play a song or a podcast episode........................................46 Music menu.......................... ................................ .................47 Playlists.................... ............................................... ...............47 Podcasts............. ............................... ..................... ................48 Home network with music p layer...................... .................48 Transfer music to your device......... .............. ............. .........48 Transfer music from PC.............. .................. .................. ....49 Transfer with Window s Media Player............ ........... .......49 Nokia Music Store............................................. .......................50 FM transmitter............................... ................................... .......50 About the FM transmitter. .................... .................... ............50 Play a song using FM transmi tter.................................. ......51 FM transmitter sett ings................................................. .......51 Nokia Podcasting............. .............................. ..........................52 Podcasting se ttings.................................................... ..........52 Search p odcasts.......................... .......................... ................53 Directories.............................................. ...............................53 Downloads... .................. ....................... ......................... ........54 Play and mana ge podcasts............................ ......................54 Radio applications........ ...........................................................55 Visual Radio...... ..................................................... ................55 Listen to the radio. ............... ............ ............... ............... ....55 View visual content.................... .............. ............. ............56 Saved stations................................................................... .56 Visual Radio settings .............. ............... ................ ............56 Nokia Internet Radio................................. ...........................57 Lis ten to i nte rne t r adi o st ati ons ...... ............ .......... ........ ..57 Favourite stations..............................................................57 Search for stations.............................................................58 Station directory................................ ................................5 8 Internet radi o settings....................... ......................... ......58 Camera................... .................... ................. .......59 About the camera.................................................................... 59 Activate the camera.................... ................ ................ ............59 Image captu re.............. .................... ............... .................... .....60 Still image camera indica tors..............................................60 Active toolbar....................................... .................................60 Capture images ........................................... ..........................61 Location information .............. .............. ............... ............ .....62 After taking a pictu re......... ....................... .................. .........62 Flash.......... .............................................................................63 Scenes................................................................................... .63
Take pictures in a sequen ce....... .......... ........... ............. .......63 You in the pictureâÂÂself-time r................................. ............64 Tip s on tak ing goo d p hot ogr aphs ...... .......... ........... ........ ...64 Video recording..................... ............................. .....................65 Video capture in dicators. .....................................................65 Record videos................................. .......................................66 After recording a video................. .................. ............... ......66 Camera settings .......................................................................67 Still image camera set tings................ ............... ................ ..67 Setup settings âÂÂadjust colour and light ing............. ..........68 Video settings............................... ............................ ............69 Photos............................ ............................. .......69 About Photos.... .............. .......... ............... ............... ........... .......69 View images and videos............................................ .............70 View and edit file details.............................. ..........................70 Organise images an d videos............... ............ ............ ...........71 Active toolbar......... ........................ ............................ ..............71 Albums........................ .................................. ............................72 Tags............ ................. ..................... ................. ..................... ...72 Slide show................................................................................72 Edit images... ................... ................... .............. ................... .....73 Image editor......... ............... ................ ........... ................ .......73 Crop image.............................. ......................................... .....73 Reduce red-eye....................... ....................... .................... ...73 Useful shortcuts...................................... ..............................74 Edit videos...... .............................................................. ............74 Edit videos.............................................................................74 Edit video, sound, ima ge, text, and trans itions.................74 Edit video clips to sen d............. .............. ................. ............75 Print images.............. ............................................. ..................75 Image print...... ................ ................. ............. ................ ........75 Printer selection.............. .............................................. .....76 Print preview.................... ................................................. .76 Print settings.................. ....................................................76 Print online... ........................... ................... ........................ ...76 Share images a nd videos online......................... ...................76 Gallery........................ .............................. ..........77 Main view............................................................. ....................77 Sounds......................................................................................78 Streaming links. ...................................................... .................78 Presentations. ..........................................................................78 Home network..................... ............. ............... ..79 About home network..............................................................78 Important security informati on.............................................79 Settings for home network............ ............. .............. ........... ..80 Set sharing on a nd define content......... .......... ......... ......... ...81 View and share media files................ ........... ............ ........... ..81 Copy media files................. ..................... ..................... ............82 Home synchronisation............................................... .............82 Synchronise media files...................... ................... ..............8 2 Synchronisati on settings..... ............... ............ ............... .......82 Define incoming files... ................ .................... ..................... 83 Define outgoi ng files............................................................83 Nokia Video Centre. ............ ................... .............84 View and download videos................... ................ ................ .84 Internet videos........................... ..................... ..................... ...85 Play downloaded videos...... ............................................. ......85 Transfer videos from your P C............ ............ ............. ............8 6 Video Centre set tings............................... ...............................8 6
Web browser....... ............... ................... ............ .86 Browse the web............ ......................... ..................................87 Browser toolbar............................ ................................. ..........88 Navigate p ages........................................................................89 Web feeds and blogs. ................................................. .............89 Widgets........ ............. ................ ................ ........... ................. ....89 Content search.........................................................................90 Download and purcha se items.......... ......... ........ ......... ........ ..90 Bookmarks.................................. ............................ .................90 Empty the cache.... ................ ............ ................ ............ ...........91 End the connection... .................. ............... ................... ...........91 Connection security.................................................... .............92 Web settin gs............................................................... .............92 Connections..... ................. ....................... ...........93 Wireless LAN..... ..................... ..................... ................ ..............93 About WLAN........... ................. .......... ................. ................ ....93 WLAN connections................................................................94 WLAN wizard.........................................................................94 WLAN internet a ccess points................. ............. .............. ...95 Operating modes .......................... ........................................95 Connection manage r...............................................................95 Active data connecti ons.......................................................95 Available WLAN n etworks.................................... ................96 Bluetooth connectivit y.............................. .......................... ....96 About Bluetooth connectivity......... ......................... ............96 Settings.......... ............................................. ...........................97 Security tips.............. .............................. ........................ .......97 Sen d d ata usi ng B lue toot h c onn ect ivi ty. .......................... .97 Pair devices...... ........... ............... ............... ............... .......... ....98 Receive data using Bluet ooth connectivity........................99 Block devices.........................................................................99 Remote SIM mode....... ................................ ..........................99 USB................................ ..........................................................100 PC connections.................. ................................... ..................100 Media folder................................ .....................100 RealPlayer ......... ................... .................... ................... ...........100 Play video clips. ............... ............... ............ ................ .........101 Stream content over the air........ .......... .......... .......... ........101 RealPlayer settings ............................................................ .101 Adobe Flash Player................................ ............................... .102 Licences..................................................................................102 Recorder.................................................................................103 Messaging.................. ................ .............. ........103 Messaging main view............. ............... ........... ............... ......103 Write and send messag es.................. ................... ................104 Messaging inbox.... .............................. ................................. .106 Receive messages ...............................................................106 Multimedia messa ges........... ............... ............... .......... ......106 Data, setting s, and web service messages ............... ........107 Message reader............. ............... ........................ ..................107 Mailbox...................................................................................107 Define the e-mail se ttings................ ........... ............. .........107 Open the ma ilbox............................... ................................108 Retrieve e-mail messag es..................................................108 Delete e-mail messag es...................... ...............................109 Disconnect from the mailbox ............. ............... ................109 View messages on a SIM ca rd........... ............... ............... ......109 Messaging settings... .......................... .................... ...............109 Text me ssage sett ings........... .............. ............ ............ ......110 Multimedia messa ge settings............ ........ ........ ........ .......110 E-mail setti ngs.......................................... ..........................111
Manage mailboxes ......................................... ..................111 Connection settings. ........................................................111 User settings... ................... ............... ................... .............112 Retrieval settings.............................................................112 Automatic retrieval set tings................................. ..........113 Web service message settings.............. ........... ........... ......113 Cell broadcast settings.......................................................113 Other settings .............. ......................... ..................... .........114 Make calls... ......................................................114 Voice calls................................... ............................................114 Options during a call.............................................................115 Voice and video mailboxes................ ...................................115 Answer or decl in e a call........................................................116 Make a conference call............................. .............................116 Speed dial a phone number........................ ...................... ...116 Call waiting.................................................... ........................117 Voice dialling............................. ...................... ......................117 Make a video call......................... ........................ ..................118 Options during a video call. .................. .............. .................. 118 Answer or decline a v ideo call...... ........ ......... ........ ...... ........119 Video sharing.............. ............................................. ..............119 Requirements............ .................... ............... .................... ...119 Settings...... ........................... ......................... ................... ...120 Share live video or video clips.......................... .................121 Accept an invita tion............... ............... ............... ..............121 Log..........................................................................................122 Recent calls....... ....................... ..................... .................... ...122 Call duration................... ................................................ .....122 Packet data ................... ................ .................... ...................122 Monitor all communica tion events...................................123 Contacts (phonebook).... ..................................123 Save and edit names an d numbers........ .......... ........... ........124 Manage names an d numbers...............................................124 Default numbers an d addresses......... ............. .......... ......... .124 Add ringing tones for conta cts......... ........ ........ ........ .......... .124 Copy contacts.......... ...............................................................125 SIM directory and other S IM services...................................125 Manage contact groups.................... ................ ....................126 Time management............. .................. ............126 Clock .......................... .......................... .................... ...............126 Alarm clock................................................................ ..........126 World clock................ ........................... ..................... ..........127 Calendar........ .................. ............. ................. .................. ........127 Create a calendar entry............................................. .........127 Calendar v iews............................................................ ........128 Manage calendar entries ............... ............... ................ ......128 Lunar calendar....................................................................128 Office folder... .................. ........... .................. ....129 Quickoffice............. ................ ........... ................ ................ ......129 Quickword................................................................. ..........129 Quicksheet............. ......................................... .....................129 Quickpoint...........................................................................130 Quickmanager............ ...................................... ...................130 Notes....... .................. .................. ............... .................. ...........130 Adobe PDF reader..................................................................130 Converter................... ............................................... ..............130 Chinese-English bilin gual dictionary........... .......... ........... ...131 Sea rch for w ord s i n th e di cti on ary. .......... .......... ........ ......1 31 Return to the state of looking up in dictionary...............132
Calculator...... ................ ............... ................ ................ ......... ..132 Application mana ger............... ..................... .................. .......133 Inst all ap plic at ions and so ftw are ..... ........... ........ .......... .. 133 Remove applications and software............ ......... ......... ....135 Settings...... ........................... ......................... ......................135 Tools folder........................ .................... ..........136 File manager..........................................................................135 Voice commands................... .................. .................. ............136 Sync............. ..................... ..................... .............................. ....137 Device manager................ .....................................................138 Speech ............................................ .................................. .....138 Settings........................ ......................... ...........139 General settings. ....................... ..................... ..................... ...139 Personalisation setti ngs............ ................. .............. ....... ..139 Enhancement setting s................ ........... ............... ..............140 Security settings...................................... ...........................141 Phone and SIM....... ................... ................... .................. ...141 Certificate mana gement........... .......... ........... .......... ..... ..141 Security module...............................................................143 Restore original settin gs............... .................. .................. .143 Navi wheel settings.......... ..................................................143 Positioning settin gs.................. ................. ..................... ...143 Phone settings...... ........................................................... ......144 Call settings.........................................................................144 Call divert.................. ...................... ...................... ...............145 Call barring..........................................................................145 Network settings......................................................... .......146 Connection settings. ............... ................ ............. ................ ..146 Data connections a nd access points............................. ....146 Access points.......... .............................................. ............... 147 Create a new access point ................... ..................... ....... 147 Packet data access p oints............. ................. .................147 WLAN internet access points ......... .......... .......... .......... ...148 Packet data sett ings...........................................................149 Wireless LAN se ttings......................................................... 150 SIP settin gs..................... .................... ..................... ............150 Configurati ons..................... ..................... ................. .........150 Access point name control.............. ................... ................150 Application s ettings........................ ....................... ...............151 Troubleshooting.............. ......... ....... ......... .......151 Nokia origina l enhancements. ................ .........154 Enhancements....................................... ........................ ....... .154 Battery...................................... .............................................. 155 Battery information......................... ................156 Charging and discharg ing........... ............... ............... ............ 156 Nokia battery authentica tion guidelines............................ 157 Authenticate ho logram...................................................... 157 Wha t i f yo ur ba tte ry i s n ot a uth ent ic ?...... ........ ........ ....... 157 Care and maintenance........ ...... ...... ....... ...... ....158 Addi tio na l saf ety inf orm atio n......................... 159 Small children........................................................................159 Operating environment.................................................. ......159 Medical devices..... .................................................. .............. .159 Implanted medical devices.... ................................. ...........159 Hearing aids........................................................................160 Vehicles................ .................. ................. .................. ............. .160 A ppli c a tio ns f o lder. .......... ........... .......... .......... .132
Potentially explosive en vironments................................ ....161 Emergency calls....................................... ..............................161 Certification information (SAR)........................................ ....162 3 Index ........... ......... ........ ........... ........ ........ .. .......16
For your safety Read these simple guidelines. Not fo llowing them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH O N SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wirele ss phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FI RST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving shou ld be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be su sceptible to interference, which coul d affect performance. SWITCH O FF IN HOSP ITALS Follow any restrictions. Sw itch the device off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRC RAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF W HEN REFUELI NG Do not use the device at a refueling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restri ctions. Do not u se the device where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the positions as explained in the product documentation. D o not touch the antenn a areas unnece ssarily. QUALIFIED SERV ICE Only qualified personnel ma y install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERI ES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible product s. WATER-RE SISTANCE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 10
BACK-UP COP IES Remember to ma ke back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your device. CONNECTIN G TO OTHER DEVIC ES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENC Y CALLS Ensure the phone funct ion of the device is switched on and in service. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and return to the standby mo de. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give you r location. Do not end the call un til given permissi on to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800 , 1900, and UMTS 900 and 2100 networks. Contact your service p rovider for more information about networks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, priva cy and legitimate rig hts of others, including copyrights. Copyright protections ma y pr event some images, music (including ringing tones ), and other content from being copied, modified, transferred, or forwarded. Your device supports inte rnet connections and other methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to vi ruses, ma licious messages and applicati ons, and other harmful con tent. Exerci se caution and open messages, accept connectivity requests , download content, and accept installations only from trustwort hy sources . To increase the security of your devices, consider insta lling, using, and regularly updating antivirus software, firewall, and other related software on your device and any connected computer. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be s witched on. Do not switch the device on when wi reless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Mic rosoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be viewed or modified. During extended operation , such as an active video s haring session or high-speed data co nnection, the device may feel warm. In most cases, this cond ition is normal. If you suspect the device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility. é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 11
Your device may have preins talled bookmarks and links for third-party internet sites. Yo u may also access other third- party sites through your device. Third-party sites are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does n ot endorse or as sume liability for them. If you choos e to access such sites, you should take precautions for se curity or content. The images in this guide may di ffer from your device display. Network se rvices To use the phone you must ha ve service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are no t available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your servic e provider before you can use the network services. Your service provider can give you instructions and ex plain what charges will ap ply. Some networks may have limi tations that affect how you can us e network services. For instan ce, some networks ma y not support all langu age-dependent characters and services. Your service provider may have requested that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device m enu. Your device may als o have a spec ial configuration such as changes in menu names, menu order, an d icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, su ch as MMS, browsing, and e-mail requ ire network support for these technologies. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device o ff and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of any charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when su pplied with power from the AC-4, AC-5, or DC-4 charger. The battery intended for use with this device is BL-6F. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Noki a for use with thi s particular model. The use of any other types ma y invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of app roved enhancem ents, pl ease check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pu ll the plug, not the cord. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 12
Get started Keys and parts (front) 1 â Power key 2 â Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) for com patible headsets, and headphones 3 â Earpiece 4 â Selection keys 5 â Call key 6 â Menu key 7 â Numeric keypad 8 â Microphone 9 â Navi⢠wheel. He reinafter re ferred to as the scroll key. 10 â Clear key C 11 â Multimedia key 12 â End ke y 13 â Light sensor 14 â Secondary camera with lower resolution é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 13
Keys and parts (back) 1 and 9 â Stereo speakers wi th 3- D sound effect 2 â Zoom/Volume key 3 â 2-stage capture key fo r auto-focus, still image capture, an d video recording 4 â LED flash 5 â Main camera for high resolution (up to 3.2 megapixels) imag e capture and video recordi ng 6 â Micro USB co nnector to connec t to a co mpatible computer 7 â Memory card slot for a compatible microSD card 8 â Charger connecto r 10 â Hole for a wrist strap Insert (U)SIM card and batt ery A USIM card is an enhanced version of the SIM card and is supported by UMTS mobile phones. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the batte ry. 1. With the back of th e device facing you, press and hold the release button and lift up the cove r. 2. Insert the SIM card into the card holder. Ensure that the bevelled corn er on the card is facing toward the slot, and th at the contact area on the card is facing down. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 14
3. Insert the battery. 4. To re place the cover, direct the top locking catch toward its slot first and then press down until the cover locks into place. Switch the device on 1. Press and hold th e power key. 2. If the device asks for a PIN cod e or lock code, enter it, and press t he left selectio n key. The factory se tting for the lock code is 12345 . Your device has intern al antennas. Note: Your device may have internal and extern al antennas. As with any radio transmitting device, avoid touching the ante nna unnecessarily wh en the antenna is in use. Contact with such an antenna affects the commun ication quality, ma y cause th e device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise ne eded and may reduce the battery life. 1 â Bluetooth and wire less LAN antenna, and GPS receiver 2 â FM transmitter ante nna 3 â Cellular antenna Note: The Blue tooth, WLAN, G PS, and FM transm itter antennas are in the back cover of your device. If you change the back cover, verif y that you have a genuine Nokia part intended for us e with this device, or these connections may stop working. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 15
Charge the battery 1. Conne ct a comp atible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the po wer cord to the device. If the battery is completely disc harged, it may ta ke a w hile be fore t he charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully charged, the charging indicator stops scrolling. Disconnect the ch arger from the device, then from t he wall outlet . Tip: Disconne ct the charger f rom the wall outl et when the c harger is not in use. A charge r that is connected to th e outlet cons umes power even when it is no t connecte d to the devic e. Wrist strap 1. Remove the back cov er. 2. Thread a strap as shown and tighten i t. 3. Replace the cover. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 16
Get connected Your device supports the foll owing connecti vity methods: â 2G and 3G networks â Bluetoo th connecti vity â to tra nsfer files and conne ct to compatible enhancements. See "Blu etooth connecti vity" , p. 96 . â Nokia AV connec tor (3.5 mm) â to connect to compatible headsets, headphones, or ho me stereo sets â USB data cable â to connect to compatible devic es, such as printers and PCs. See "USB" , p. 100 . â Wireless LAN (WLAN) â to connect to the interne t and WLAN enabled devices. See "Wirel ess LAN" , p. 93 . â GPS â to receive transmissions from GPS satellites to measure your loca tion. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 35 . â FM transmitter â to listen to songs in your device through compatible FM receiv ers, such as car radios or home stereo sets. See "Play a song using FM transmitter" , p. 51 . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 17
Find help Instructions in side - In-device help Your device contain s instructions to help you use it. When an application is open, to access the help t ext for the current view, select Option s > Help . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Util ities > Help , and the relevant application. You can find links to relate d topics at the end of the help text. To make the instruc tions easier to read, you can change the size of t he text. If you clic k on an underline d word, a short explanation is displayed. Help uses the following indicators: shows a link to a related help topic. shows a link to th e application bein g discussed. When you are reading the in st ructions, to switch between help and the appl ication that is open in the background, press and hold , or select the ap plication link ( ). Tip: To place Help in the main menu, selec t Tools > Utilities , highlight Help , and select Options > Move to fold er and the main menu. Get started See the get started gu ide for keys and parts information, instructions for settin g up the device and for other essent ial in formatio n. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 18 Additional applications There are various applications provided by Nokia and different third-part y software develope r s that help y ou do more with your device . These applications are explained in the g uides that are available on the product support pa ges of the N okia website.
Software updates Nokia may produce software updates that may offer ne w features, enhanced function s, or improved performance . You may be ab le to request these updates t hrough the Nokia Software Updater PC ap plication. To update the device software, you need th e Nokia Software Update r application and a compatible PC with Microsoft Windows 2000, XP, or Vista operating system, broadband internet access, and a compatible d ata cabl e to connect you r device to the PC. To get more information an d to download the Nokia Software Updater ap plication, visit www.nokia-asia.com/ softwareupdat e or your lo cal Nokia website. Tip: To check the software version in your device, enter *#0000# in the standby mode. Settings Your device normall y has MMS, GPRS, streaming, and mobile internet sett ings automatically c onfigured in th e device, based upon your network serv ice provider information. You may have se ttings from your service providers already installed in your device, or you may receive or request th e settings from the network service providers as a special message. You can c hange the general set tings in your devic e, s uch as language, standby mode, display, and keypad lock settings. See "General settings" , p. 139 . Access codes If you forget any of the acce ss codes, contac t your service provider. â Personal identification number (PIN) code â This code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. Th e PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usually supplied with the SIM card. After three con secutive in correct PIN code entries, the code is blocked, and you need the PUK code to unblock it. â UPIN code â This code ma y be supplied with th e USIM card. The USIM ca rd is an enhanced v ersion of the SIM card and is supported by U MTS mobile phones. é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 19
â PIN2 code â This code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your device. â Lock code (a lso known as secu rity code) â This code (5 digits) can be used to lock the device to avoid unauthorised use. Th e factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorised use of your dev ice, change the lock code. Keep the new code secret and in a safe place separate from yo ur device. Try entering the code only once, if you forget the code. If the code you entered is not correct, cont act a Nokia Care point or your serv ice prov ider fo r further instructions. â Personal unblocking ke y (PUK) code and PUK 2 code â These codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively . If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, cont act the operator whose SIM c ard is in your dev ice. â UPUK code â This code (8 di gits) i s require d to chan ge a blocked UPIN code. If the code is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operator whose USIM card is in your device. Prolong battery life Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, note th e following: â Features that u se Bluetooth te chnology, or allowing such features to run in the background whil e using other features, in crease the de mand on battery power. Turn Bluetooth technolog y off when you do not need it. â Features that use wireless LAN (WLAN), or allowing such features to run in the background whil e using other features, in crease the de mand on battery power. WLAN on your Noki a device switche s off when yo u are not trying t o connect, not co nnected to an access point, or not scanning for available networks. To further reduce batt ery consumption, you can specify that your device does not scan, or sc ans less often, for available networks in the backgrou nd. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 93 . When Scan f or networks is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. However, yo u can still manu ally sc an for available WLAN networks and connect to WLAN networks as usual. â If you h ave set Packet data connection to When available in connec tion setti ngs, and t here is no packet data coverage (GPRS), th e device periodically tries to e stablish a packet data co nnection. To prolong the operat ing time of your device, sele ct Packet data connection > When needed . â The Maps applicatio n downloads new map information when you scroll to new areas on the map, which increases t he demand on battery powe r. You can é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 20
prevent th e automatic down load of new maps. See "Maps " , p. 40 . â If the signal strength of the cellular network varies much in your area, your device must scan for the available network repeated ly. This increases the demand on battery power. If the network mode is set to dual mode in the network settings, the device searches for the UMTS network. To only use the GSM ne twork, press , and select Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Network > Network mode > GSM . â The backlight of the display increases the demand on battery power. In the disp lay settings , you can change the time-out after whic h the backlight is switched off, and adjust the ligh t sensor that observ es lighting conditions and adjusts the display brightness. Press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalis ation > Dis play and Light time-out or Light s ensor . â Leaving applications running in the background increases the d emand on battery po wer. To close the application s you do not use, press and hold , scroll to an application in the l ist, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Music player, select it from t he list and Options > Exit . Free memory Many feature s of the devic e use memory to store data. The device notifies y ou if the device m emory or the memory card memory (if available) is low. To view how much memory different data types cons ume, press , and select Tools > File mgr. , the desired memory, and Options > Details > Memory . To free device memory, transf er data to a compatible memory card (if available) or to a compatible PC. To remove data you no l onger need, u se File manager or go to the respective applic ation. You can remove the following: â Messages in the folders in Messaging and retrieved e- mail messages from the mailbox â Saved web pages â Contact information â Calendar notes â Applications shown in Applica tion manager that you do not need â Installation files (.sis or .s isx) of a pplications you ha ve installed. Transfer the instal lation files to a compatible PC. â Images and video clips in Photos. Back up the files to a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 21
If you are deleting multiple items and a note Not enough memory to perform operat ion. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data from phone memory. is shown, delete items one by one, beginning with the smallest items. Your device Model number: Nokia N78-1. Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N78. Antenna locations Your device has intern al antennas. Note: Your device may have int ernal and external antennas. As with any radio transmitting device, avoid touching the ante nna unnecessarily wh en the antenna is in use. Contact with such an antenna affects the communicat ion quali ty, may ca use the de vice to operate at a higher pow er level than otherwise needed and may reduce the battery life. 1 â Bluetooth and wire less LAN antenna, and GPS receiver 2 â FM transmitter ante nna 3 â Cellular antenna Note that the Bluetoo th, WLAN, GPS, and FM transmitter antennas are located in the back cover of your device. If you change the back c over, check t hat the new cover includes th ese antennas, o therwise these conn ections stop working. Welcome When you switch on your device, th e Welcome application is displayed. Select fr om the f ollowing : â Sett. wizard â to configure various settings, such as e-mail. For more informatio n on the Settings wizard application, see t he guides av ailable at the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia web site. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 22
â Switch â t o transfer content, such as co ntacts and calendar entries, from a compatible Nokia device. See "Transfer content" , p. 23 . There may also be a demonstration about your device available in th e We lcome application. To access the Welcome ap plication later, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Welco me . You can also access the individual appl ications from thei r menu locations. Nokia Switch Transf er cont ent You can use the Switch application to copy content such as phone numbers, addresse s, calendar items, and images from your previous Nok ia devi ce to y our new device using Bluetooth conn ectivity. The type of con tent that can be transferred d epends on the model of the device from which you want to tr ansfer conten t. If tha t devic e suppo rt s synchronisation, you can also synchronise data betwee n the dev ices. Y our device notifies you if the othe r device is not compatible. If the other dev ice cannot be switched on without a SIM card, you can insert your SIM card in it. When your device is switched on without a SI M card, the offline profile is automatically activated. Transfer content for the first ti me 1. To retrieve data from the other device for the first time, on your device, select Switch in the Welcome application, or press , and select Tools > Util ities > Switch . 2. Select the conn ection type you want to use to transfer the data. Both dev ices must supp ort the selected connection ty pe. 3. If you select Bluetoot h, connect the two devices. To have your device sea rch for devices with Bluetooth connectivi ty, select Continue . Select the device from which you want to transfer content. You are asked to enter a code on you r device. Enter a c ode (1-1 6-digits ), and select OK . Enter the sa me code on the other device, and select OK . Th e devices are now paired. See "Pair devices" , p. 98 . Some earlier Nokia devices do not already have the Switch application. In this case the Switch applic ation is sent to the ot her device as a message. To install the Switch application on th e other device, open the message, and follow the inst ructions on the display. 4. From your device, select the cont ent you want to transfer from the other device. When the tr ansfer has started, y ou can canc el it and continue la ter. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 23
Content is transferred from the memory of the other device to the co rresponding lo cation in your devi ce. The transfer time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. Synchronise, retrieve, or send content After the first transfer, select from the following to st art a new transfer, depending on th e model of the other device: to synchro nise content betwee n your devi ce and the other device, if the other device supports synchronisation. Th e synchron isation is two- way. If an item is deleted in one device , it is deleted in both. You cannot restore deleted it ems with synchronisation. to retrieve content from the oth er devic e to your device. With retrie val, cont ent is transferre d from the other device to your device. You may be asked to keep or delete the original con tent in the ot her device, de pending on the device mod el. to send cont ent from your d e v i c e t o y o u r o t h e r d e v i c e If Switch cannot send an item, depending on the type of the other devic e, you can add the item to th e Nokia folde r to C:\Nokia or E:\Nokia and send it from there. When you select the folder to transfer, the items are synchronised in the correspon ding folder in the o ther device , and vice ve rsa. Use shortcuts to repeat a transfer After a data transfer, you can save a shortcut with the transfer settings to t he main view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the sh ortcut, sc roll to it, and select Options > Shortcut settings . You can, for example, create or change the name of the shortcut. A transfer log is shown after every transfer. To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a shortcut in the main view, and select Optio ns > View log . Handle transfer conflicts If an item to be transferred has been edited in bot h devices, th e device atte mpts to merge th e changes automatically. If th is is not possible, there is a transfer conflict. Sele ct Check one by one , Pri ority to th is phone , or Prior ity to ot her phone to solve the conflict. For further instru ctions, se lect Opti ons > Help . Display indicators The device is being used in a GSM ne twork (ne twork service). é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 24
T h e d e v i c e i s b e i n g u s e d i n a U M T S n e t w o r k ( n e t w o r k service). You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received ne w e-mail in the remote mailbox. There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder. You have missed calls. The ringing type i s set to silent, and the message alert tone and e -mail aler t tone are set to off . A timed profile is active. The devi ce keypa d is locked. A clock alarm is active. T h e s e c o n d p h o n e l i n e i s b e i n g u s e d ( n e t w o r k s e r v i c e ) . All calls to the device are diverted to another number (network service). If you have two phon e lines, a number indicates the active line. A compatible microSD card is in th e device. A compatible headset is conne cted to the device. FM transmitte r is active but not t ransmitting. FM transmitter is active an d transmitting. A compatible text phone is connec ted to the device. A GPRS packet data co nnection is active (network service). indicat es the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is available. A packet data connection is active in a part of the network that support s EGPRS (netwo rk servic e). indicates th e connection is on hold and that a connection is available. The icons indicate that EGPRS is available in the network, but your device is not necessarily using EGPRS in the data tra nsfer. A UMTS packet data co nnection i s active (network service). indicat es the conn ection is on hold and that a connection is available. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and active (network service). indicates the connecti on is on hold and that a connection is available. See "Fast downloading" , p. 30 . You have set the device to scan for wireless LANs, and a wireless LAN is available (network service). See "Abou t WLAN" , p. 93 . A wirele ss LAN connection is active in a ne twork that has encryp tion. A wireless LAN connection is active in a network that does not have encr yption. Bluetooth connectivity is on. See "Bluet ooth connectivity" , p. 96 . é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 25
Data is being transmitted using Bluetooth connecti vity. When th e indica tor is blinkin g, your dev ice is trying to con nect with another de vice. A USB connection is active . Synchronisation is in progress. Shortcuts When in the menus, instead of using the scroll key, you can use th e number keys, # , and * to quickly access the applications. For example, in the main menu, press 2 to open Messaging, or # to open the application or fold er in the corresponding location in th e menu. To switch betw een open ap plications, press and hold . Leaving applications runn ing in the background increases the demand on ba ttery power and reduces the battery life. To open th e multimedia menu to view the mu ltimedia content you have used most frequently in your device, press the multimedia key. To start a web connection (n etwork service), in the standby mode, press and hold 0 . In many applications, to vi ew the most common option items ( ), press the scroll key. To change the profile, press the po wer key, and se lect a profile. To switch betw een the Genera l and Silent profiles, in the standby mode, press and ho ld # . If you have two phone lines (network service), this action switches between th e two lines. To call your voice mailbox (network service), in the standby mode, press and ho ld 1 . To open the last dialled numbers list, in the standby mode, press the call key. To use voice commands, in the standby mode, press and hold the right selection key. Lock the keypad To lock the keys, press t he left selectio n key, then * . To unlock the keys , press the left selec tion key, th en * . You can sele ct to lock th e keypad autom atically after a time-out. See "Security set tings" , p. 141 . In low light conditions, it is possible to illuminate the keypad by briefly pr essing the power key. Navi⢠wheel Hereafter referred to as the scroll key. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 26
Use the scroll key t o move ar ound the menus and lists (up, down, left, or right). Press th e scroll key to select the action shown on top of the ke y or to show the most used options . When the Navi wheel setting is switched on in the settings, you can scroll quickly t hrough Photos, Music Player, Nokia Video Centre, Contacts, and Messaging lists, or the multimedia me nu. See "Navi wheel settings" , p. 143 . 1. Move the tip of your finger gently around the rim o f the scroll key clockwise or countercloc kwise. Keep moving your finger unti l scrolling starts on the display. 2. To contin ue scrolling, slide your finger around the rim of the sc roll key clockwise or co unterclockwise. Tip: When you start using quick scrolling, move your finger slowl y around the rim of the scroll key to get used to the featur e, and increase the speed little by li ttle. Sleep mode indicator When the device is on standby, the rim inside the Navi wheel lights up slowly. The light varies periodically as if the device was breathing. The breathing is quicker if there are missed calls or received messages. To switch off breathing, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Navi wh eel . Multimedia menu With the mul timedia menu, yo u can acce ss your most frequently used multimedia c ontent. Th e selected content i s shown in the appropriate application . 1. To open or close the multimedia menu, press the multimedia key. 2. To browse the tiles, scroll left or right, or, if the Navi wheel setting is set on, slide your finger on the rim o f the scroll key. See "Navi wheel" , p. 26 . The tiles are the following: â Music â Enter Music player and t he Now playing view, browse your songs and playlists, or download and manage podcasts. â Videos â View your last taken videos. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 27
â Images â View your most recently taken picture, start a slide show of your images, or view media files in albums. â Games â Try out N-Gage games (network service). â Maps â Vi ew y o ur f av ou ri te lo ca ti ons in th e Ma p s application. â Internet â View your favourit e web links in the browser. â Contacts â Add your own contacts, send messages, or make voice calls. To add a new contact t o a n e m p t y p o s i t i o n o n t h e list, press the scroll key, and se lect a c ontac t. To send a message, in the multimedia menu, sele ct a contact, and Opti ons > Send text messa ge or Send multimedia msg. . 3. T o s c r o l l u p o r d o w n i n a t i le, press the scroll key up or down. To select items, press the scroll key. To change the order of t he tiles, selec t Options > Arrange til es . To return to the multimedia menu from an open application, press the mu ltimedia key. Mobile search Press , and select Searc h . Use Mobile Search to access internet search engines and to find and conn ect to local serv ices, websites, images, and mobile content. Y ou can also search content in your devi ce, suc h as ca lendar entr ies, e-mail , and other messages. Web search (network service) 1. In the Search main view, se lect Search the Internet . 2. Select a search engine. 3. Enter your text to search. 4. Press the scroll key to start the sea rch. My content search To search content in your de vice, in the main view, enter your text to the search field. The search results are displayed on the sc reen as you write. Games You can pl ay high-qual ity, multi player N-Gage ⢠games with your device. To download the full N-Gage application to your device, press the multimedia key, an d scroll to Games. To open the application after downloadin g it, select N-Gage in the main menu. For the full N-Gage experience, you need internet access on your device, either through th e cellular network or wireless LAN. Contact your servi ce provider for more information on data services. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 28
For more information, visit www.n-gage.com . Headset You can connect a compatible headset or compatible headphones to your de vice. You may need to select the cable mode. Warning: When you use the headset, your ability to hear outside sounds may be affected. Do not use th e headset where it can endanger your safety. Some headsets come in two parts, a remote control unit and headphones . A remote control unit has a microphone and keys to answer or end a phone call, adjust the volume, and play music or video files. To u se the headphones wi th a remote co ntrol unit, conn ect the unit to the Nokia AV Connector (3.5 mm) in the device, th en connect t he headphones to the unit. If a headset doe s not include a microphone, for handsfree phone calls, use such a headset with a compatible remote control unit or the microph one of the device. When using certain headset e nhancements, to adjust the volume during a call, use the volume key in the d evice. Some headset enhanc ements have multimedia volu me controls that are used to adju st the v olume only for music or video playback. Do not conn ect product s that create an output signal as this may cause damage to the device. D o not connec t any voltage source to the No kia AV Connector. When conn ecting any e xtern al device or any headset, other than those approved by Nokia for use with this device, to the Nokia AV Conn ector, pay special atte ntion to volu me levels. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease th e volume level when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, use the volume key. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen from a short distanc e without having to hold the device to your ear. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volu me may be extremely loud. To use the loudspeak er during a call, press Loudsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker, press Handset . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 29
Offline profile To activat e the offlin e profile, press the powe r key briefly, and select Offline . Or, press , and s elect Tools > Profiles > Offline . The offline profile lets y ou use th e device without connecting to the wireless network. When you act ivate the offline profile, th e connectio n to the wireless ne twork is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator area. All wireless RF signals to and from the device are prevented. I f yo u try to send messages, they are placed in th e outbox to be sent la ter. When the offline p rofile is active, you c an use your devi ce without a SI M card. Important: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any c alls, or use other features that require cellular network coverage. Calls may still be possible to the official emergency number progr ammed into your device. To make calls, you must first activate t he phone function b y changing profiles. If the d evice has been locked, e nter the lock code. When you have activated the offline profile, you c an still use the wireless LAN, for exampl e, to r ead your e-mail or browse on the int ernet. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements wh en establishing and using a wireless LAN con nection. You can also use Bluetooth connectivi ty while in the offline profile. To leave the offline profile, press the power key briefly, and select another pro file. The device re -enables wireless transmissions (providing there is sufficient signal strength). Fast downloading High-speed down link packet access (HSDPA, al so called 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-s peed data downloads. When HSDPA sup port in the device is activated and the device is co nnected to a UMT S network that sup ports HSDPA, downloading data such as messages, e-mail, and browser pages through th e cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . See "Display indica tors" , p. 24 . You can activ ate or deactivate sup port for HSDPA in the device settings. See "Packet data set tings" , p. 149 . For availability and subscr iption to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the downlo ad speed; sending data to the network, such as messages and e-mail, is not affected. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 30
Personalise your device You can pe rsonalise your de vice by changi ng the standby mode, main menu, tones, themes, or font size. Most of the personalisation options, such as changing the font size, can be acce ssed through the device setting s. See "Personalisation setti ngs" , p. 139 . Themes Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation > Themes . Chang e the look of your device Use Themes to ch ange the look of the display, such as th e wallpaper an d icons. To change the th eme that is used for all the applications in your device, select General . To preview a theme b efore activating it, select Options > Preview . To acti vate the th eme, select Opti ons > Set . The active theme is indicated by . The themes on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated by . The theme s on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the device. If you want to use the themes saved in the memory card without the me mory card, save the t hemes in the device memory first. To change the layout of the main menu, select Menu view . To open a browser connec tion and download more themes, in Ge neral , select Download themes (network service). Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate securi ty and protection against harmful software. To have a wallpaper image or a slide show of changing images as the background in the standby mode, select Wallpaper > Image or Slide show . To have an animation or a slide show as the power saver, select Power saver > Animat ion or Slid e show . To change the background of the call bubble shown when a call comes in, select Call i mage . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 31
Audio themes In Audio themes, yo u can sele ct a sound scheme such as 'Space' to cover all device events, such as calling, batte ry low, and mechanical events . The sounds can be tones, synthesised voice tags, or a combination of both. Select the sound sche me you want to use in Active audio theme . Note that activating an audio theme changes all your previous sound settings . If you want to return to using the defaul t tones, select audio theme 'Nokia'. You can change the sounds for differen t events individually by selecting on e of the sound groups, for example, Menu events . To add 3-D effects to th e audio theme, sele ct Option s > 3-D ringing ton es . See "3-D tones" , p. 33 . To change the langu age that is used for the synthesise d voice ta g, select Option s > Set Speech language . If you have changed t he tone s of indi vidual ev ents, you can save the t heme by select ing Options > Save theme . Set sounds for events To set the sound of an indivi dual event to silent, open an event group, se lect the even t, and change it to Silent . To set a synthesised voice ta g as the sound for an event, open an ev ent group, select t he event, and Speech . Enter the desired text, and press OK . Speech is not available if you have set Say caller's nam e on in Profiles . See "Voice dialling" , p. 117 . Set tones Press , and select Tools > Profiles . You can set and customise the ringing tones, message alert tones, and other to nes for different event s, environments, or caller groups. To change the profile , select a profil e, and Option s > Activate . To also change the profile, press the power key in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you want to activate, and select OK . Tip: To switch betw een the general and silent profiles in the standby mode, press and hold # . To modify a profile, sc roll to the profile, and sele ct Options > Pers onalise . Scroll t o the setting you want to change, and press the scroll key to open the choice s. Tones stored on a compatible memory card (if inserted) are indicated with . If you want to set a profile to be active a certain time, select Option s > Pers onal ise > Timed . When the set time expires the profile changes back to th e profiles th at was previously active . When a profile has been timed, you é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 32 in
can see in the stand by mode. Th e Offline profile cannot be timed. In the tones list, select Download sounds (network service) to open a list of bookmarks. You can sel ect a bookmark and start conne ction to a web page to download more tones. If you want the callerâÂÂs name to be spoken whe n your device rings, select Option s > Personalise , and set Say caller 's name to On . The callerâÂÂs name must be saved in Contacts. To crea te a n ew pro file, sele ct Options > Create new . 3-D tones Press , select Tools > Utilities > 3-D tones . With 3-D tones, you can enable three- dimensional sound effects for ringing tones. No t all ringing tones support 3- D effects. To enable the 3 -D effects, select 3-D ringing tone effects > On . To change the rin ging tone, s elect Ringing tone and the desire d rin ging tone. To change th e 3-D effect t hat is applied to the ringing tone, sele ct Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the effec t, select from the following settings: â Trajectory speed â Scroll left or right to adjust the speed at which sound moves from one direction to another. This setting is not available for all ringing tones. â Reverberat ion â Select the ty pe of echo. â Doppler e ffect â Select On to have the ringing tone sound louder when you a re cl oser to your devic e, and softer when you are farther away. When you get closer to the device , the ringing ton e appears to become louder, and softer when yo u move away from it. This setting is not available for all ringi ng tones. To listen to the ringing ton e with the 3- D effect, selec t Options > Play tone . If you enable the 3-D tones but do not select any 3-D effe ct, stereo widening is applied to the ringing tone. To adjust the ringing tone volume, select Tools > Profiles > Options > Personalise > Ringing volume . Modify the standby mode To change the look of the standby mode, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Standby mode > Standb y theme . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 33
The active standby display shows application shortcuts, and events from applicat ions such as calendar and player. To change the selection key shortcuts or the default shortcut icons in the active standby mode, select Tools > Settings > Gen eral > Personalisation > Stan dby mode > Shortcuts . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you cannot chang e them. To change the cl ock shown in the standby mode, press , and select Applications > Clock > Opti ons > Settings > Clock typ e . You can also change the stan dby mode background image or what is shown in the power saver in the device settings. See "Change the look of your dev ice" , p. 31 . Tip: To chec k whether there are application s running i n the backgrou nd, press an d hold . To close the app lications you do not use, scroll to an application in the list, and press C . Leaving applic ations runnin g in the back ground increa ses the demand on battery power. Modify the main menu To change the main menu view, in the main menu, press and select Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Themes > Menu view . You ca n change the main menu to be shown as Grid , List , Horseshoe , or V-s haped . To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Mo ve to fol der , or New folder . You can move applications used less frequentl y into folders and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 34
Positioning (GPS) You can use applications such as Maps and GPS data to find out your location, or measure distances and coordinates. These applicatio ns requir e a GPS con nection. About GPS The Global Positioning System (GPS) is a worldwide ra dio navigation system that incl udes 24 satellites a nd their ground stations that moni tor the operation of the satellites. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low- power radio signals from the satellites an d measures the travel time of the signals. From the travel t ime, the GPS rec eiver can calculate its location to the a ccuracy of metr es. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positi oning System (GPS) is op erated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The accuracy of location data c an be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made b y the Un ited States government and is subject to c hange with th e United St ates Department of Defense civil GP S policy and the Fed eral Radionavigation Plan. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry . Avai lability and quality of GPS signals may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacles, and we ath er conditions. The GPS receiver should only be used outd oors to allow reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be used for precise location measurement, and you shou ld never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellular radio networks for positioning or navigation. To enable or disable differe nt positioning methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Posi tioning > Positioning methods . Assisted GPS (A-GPS) Your device also supports Assisted GPS (A-GPS) . A-GPS is a network service. Assisted GPS (A-GPS) is used to retrieve assistance data over a packet data c onnection , which assists in calculating é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 35
the coordinates of you r current location when your device is receiving signals from satellites. When you activate A-GPS, your device receives useful satellite information from an assi stance data server over the cellular network. W ith the help of assisted data, your device can obtain the G PS position faster. Your device is prec onfigured to use th e Nokia A-GP S service, if no service provid er-specifi c A-GPS settings are available. The assistance data is retrieved from the Nokia A-GPS service se rver only when needed . You must have an internet a ccess point defined in the device to retrieve assistan ce data from the Nokia A-GPS service over a pack et data connecti on. To define an acc ess point for A-GPS, press , and select Tools > Settings > General > Positioning > Posit ioning server > Access point . A wireless LA N access point cannot be used for this service. Only a pack et data internet ac cess point can be used . Your device as ks for the int ernet acce ss point when GPS is used for th e first time. Hold your device correctly The GPS receiver is located in the to p of the dev ice. When using the receiver, make sure that you do not cover the antenna with your hand. See "Antenna locations" , p. 22 . Establishing a GPS connection may take from a couple of seconds to several minutes. Establishing a GPS connecti on in a vehic le may take longer. The GPS receiver draws its power from the device battery. Using the GPS receive r may drain the batt ery faster. Tips on creating a GPS connection If your device cannot find t he satellite si gnal, consider the following: â If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a be tter signal. â If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 36
â Ensure that your hand does not c over the GPS antenna of your device. See "Hold your device correctly" , p. 36 . â If the weather conditions are bad, the signal strength may be affected. â Some vehicles have tinted (athermic) win dows, which may block the satell ite signals. Check satellite signal statu s To check h ow many satelli tes your devi ce has found, and whether your devi ce is receiv ing satellite signals, press , and select Tools > Co nnectivity > GP S data > Position > Options > Satellite status . Or, in the Maps application, select Option s > Map opti ons > Satellite info . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The long er the bar, th e stronger the satellite signal. When your d evice has re ceived enough data from the sat ellite signal to calculate the coordinates of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must receive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of y our location. When the initial calculation has been made, it may be possible t o continue calculati ng the coordinates of your loc ation with three satellites. However, th e accuracy is ge nerally bette r when more satellites are found. Position requests You may receive a request from a network service to receive your position inform ation. Serv ice prov iders may offer information about loc al topics, such as weather or traffic condit ions, based on the location of y our device . When you receive a position request, a message is displayed showing the service that is maki ng the request. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 37
Select Accept to allow your position information to be sent or Reject to deny the request. Landmarks Press , and select Tools > Conn ectivity > Landmarks . With Landm arks, you can s ave the position information of spec ific l ocation s in y our device. You can sort the saved locations in to different catego ries, such as business, and add other information to them , such as addresses. You can use your save d landmarks in compatible application s, such as GPS data and Maps . GPS coordinates are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS- 84 coordinate system. To crea te a new landma rk, select Options > New landmark . To make a positioning request for your current location, se lect C urrent p ositio n . To enter the position i nformation manually, selec t Enter manual ly . To edit or add information to a saved landmark (for example, a street address), scroll to a landmark, and select Option s > Edit . Scroll to the desired field, and enter the information. You can sort your landmarks into preset ca tegories, and create new c ategories. To edit an d create new land mark categories, scroll right in Landmarks, and select Options > Edit categories . To add a landmark to a category, scrol l to the landmark in Landmarks, and select Options > Add to category . Scroll to each cat egory to which you want to add the landmark, and select it. To send one or several landma rks to a compatible device, select Option s > Send . Your received landmarks are placed in the In box folder in Messa ging. GPS data GPS data is designed to provide route guidance information to a selected destination, position information about your curre nt location, and traveling information, such as the approximate distance to the destination and approximat e duration of travel. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > GPS data . The coordinates in the G PS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format usin g the international WGS-84 coordinate system. To use GPS data, th e GPS receiver of your d evice must initially receive position in formation from at least four satellites to calc ulate the c oordinates of your location. When the initial calculation h as been made, it may be é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 38
possible to continue calculating the coordinat es of your location with three satellites. Howev er, the accuracy is generally better wh en more satellites are found. Route guidance Press , and select Tools > Conn ectivity > GPS data > Navigation . Start the route guidance ou tdoors. If started indoors, the GPS receiver may not receiv e the necessary information from the satell ites. Route guidance uses a rota ting co mpass on the device display. A red ball shows the direct ion to the destinat ion, and the approximat e distance to it is shown inside the compass ring. Route guidance is designed to show the straightest route and the shortest distance to the destination, measured in a straight line. Any obstacles on the route, such as buildings and natural obstacl es, are ignored. Differences in altitude are not taken in to account when calculating the distance. Route guidance is ac tive only when you move. To set your trip de stination, select Option s > Set destination and a landmark as the destination, or enter the lati tude and longitud e coordinates. Select Stop navigation to clear th e destination set f or your trip. Retrieve position in formation Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Position . In the position view, y ou can view the p osition information of your current location. An estimate of the accuracy of the location is displayed. To save your current loca tion as a landmark, select Options > Save po sition . Landmarks are saved locations with more informatio n, an d they can be used in other compatible applicatio ns a nd transferred between compatible devices. Trip meter Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > GPS data > Trip distance . Select Options > Start to activate trip distance calculation, and Stop to deactivate it. The calcul ated values remain on the display . Use this feature outdoors to receive a better GPS signal. Select Reset to set the trip distance and time and average and maximum speeds to zero, and to start a new calculation. Select Rest art to set the o dometer and total time to zero. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 39
The trip meter has limited ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. Accurac y can also be affe cted by availabili ty and quality of GPS signal s. Maps About Maps Press , and select Maps . With Maps, you can see your current l ocation on the map, browse maps for different cities and countries, search for addresses and different points of interest, plan routes from one location to anot her, and save locations as landmarks and send them to com patible device s. You can also purchase extra services, such as guides and a turn-by-turn navigation se rvice with voice gu idance. Tip: You can try out th e turn-by- turn navigation service for three days using free lic ence. See "Navigation" , p. 44 . Maps uses GPS. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 35 . You can defin e the pos itioni ng meth ods used with yo ur device i n the device set tings. See "Positioning settings" , p. 143 . For the most accurate locati on information, use either the internal GPS or a compatible external GPS receiver. When you browse a map in Maps, th e map data for the area is automatically download ed to yo ur device th rough the interne t. A new map is do wnloaded only if you scrol l to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. Some maps may be pre-loaded on the memory card in yo ur device. Yo u can download more maps using Nokia Ma p Loader PC software. See "Downloa d maps" , p. 42 . Downloading maps may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your ser vice provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Tip: You can also download maps by using a wireless LAN connecti on. When you use Maps for the first time, you may need to define an internet access point for downloadin g map information for your current location. To change the default access point later, select Opt ions > Settings > Network > Default acc ess point . To receive a note when your device registe rs to a network outside your home cellu lar network , select Optio ns > Settings > Networ k > Roamin g warn ing > On . Contact your netw ork servic e provider for details and roaming costs. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 40
Almost all digital cartograp hy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this devi ce. Browse maps The ma p coverage va ries by country. When you open th e Maps application, Maps z ooms in to the location that was saved from your last session. If no position was saved from the last session, the Maps application z ooms in to the capital cit y of the coun try you are in based on the information the dev ice receives from the cellular network. At the same time, the map of the location is downloaded, if it has not be en downloaded during previous sessions. To establish a GPS connection and zoom in to your current location, select Options > Find place > GPS po sitio n [0] , or press 0 If the power saver turns on wh ile the devic e is attempting to establish a GPS connection, the att empt is interrupte d. A GPS indicator is shown on the display when you browse maps. When the device tries to establish a GPS connection, th e circles are yellow. W hen the device receives enough data from the satellites to calcu late the coordinates of your current l ocation, th e circles turn green. To view informatio n about satellites w hen you are u sing Maps, select Opt ions > Map opti ons > Satellit e info . Move on the map Your current location is indicated on the map with . To move on the map, sc roll up, down, left, or right. When y ou browse the map on the display , a new map is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. These maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through y our service provid er's network. For more information on data transmission charges, contac t your service provider. The maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). Edit the map view To zoom in or out, press * or # . To switch between the 2D and 3D views, select Option s > Map opt ions > 2D/3 D . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 41
To define what kinds of points of interest are shown on the map, select Opt ions > Map options > Cat egories and the desired categories. To adjust the network, routing, and general setting s, select Options > Settings . Find and sav e locations To find a location , select Op tions > Find place . You can ch o os e t o go t o y ou r GP S p os i t io n , f i n d a n a dd re s s , f i nd a point of interest b y entering a keyword, find locations nearby, or browse a guide (extra service). To use a location on the map, for example, as a starting point for a nearby search, to pl an a route, view its details, or start navigation (extra serv ice), press the scroll ke y, and select the desired option. To save a location as a land mark, in the desired location, press the scroll key, select Save > As landmark , ente r a name for the landmark, and select the categories you want to include i t in. To take a screen shot of your location, select Save > As imag e . The screen shot is saved in Photos. To send the screen shot, select Option s > Use this pl ace > Send , and the method. You can also send the screen shot in Photos. To view saved landmarks, select Options > Fi nd place > Landmark . To send a landmark to a compatible device, in the landmarks view, press the scroll key, and select Send . If you send the landmark in a text message, the information is converted to plain text. Download maps When you browse a map on the display in Maps, a new map is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by ma ps already downloaded. You can view the amount of transf erred data from the data counter (kB) shown on the display. The counter shows the amount of network traffic wh en you browse map s, create routes, or search for locations online. To prevent the dev ice from automatically downloading maps through the internet, for examp le, when y ou are outside your home cellular network, or other map related data required by the extra services, select Options > Settings > Networ k > Use network > Never . To define how much memory card space you want to use for saving maps or voi ce guidance files, select Op tions > Settings > Networ k > Max. memory card u se (%) . This option is available on ly when a compatib le memory card is inserted. When the memory is full, the oldest map data is deleted. The saved maps data can be deleted using Nokia Map Loader PC software. Nokia Map Loader Nokia Map Loader is PC software that you can use to download and install maps from th e internet to a é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 42
compatible memory card. You can also use it to download voice files for turn-by-turn navigation. To use Nokia Map Loader, you must first install it to a compatible PC. You can download the PC software from Follow the instructions on the screen. You must use the Maps application and browse maps at least once before using No kia Map Loader. Nokia Map Loader uses th e Maps history information t o check the version o f map data to be down loaded. After you h ave installe d the PC software to your PC, to download maps, do the following: 1. Connect your device to th e PC by using a compatible USB data cable. Select Mass storage as the USB connection mode. 2. Open Nokia Map Loader in your PC. Nokia Map Loader checks the version of map data to be downloaded. 3. Select the maps or voice guidance files yo u want, and download and insta ll th em to your d evice. Find a place To view points of interest near your current location or other locations on the map, select Option s > Find place > Nearby and a category. To search for a point of interest by name, select Options > Find place > Keyword search or start entering the first le tters of the name, and select Find . To search for a location by address, select Option s > Find place > By address . You must enter the city and count ry. To use an address you have saved t o a contact card in Contacts, select Options > Find place > By address > Options > Select from contacts . To view a search result on the map, press the scroll key, and select Show on map . To return to the results list, select Back . T o v i e w a l i s t o f y o u r p r e v i o u s l o c a t i o n s , s e l e c t Option s > Find place > Recent . Plan a route To plan a route from one loca tion to anothe r (for exam ple, from your home to your office), do the following: 1. Scroll to a point on t he map, press the scroll key, and select Route from . 2. Scroll to From , and select Option s > Select and the desired option. To adju st the rou ting se ttings, s uch as the mode of transportation, select Options > Setti ngs > Routing . é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 43 th e in te rne t at . www.nokia-asia .com/maps
3. To select the desti n ation, scroll to To , and select Option s > Select and the desired option. 4. To view the route itinerary, select Options > Show route . The route is cal culated using the selected routing settings. To view the it inerary route on the map, select Option s > Show on map . To run a simulation of the route, select Options > Start simulati on . Tip: You can also use a compati ble GPS receiver with Bluetooth conn ectivity with Maps. For ex ample, in a c a r , a n ex t e r n a l G P S re ce i v e r c a n b e p o s i t i o n e d s o that it has a clear view of the sky. Enable the use of an external GPS receiver in positioni ng settings. See "Positioning se ttings" , p. 143 . Extra services for Maps You can purchase a licence an d download differen t kinds of guides, such as city an d travel guides, for d ifferent cities to you r device. You can al so purchase a licence for a turn- by-turn navigation s ervice wi th voice guidance to use it in Maps. A navigation licenc e is region specific (region selecte d when purc hasing t he licenc e), and i t can only be used on the sel ected area. The down loaded guides are automa tically sa ved to yo ur device. The licence you p urchase fo r a guide or navigation is device -specific an d cannot be transferred from your device to another device. Navigation Tip: To try out navigation for three d ays using free licence, in Maps, select Options > Start navigation . Accept the term s and conditions. Maps checks if a free lic ence is available for yo ur device. To activat e the licenc e, select OK . You can only use the lice nce once. To purchase a navigation se rvice with voice guidance to use in Maps, sele ct Options > Extra services > Add navigation . You can pay for the service using a credit card or have the amount charge d to your phone bill (if supported by your cellul ar network service provider). After purchasing t he navigation upg rade, the service is available through Maps. To start navigation to the desired destination with GPS using voice guidance, select any loc ation on the m ap or in a results list, and Options > Find place > Navigate to . When you u se navigat ion for the first time , you are prompted to select the lang uage of the voice guidance and download the vo ice guidance files of the selected language. You can also down load voice guidance files é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 44
using Nokia Map Loader. See "Download maps" , p. 42 . To change t he language l ater, in the Maps ma in view, s elect Option s > Settings > Gene ral > Voice guidance and a language, and download the voice guidance files for the selected language. To discard the created route and use another route, select Option s > Alternative route . To view only th e next turns and hi de the map, select Option s > Map option s > Arrow mode . To stop navigation, select Options > Stop navigation . Guides To purchase and download di fferent kinds of guides, such as city and travel guides, for di fferent citie s to your device, select Options > Extra services > Guides . The guides provid e inform ation about attractions, restaurants, hotels, and othe r points of interest. The guides must be downloaded and purchased before use. To browse a downloaded guide, on the My guides tab in Guides, select a guide and a subcategory (if available). To download a new guide to yo ur device, in Guides, scroll right to the Nearest guides or All gu ides tab, sele ct the desired guide, and press Yes . The purchase process starts automatically. You can pay for th e guides through a credit card or have the amount charged to your phone bill (if supported by your cellul ar network service provider). To confirm the purchase, select OK tw ice. To receive a confirmation of the p urchase through e-mail, en ter your name and e-mail address, and select OK . Music folder Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure t o h igh volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the devi ce near your ear when the loudspeake r is in use, because th e volume may be extremely loud. Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 45
You can also use Music play er to listen to podcast episodes. Podca sting is the method for delivering audio or video content ove r the in ternet using eit her RSS or Atom technologies for playback on m obile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your devi ce. See "Transfer music t o your device" , p. 48 . Play a song o r a podcast ep isode You may have to refresh the music and podcast libraries after you have updated the s ong or p odcast se lection in your device. To add all available items to the library, in the Music play er main view, sel ect Options > Refresh . To play a song or a podcas t episode, do the follow ing: 1. Press , and select Music > Music player . 2. Sele ct Music or Podcasts . 3. Sele ct categorie s to navig a te to the song or podca st episode yo u want to he ar. If the Navi wheel setting is set on in the settin gs, to browse the lists, slide your finger on the rim of th e scroll key . 4. To play the selected file s, press the scroll key. To pause playback, p ress the sc roll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To stop playback, scroll down. To fast forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scroll right. To return to the beginning of the it em, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 seconds after a song or podcast has started. To s witch r andom play ( ) on or off, select Options > Shuffle . To repeat the current item ( ), all items ( ) , o r t o s w i t c h r e p e a t off, select Options > Repeat . If you play podcasts, shuffl e and repeat are automatically switched off. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and stereo image or to enhanc e bass, select Options > Audio settings . To view a visualisation during playba ck, select Option s > Show visualisation . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 46
To return to the standby mode and leave the player playing in the background, press the end key, or to switch to another open applic ation, press and hold . To close the player , select Op tions > Exit . Music menu Press , and select Music > Music pl ayer > Music . The music menu shows the available musi c. Select the desired option in th e music menu to view all songs, sorted songs, or playlists. When the Music player is playing in th e background, to open the Now playin g view, press and hold the multimedia key. Playlists Press , and select Music > Music pl ayer > Music . To view and manage playlists, in the music menu, select Playlists . To view details of the pl aylist, select Options > Playlist details . Create a playlist 1. Sele ct Options > Create playl ist . 2. Enter a name for the playlist, and select OK . 3. To add songs now, select Yes ; or to add the son gs later, select No . 4. If you select Yes , select artists to find the songs you want to include in th e playlist. Press the scr oll key to add items. To show the song list under an arti st title, scroll right. To hide the song list, scroll left. 5. When you have made your selecti ons, select Done . If a compatible memory card is inserted, th e playlist is saved to the mem ory card. To add more songs later, when viewing the playlist, select Options > Add song s . To add songs, albums, artists, genres, and composers to a playlist from the different views of the music menu, select an item and Option s > Add to pl aylist > Saved playlist or Ne w play list . To remove a song from a playlist, select Options > Remove . This d oes not delete th e song from the device; it only removes it from the playlist. To reorder songs in a playlist , scroll to th e song you wan t to move, and selec t Options > Reorder list . To grab songs and drop them to a new position, use the scroll key. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 47
Podcasts Press , and select Music > Music pl ayer > Podcasts . The podcast menu displays th e pod casts available in the device. Podcast episodes have three states: never played , partially played, and completely played. If an episode is partially played, it pl ays from the last playback position the next time it is played. If an episode is never played or completely playe d, it plays from th e beginning. Home network with m usic player You can play content stored in your Nokia device remote ly on compatible device s in a home network. You can also copy file s from your Nokia devi ce to other devices that are connected to the home network. Ho me network must be configured first. See "About home network" , p. 78 . Play a song or a podcast rem otely 1. Press , and select Musi c > Music p layer > Music or Podcasts . 2. Sele ct categorie s to navig a te to the song or podca st episode you want to he ar. Slide your finger a round the rim of the scroll key to browse the lists. 3. Select the desired song or podcast and Opt ions > Play > Via home netw ork . 4. Select the devic e in which the file is played. Copy songs or podcasts wirelessly To copy or transfer media files from your device to another co mpatible de vice in a home ne twork, select a file and Options > Copy t o home netw ork . Content sharing does not have to be switched on in the home network settings. See "Set sharing on and define content" , p. 81 . Transfer music to your device You can tr ansfer music from a co mpatible PC or other compatible devices using a c o mpatible USB data cable or Bluetooth connectivit y. PC requirements for music transfer: â Microsoft Windows XP operating sy stem (or later) â A compatible version of the Windows Media Player application. Yo u can get mo re detailed information about Windows Media Player compatibility from your device's product pages on the Nokia website. â Nokia Nseries PC Suite 2.1 or later Windows Medi a Player 10 may cause playback delays to WMDRM tech nology protected files after they have been transferred to your dev ice. Check Micro soft support website for a hotfix to Windows Media Pl ayer 10 or get a newer compatible version of Windows Media Player. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 48
Transfer music from PC You can use three different met hods to transfer music: â To view your devic e on a PC as a mass memory device where you can transfer any data files, make the connection with a compat ible USB data cable or Blueto oth connectivity . If you are using the USB cable, select Mass stor age as the connection mode. A compatible memory card need s to be inserted in the device. â To synchronise music with Windows Media Play er, connect the compatible US B data cable and select Media tran sfer as the connection mode. A compatible memory card needs to be inserted in th e device. â To use Nokia Music Mana ger in Nokia Nseries PC S uite, connect the compatible USB data cable and select PC Suite as the connection mode. Use Mass storage and Media transfer modes to tr ansfer files to a compatible memory card. To chan ge the defa ult USB connec tion mode, press , and select Tools > Connectivit y > USB > USB connec tion mode . Both Windows Media Player an d Nokia Music Manager in Nokia Nseries PC Suite have been opt imised to tran sfer music files. For information about transferring music with Nokia Music Manager, see the help function on Nokia Nseries PC Suite or visit th e Nokia support pages. Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation func tions may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Medi a Player guides and help . The following instructions are for Windows Media Player 11. Manual sync hronisation With manual synchronisation , you can select the songs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is connected with Windows Media Player, select your devi ce in the navigation pane on the right, if more than one device is connected. 2. In the left navigation pane, browse the music files on your PC which you want t o synchronise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the right. You can see the amount of available memory in your device above the Sync List . 4. To remove songs or albums, select an item in the Sync List , right-click, and select Remov e from list . 5. To start the synchronisation, click Start Sync . Automatic synchronisation 1. To activate the autom atic synchronisation function in Windows Media Player, click the Sync tab, sele ct Nok ia Handset > Set Up Sync... , and check t he Sync this device automatically check box. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 49
2. Select the p laylists yo u want to syn chronis e automatically in the Availabl e playlists pane, and click Add . The selected items are t ransferred to th e Playlists to sync pane. 3. To fin alise the setu p for automatic synchronisatio n, click Fi nish . When the Sync th is device a utomatica lly check box is checked and you connect your device to the PC, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on the playlists you select for syn chronisation in Windows Media Player. If no playlists have been se lected, the whole PC music library is sele cted for synchronisation. If there is not enough free m emory in your dev ice, Windows Media Player selects manual sync hronisation automaticall y. To stop automatic sync hronisation, click the Sync tab, and select Stop Sync to 'Nokia Handset ' . Nokia Music Store In the Nokia Music Store (netwo rk service) yo u can search, browse, and purchase music to download to your dev ice. To purchase music, you firs t need to register for th e service. To check the Nokia Music Store availability in your country, visit music.n okia.com. To access the Nokia Music Stor e, you must have a valid internet acce ss point in th e device. To open Nokia Music Store, press , and select Musi c > Music store . To find more music in d ifferent categories of t he music menu, select Options > Find in Music store . Nokia Music Store settings The availability and appear ance of the music store settings may vary. The settings may also be predefined and not editable . If the settings are not prede fined, you may be asked to sele ct the access poin t to use w hen connecting to the music store. To select the access poin t, select Default acc. pt. . In the music store, y ou may be able to edit the settings by selecting Options > Settings . FM transmitter About the FM transmi tter The availability of this fea ture may vary by country. Some countries may restrict the use of the FM tran smitter. Before using the feature in a foreign country, pl ease chec k from www.nseries.com/fmt ransmitter that use is permitted. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 50
With the FM transmitt er, you can play songs in your device through any compatible FM re ceiver, such as a car radio or a home stereo system. The opera ting distance of the FM transmitter is up to a maximum of 3 metres (10 feet ). The transmission may be subject to interfer ence due to obstructions, such as walls, other electronic devices, or from p ublic radio stations. Higher frequenc ies are likely to give bett er results. The FM transmitter may cau se interference to nearby FM receivers operating on the same frequency. To avoi d interference, always searc h for a free FM frequenc y on the receiver before usin g the FM transmitter. The FM transmitter cannot be us ed at the same time as the FM radio of your device. The operating freque ncy range of the transmitter is from 88.1 MHz to 10 7.9 MHz. When the transmit ter is on and transmitting sound, is displayed in the standby mo de. If the transmitte r is on, but not trans mitting any thing, is displayed and a periodic tone sounds. If the t ransmitter is not transmitting anything for seve ral minutes, it switches off automatically. Play a song using FM transmitter To play a song stored in yo ur device through a co mpatible FM receiver, do the following: 1. Press , and select Mu sic > Music player . 2. Select a song or a playlist to be played. 3. In the Now playin g view, select Options > FM transmitter . 4. To activat e the FM transmitte r, set FM transmitter to On , and enter a frequency that is free from other transmissions. For example, if the frequency 107.8 M Hz i s f r e e i n yo u r a r e a a n d y ou t u n e y o u r FM r e c e i v e r to it, you must also tune the FM transmitter to 1 07.8 MHz. 5. Tune the receivin g device to th e same frequenc y, and select Option s > Exit . To adjust the v olume, use th e vol ume function in the receiving device. Liste n to music at a moderat e level. Continuous exposure to h igh volume may damage your hearing. To deactivate th e FM transmitter, selec t Option s > FM transmitter , and s et FM transmitter to Off . If music is not played for se veral minute s, the transmitter switches off automatically. FM transmitter s ettings Press , and select Music > FM transmitt er . To activate the FM transmitter, sel ect FM transmit ter > On . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 51
To set a frequency manual ly, select Freq uency and enter the desired value. To list the previously use d frequencies, select Options > Last frequencies . Nokia Podcasting With the Nokia Podcasting ap plication (netwo rk service), you can search, discover, subscribe to, and download podcasts over the air, and play, manage, and share audio and video podcasts with your device. Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure t o h igh volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the devi ce near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because t he volume may be extremel y loud. Podcasting s ettings Before usin g Nokia Podc asting, set your conn ection and download settings. The recommended conn ection method is WLAN. Check with your service provider fo r terms and data service fees before using other connecti on s. For example, a fl at rate data plan can allow large data transf ers for one monthly fee. Connection s ettings To edit the c onnect ion settings, press , and se lect Music > Podcasting > Options > Settings > Connection . Define the following: â Default acce ss point â Select the access poin t to define your connection to the int ernet. â Search service URL â De fine the pod cast search service to be u sed in searches. Download settings To edit the do wnlo ad settings, press , and select Music > Podcasting > Options > Settings > Download . Define the following: â Save to â Define the location where you wa nt to save your podc asts. â Update interval â Defi ne how often podcast s are updated. â Next update date â Define the date of the next automatic up date. â Next update time â Define the time of next automatic up date. Automatic updates only occu r if a specific default access point is selected and Nokia Podcasting is running. If Nokia Podcasting is not running, the automatic up dates are no t activated. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 52
â Download limit (%) â D e f i n e t h e s i z e o f t h e m e m o r y that is used for p odcast downloads. â If limi t exceeds â D e f i n e w h a t t o d o i f t h e d o w n l o a d s exceed the download limit. Setting the application to retr i eve podcasts automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provi d erâÂÂs netw ork. Contact your service provider for informat ion about data transmission charges. To restore the def ault settings, selec t Optio ns > Restore default in the settings vie w. Search podcasts Search helps you to find podca sts by keyword or title. The search engine uses the po dcast search service y ou set up in Podcasting > Options > Settings > Connecti on > Searc h service URL . To search for podcasts, press , select Music > Podcasting > Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks fo r podcast titles and keywords in descriptions, not sp ecific episodes. General topic s, such as football or hip -hop, usually give better results than a specific team or artist. To subscribe to mark ed channels and add them to your podcasts, select Subscrib e . You can also add a podcast by selecting one. To start a new search, select Options > New search . To go the website of the podcast, select Options > Open web page (network service). To see the details of a podcast, select Options > Descriptio n . To send selected podcasts to another compatib le device, select Option s > Send . Directories Directorie s help you to find n ew podcast episodes to which to subscribe. To open directories, press , and select Musi c > Podcasting > Directories . Contents of the d irectories chan ge. Select th e desired directory folder to update it (network service). The colour of the fo lder changes, whe n the update is complete. Directories can inclu de top podcasts liste d by popularity or themed folders. To open the desired folder topic, select it and Open . A list of podcasts is displayed. To subscribe to a pod cast, select the title, and Update . After you have sub scribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage, and pl ay them in the podcast s menu. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 53
To add a new direct ory or folder, selec t Options > New > Web directory or Folder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline processor markup lan guage) file, and Done . To edit the selected folder, web link, or web directory, select Options > Edit . To import an .opml fi le st ored o n your device, select Option s > Import OPML file . S elect the location of the file, and import it. To send a di rectory fo lder as a multimedia message or using Bluetooth connectivity, select th e folder and Option s > Send . When you receive a message with an .opml file using Bluetooth c onnectivity, open the file to save the file into the Received folder in directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add to your podcasts. Downloads After you have subscribe d to a podcast, from direct ories, search, or by entering a UR L, you can mana ge, download, and play episodes in Podcasts . To see the podcast s you have subscr ibed to, selec t Podcasting > Podcasts . To see individual episode t itl es (an episode is a particular media file of a podcast), select the podcast title. To start a download, select th e episode tit le. To download or to continue to download selected or marked episodes, select Download . You can download multiple episodes at the same time. To play a portion of a p odcas t during download or after partial downloading, select the podcast and Options > Play preview . Fully downloaded podcasts c an be found in the Podcasts folder, but are not shown unti l the library is refreshed. Play and manage podcasts To display the available episodes from th e selected podcast, in Podcasts , select Open . Under each ep isode, you see the f ile format, the size of the file, and time of the upload. When the po dcast is fully do wnloaded, to play the full episode, select it and Play . To upda te the select ed podcast or marke d podcasts, fo r a new episod e, select Option s > Update . To stop the updating, select Options > Stop update . To add a new podcast by ente ring the URL of the podc ast, select Option s > New podcast . If you do not have an access point defined or if dur ing packet data connection é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 54
you are asked to enter a user name and password, contact your service provider. To edit the UR L of the selected podcast, select Options > Edit . To delete a downloaded podc a s t o r m a r k e d p o d c a s t s f r o m your devi ce, selec t Options > Delete . To send the sele cted podcast or marked pod casts to another compatible device as .opml files as a multimedia message or by Blue tooth connectivity, select Op tions > Send . To update, delete, and send a group of selected podcasts at once, select Options > Mark/Unmark , mark the desired podcasts, and select Options to choose th e desired action. To open the w ebsite of the po dcast (network se rvice), select Options > Open web page . Some podcasts provide the opportunity to interact wi th the creators by comment ing and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, selec t Options > View comments . Radio appl ications Press , select Music > Radio , and Visual Radio or Internet radio . Visual Radio You can use the radio as a traditional FM radio and automatically tune into and save station s. If you tune into stations that offer the Vi sual Radio service (network service), you will see inform ation related to the radio programme on the display. The radio supports Radio Data System (RDS) functionality. Radio stations supporting RDS may display information, such as the name of th e station. If activate d in the settings, RDS also attempts to scan for an al ternative frequenc y for the current ly playing station, if the reception is weak. When you open th e radio for th e first time, a wizard helps you to save loc al radio st ations (network service). If you cannot access the Visual Ra dio service, the operators and radio stations in your area may not support Visual Radio. Listen to the radio The FM radio depends on an antenna other than the wireless device antenna. A compatible headset or enhancement needs to be attach ed to the devic e for the FM radio to function properly. Press , and select Music > Radio > Visual Radio . Note that the quality of th e radio broadcast depends on the coverage of th e radio stat ion in that particular area. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 55
You can make a call or answ er an inco ming c all whi le listening to the radio. The radio is muted when ther e is an active call. To start a station search, select or . To change the frequ ency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . If you have saved radio stations in your de vice, to go to the next or previous saved station, select or . To adjust the v olume, use the v olume key. Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To listen to the radio using the loudspeaker, selec t Option s > Activate loudspe aker . To view available stations based on location, select Option s > Station directory (network service). To save the s tation to whi ch you are c urrently t uned to your station list, select Options > Save station . To open the list of your saved stations, sele ct Options > Stations . To return to the standby mode whil e listening to the FM radio in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and co sts and to subscribe to the service, contact your service provider. To view available visual content wh en listening to a saved station that has a visu al service ID, select Options > Start visual service . Saved stations To open the list of your saved stations, select Options > Stations . To listen to a save d station, select Options > Station > Listen . To view available visual content for a station with Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > Start visual service . To change station details, select Option s > Station > Edit . Visual Radio settings Press , and select Music > Rad io > Visual Radio > Options > Settings . â Alternative frequencies â To automatically searc h for alternative frequencies if th e reception is weak, select Auto scan on . â Auto-st art servic e â To start Visual R adio automatically when you se lect a saved station that offers Visual Radio service, select Yes . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 56
â Access point â Select the acce ss point used for th e data connection. Yo u do not need an access poin t to use the application as an FM radio. â Current region â Select the region where you currentl y are. Th is settin g is displayed only if there is no network c overage whe n you start the application. Nokia Internet Radio With the Nokia Internet Radio application (network service), you can listen t o av ailable radio stations on the internet. To list en to radio stations, you must have a WLAN or packet data access poin t defined in your device. Listening to the station s ma y involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. The recommended connection method is WL AN. Check with your service provider for terms and data service fees before using ot her connection s. For example, a flat rate data plan can allow large data transfers for a set monthly fee. Listen to internet radio stations Press , and select Music > Radio > Internet radio . To listen to a radio station on the internet, do the following: 1. Select a station from your favourites or the sta tion directory, or search st ations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radio service. To ad d a st ation manua lly, s elect Options > Add station manually . You can also brow se for station links with the Web applicat ion. Compatible links are automatical ly opened in the Intern et Radio application. 2. Select Li sten . The Now playing view opens displaying informat ion about the currently play ing sta tion and s ong. To stop the playback, press the scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To adjust the volu me, use the vo lume key. Liste n to music at a moderate level. Conti nuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hol d the device ne ar your ear when th e loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To view station in formation, select Op tions > Sta tion information ( not avai lable if you have sav ed the sta tion manually). If you are listening to a sta tion saved in your favourites, scroll left or right t o listen to the p revious or next saved station. Favourite stations To view and listen t o your favourite station s, press , and select Music > Radio > Internet radio > Favourites . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 57
To add a station manually to fa vourites, select Options > Add station manually . Enter the web address of the station and a name that yo u want to appear in the favourites list. To add the currently playi ng station to favourites, select Option s > Add to Favourit es . To view station information, to move a stati on up or down in the list, or to delete a station from the favourite s, select Option s > Station and the desired option. To view only stations beginn ing with particular letters or numbers, start entering the cha racters. Matching stations are displayed. Search for stations To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by their n ame, do the following : 1. In the application mai n view, select Search . 2. Enter a station name or the first letters of it in the search field, and select Search . Matching stations are displayed. To listen to a station, select it, and Listen . To save a station to your favourites, select it, and Option s > Add to Favourit es . To make another se arch , selec t Options > Search again . Station directory Press , and select Radio > Internet ra dio > Station directory . The station directory is mainta i n ed b y N o k ia . If y o u w a nt to listen to internet radio stations ou tside the directory , add station information manually or browse for stati on links on the intern et with the Web application. Select how you wan t the avail a ble stations to be sorted: â Browse by genre â View the available radio station genres. â Browse by language â View the languages in whic h there are stations bro adcasting. â Browse by country â View the countr ies in which there are stations bro adcasting. â Top stations â V i e w t h e m o s t p o p u l a r s t a t i o n s i n t h e directory. Internet radio settings Press , and select Music > Rad io > Inte rnet radio > Options > Settings . To select the de fault access point t o connect to t he network, select Default access point and f rom the available options. Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for th e access point every time you open th e application. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 58
To change the connect ion spee ds for different connection types, select from the following: â GPRS connection bitrate â for GPRS packet data connections â 3G connec tion bitr ate â for 3G packet data connections â Wi-Fi connecti on bitrat e â for WLAN connections The quality of th e radio broadcast depends on the selected connec tion speed. The higher the speed, th e better the quality. To avoi d buffering, use the highest quality only with h igh speed connections. Camera About the camera Your Nokia N78 has two cameras. The main, high resolution camera (up to 3.2 megapixels), is on the back of the device. T he secondary, lower resolut ion, camera is on the front. You can use both cameras to take still pictures and record videos. Your device supports an image capture re solution of 2048x1536 pixel s. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. The images and video clips are automatica lly saved in the Photos application. See "Photos" , p . 69 . The cameras produce .jpeg images. Video clips are re corded in the MPEG-4 file format with the .mp 4 file extension, or in the 3GPP file format with the .3g p file extensio n (sharing quality). See "Vide o settings" , p. 69 . To free memory for ne w images and v ideo clips, tran sfer files to a compatible PC usin g a compatible USB data cable, for example, and remove the files from your device. The device inf orms you whe n the memory is f ull, and asks whether you want to change the memory in use. You can se nd images and video cl ips in a multimed ia message, as an e-mail attachment, or by using other connection methods, such as B luetooth connectivit y or a wireless LAN conn ection. You can also upload them to a compatible online album. See "Share images and videos online" , p. 76 . Activate the camera To activate the main cam era, press and hold the capture key. To activ ate the main cam era when it is already o pen in the background, press and hold th e capture k ey. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 59
To close the main came ra, select Exit . Keep a safe distance when using th e flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. Image cap ture Still image camera indica tors The still image camera viewfinder di splays the following: 1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Active toolbar. The toolbar is not displayed during image capture. See "Act ive toolbar" , p. 60 . 3 â Battery cha rge level indica tor 4 â Image resolution indicat or 5 â Image counter, which displays the est imated number of images you can captu re using the current image quality setting and memory in use. 6 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators, which show where images are sav ed 7 â GPS signal indicator. See "Location information" , p. 62 . Active too lbar The active toolbar provides you wit h shortcuts to different items and settings before and after capturing an image or recording a video. Scroll to items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. You can also define when the active toolbar is v isible on the display. The settings in t h e activ e toolbar return to the defau lt settings after you close the camera. To view the act ive toolbar before and after capturing an image or recording a video, select Options > Show icons . To view th e active toolbar only when you need it, select Option s > Hide ic ons . To acti vate the ac tive t o o l b a r w h e n i t i s h i d d e n , p r e s s t h e s c r o l l k e y . T h e t o o l b a r is visible for 5 seconds. Before capturing an image or recording a video, in the active to olbar, select from the followi ng: to switch betw een the video mode and the image mode to select the scene to select the flash mode (images only) é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 60
to activate the self-timer (images only). See "You in the pictureâ self-timer" , p. 64 . to activate the sequence mode (images only). See "Take pictures in a sequence" , p. 63 . to select a colour effect to show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only) to adjust white balance to adjust the exposure compensation (images only) to adjust sharpness (images only) to adjust brightness (image s only) to adjust contrast (images only) to adjust light sensitivity (images only) The icons c hange to re fl ect the current setting. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. The available options vary dependi ng on t he capture mode and view you are in. See "After taking a picture" , p. 62 . Se e "After recording a video " , p. 66 . The activ e toolbar in Phot os has different options. See "Active toolbar" , p. 71 . Capt ure im ages When capturing an image, note the fol lowing: â Use both hand s to keep the camera still. â The quality of a digitally zoomed image is lower th an that of a nonzoomed image. â The camera goes into the bat tery saving mode if t here are no keyp resses for a moment. To continue capturing images, press the captur e key. To capture an image, do the following: 1. If the camera is in the video mod e, select the image mode from the active toolbar. 2. To lock the focus on an obje ct, press the capt ure key halfway down (main came ra only, not available in landscape or sport scene. See "Active too lbar" , p. 60 . ). A green locked focus indica tor appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, a red focus indicator appears. Release the capture key, and press it halfway down again. You can also capture an image without locking the focus. 3. To capture an image, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the im age is saved. To zoom in or out when capturing an image, use t he zoom key in yo ur device. To activate the front camera, se lect Options > Use secondary camer a . To capture an image, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 61
To leave the camer a open in the backgro und and use other applications, press . To return to the camera, press and hold the capture key. Location information You can automatically add capture location information to the file details of the image . For example, in the Photos application y ou can then view t he location where an image was captur ed. To activate this feature in Ca mera, select Options > Settings > Record loca tion > Yes . Location i nformation indic ators at the bottom of the display: â â Location information unavailable. GPS stays on in the bac kground for sev era l minutes. If a satellite connection is found and th e indicator changes to within that time, all the images captured during that time are tagged based on the received GPS po sitioning informat ion. â â Location information is available. Location information is added to the image information. See "Still image camera settings" , p. 67 . Images with location information are indicated by in the Photos application. After taking a picture After you tak e a picture, sele ct from the fol lowing opti ons in the active to olbar (avail able only if you select Show captured image > On in the stil l image camera settings): â If you do not wan t to keep the image, select Delete ( ). â To send the image using a multimedia message, e- mail, or other connection meth ods, such as Bl uetooth connectivity, press the call key, or sel ect Send ( ). See "Write and send messages" , p. 104 . This option is not available during a call. You can also send the imag e to th e person you are talking to. Select Send to caller ( ) (only available during a call). â To add the image to an album, select Add to alb um â To view information about the image, select Details â To send the image t o a comp atible online album, select (avai lable on ly if you ha ve set up an account for a compatible online album). See "Share images and videos online" , p. 76 . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 62
To zoom in an image after taking it, press to open the image, and u se the zoom key on the sid e of your device. To use the image as wallpaper in the active standby mode, select Options > Set as wallpa per . To set the image as a call image for a contact, select Option s > Set as contact call img. > Assign to contac t . To return to th e viewfinder to capture a n ew image, press the capture key. Flash The flash is available only in the main camera. Keep a safe distance when using th e flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera of your device ha s an LED flash for low light conditions. The following fl ash modes are av ailable for the still ima ge camera: Automatic ( ), Red-eye ( ), On ( ), and Off ( ). To change the flash mode, in th e ac tive toolbar, select the desired flash mode. Scenes Scenes are o nly available in the main camera. A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the curren t environment. The settings of each scene have been set according to a certain style or environment. The default scene in the image mode is Auto , and in the video mode Automati c (both indicated with ). To change the scene, in the active toolbar, select Scene modes and a scene. To make your own sce ne suitable for a certain environment, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Change . In the user defined scene you can adjust different lighting and col our settings. To copy the settings of anothe r scene, select Based on scene mode and the desired scene. To save the changes a nd return to the scenes list, press Back . To activate your own scene, scroll to User defined , press the scroll key, and select Select . Take picture s in a sequence The sequence mode is availabl e only in the main camera. To set the camera to take six pictu res or the desired number of pic tures in sequen ce (if enough memo ry is available), in the acti ve toolbar, select Sequence mode . To take six pictures, select Burst . To capture the pic tures, press the capt ure key. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 63
To take two or more pi ctures in a sequence, select the desired time interval. To cap ture pictures using th e selected time interval, pre ss the capture key. To stop taking pictu res, select Cancel . The n umber of pictures taken depends on the available memory. After you take the p ictures in the bu rst mode, they are shown in a grid o n the display. To view a picture, press the scroll k ey to open it. If yo u used a time interval, on ly the last take n picture is shown on the display. You can view the ot her pictures in th e Photos app lication. You can also use t he sequence m ode with th e self-timer. To return to the seq u ence mode v iewfinder, p ress the capture ke y. To switch off the sequence mode, in the acti ve toolbar, select Sequence mode > Singl e shot . You in th e pictureâÂÂs elf-timer The self-timer is available only in the main camera. Use the self-ti mer to dela y the capture so that you can include yourself i n the picture. To set the self-timer delay, in the active toolbar, select Self timer > 2 s econds , 10 seco nds , or 20 seconds . To activate the self-timer , select Activ ate . The device beeps when the timer is running and t he quadrangle blinks just before the imag e capture. The camera take s the picture after the selecte d delay elapses. To switch off the self-timer, in the active too l bar, select Self timer > Of f . Tip: In the active to olbar, select Sel f timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Tips on taking good photograp hs Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quality. The camera has several picture quality modes. Use the highest setting to make sure that the came ra produces th e best pictu re quality available. Note howe ver, that better picture quality requires more stor age space. For multimedia message (MMS) and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use the smal lest pic ture quality mode optimised for MMS sending. You ca n define the quality in the camera sett ings. See "Still image came ra settings" , p. 67 . Background Use a simple background. For portrai ts and other pictures with peop le, avoid having yo ur subject in front of a cluttered, complex background that may distract attentio n from the su bject. Mov e the camera, o r the subject, when these con ditions canno t be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer portraits. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 64
Depth When shooting land scapes and scen eries, add dept h to your pictures by placing obje cts in the foreground. If the foreground object is too close to the camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the sou rce, amount, and directio n of light can change photog raphs dramatically. Here are some typical lighti ng c onditi ons: â Light source behind the subject. Avoid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behi nd the subjec t or visible i n the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted light effects. â Sidelit sub ject. Stron g side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too harsh, resulting in too mu ch contrast. â Light source in front of the su bject. Harsh sunlight may cause the subjects t o squint their ey es. The contrast may also be too high. â Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft ligh t available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy day or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Video recording Video capture indicators The video view finder displays t he following: 1 â Capture mode indicator 2 â Video sta bilisat ion on in dicator See "Video settings" , p. 69 . 3 â Audio mute on indicator 4 â Active toolbar. The t ool bar is not displayed during recording. See "Acti ve toolb ar" , p. 60 . 5 â Batte ry charge le vel indicato r 6 â Video quality indicator. The options are High , Normal and Sharing . 7 â The video clip file ty pe 8 â Total available video re cording tim e. When you are recording, the current video length indicator also shows the elapsed time an d time remaining. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 65
9 â The device memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators that show where videos are saved To display all viewfinder indicators, select Options > Show icons . Select Hide i cons to display only the video status indicators, and duri ng the recor ding, the time remaining, zoom bar when zooming, and the selection keys. Record vide os To record a video, do the following: 1. If t he camera is in the imag e mode, select the vi deo mode from th e active toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the capture ke y. The red reco rd ico n ( ) is shown and a tone sounds, indicating that recording has started. 3. To pause recording at any time, press Pause . Select Contin ue to resume recording. Video recording automatically stops if rec ording is set to p ause and there are no keypresses within a minute. To zoom in or out of the subject, use the zoom key in your device . 4. To stop record ing, select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved in the Photos application. The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. To activate the front camera, select Option s > Use secondary camera . To start recordin g a video, press the scroll key. To zoom in or out, scroll up or down. After recording a video After you record a video clip , select fro m the following options in the active toolbar (available only if Show captured video is set to On in the video settin gs): â To immediately play the vide o clip you just recorded, select Play ( ). â If you do not want to keep the video, sel ect Delete ( ). â To send th e video clip using a mu ltimedia message , e- mail, or other connection meth ods, such as Bl uetooth connectivity, press the call key, or sel ect Send ( ). See "Write and send messages" , p. 104 . See "Send d ata using Bluetoot h connectivity" , p. 97 . This option is not available during a call . You may not be able to send video clips saved in the MPEG-4 file forma t in a multimedia message. You can also send the video clip to a person you are talking to. Select Send to caller ( ) (only available during a call). â To add the video clip to an album, select Add to album é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 66
â To view information about the video clip, select Details â To upload the video clip to a compatible online album, select (only available if you have set up an account for a compatible online album). See "Share images and videos online" , p. 76 . â To return to the viewfinder to record a new video clip, press the capture key. Camera settings There are two kinds of settings for the camera: setup settings and main settings. The setup settings return to the defaul t settings after y ou close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To adjust the setup settings, use the options in the active toolbar. See "Setu p settingsâÂÂadjust colour and lighting" , p. 68 . To change the main settings, in the image or video mode, selec t Optio ns > Settings . Still image camera settings To change the main settings, in the image mode, select Option s > Settings and from the following: â Image q uality â Set the resolu tion Print 3M - Larg e (2048x153 6), Print 2M - Medium (1 600x1200), Print 1.3M - Small (1280x960), E-mail 0.8M - Med. (1024x768) , or MMS 0.3M - Small (64 0x480). The better the image q uality, the more me mory the image consumes. These resolutions are only available in the main camera. The number of images left for the memory in use with the ch osen resoluti on is shown on the display. â Add to album â Save the image to a certain album in Photos. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. â Use tag â Add a tag to the current image. See "Tags" , p. 72 . â Record locatio n â To add GPS location coordinates to each image file, select Yes . Receiving GPS signal may take time o r the signal may not be available . See "Location information" , p. 62 . â Show captured image â To see the c aptured image after it is taken, select On . To continue taking pictures immediately, select Off . â Default i mage name â Define the default name for the captured image s â Extended digital zoom (main camera only) â On (contin uous) allows the zoom increment s to be smooth and continuous betw een digital and exte nded digital zoom, On (p aused ) allows the zoom increments to pause at the digital and exte nd ed digital step point, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 67
â Flicker canc ellation â To avoid screen flic kering, select 60 Hz . â Capture tone â Set the tone that sounds when you take a picture . â Memory i n use â Choose wh ere to store your im ages. â Restor e camera settings â To return the default values to the camera settings, select Yes . Setup setting sâÂÂadjust colour and lighting To enable the camera to reproduce colo urs and lighting more accura tely or to add ef fects to you r pictures or videos, scroll through the acti ve toolbar, and select from the following opt ions: â Flash mode ( ) (images mode only) â Sel ect the desired flash mode. â Colour tone ( ) â Select a colour effe ct from the list . â White balance ( ) â Select the current lighting condition from the list. This allows the camera to reproduce colours more accurately. â Exposure comp ensation ( ) (images mode only) â If you are shooting a dark subject against a very light background, such a s snow, adjust the exposure to 1 or 2 to compensate the background brightness. For light subjects against a dark background, use -1 or -2. â Sharpness ( ) (images only) â Adjust th e sharpness of the image. â (images only) â Adjust the brightness of the image â Contrast ( ) (images only) â Adjust the difference between the lightest and darkest parts of the image. â Light sensitivi ty ( ) (images mode only) â Increase the light sens itivity in low light conditions to decrease the risk of images that are too dark. The screen display changes to match any setting s you make s o that you s ee ho w the chang e affects the pictur es or videos. The available settings vary dependin g on the se lected camera. The setup settings are camera-s pecific; if you change the settings in the secondary came ra, the settings in the main camera do not change. Th e setup settings are also shooting-mode specific; if yo u change the se ttings in the image mode, the settings in the video mode do not change. Switc hing between t he modes does n ot reset th e defined setu p settings. The setup set tings return to the d efault settings when you close the ca mera. If you select a new scene, the colour and lighting set tings are replaced by the selected scene. You can chan ge the setup settings after selec ting a scene if needed. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 68 .
Video settings To change the main settings , in the vide o mode, select Option s > Settings and from the following: â Video quality â Set the q uality of the video c lip. Select Sharing , if you want to send th e video clip using a multim edia mes sage. The cl ip is recorded with OCIF resolution, in 3GPP format, and th e size i s limited t o 300 kB (approximately 2 0 seconds). You may not be able to sen d video clips save d in the MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia messa ge. â Video stab ilisation â Select On to reduce the ef fects of the camera shaking when recording a video. â Audio recording â Select Mute if you do no t want t o record sound. â Add to album â to add the re corded video clip to a certain album in Photos. â Show captured video â to vie w the first frame of the recorded video clip after th e recording st ops. To view the entire v ideo clip, se lect Play from the active too lbar (main camera) or Option s > Play (secondary camera). â Default vide o name â Define the defaul t name for captured video c lips. â Memory in use â Select wh ere you want to store your video cl ips. â Restore came ra settings â to restore th e camera settings to de fault values. Photos About Photos Press , select Photos and from the following: â Captu red â to show all the photos and videos you have take n â Months â to show photos and videos categorised by â Albums â to show the default albums and those you have created â Tags â to show tags you have created for each item â Download s â to show items and videos downloaded from the web or r eceived via MMS or email â All â to view all items Files stored on your compatible memory card (if insert ed) are indicated with . To open a file, press the scro ll ke y. Vi deo cl ips op en an d play in RealPlayer. See "RealPlayer " , p. 100 . é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 69 the month the y w ere taken
To copy or move files to another mem ory location, selec t a file, Options > Move and copy , and from the available options. View imag es and video s Press , select Photos, and one of the following: â All â View all photos and videos. â Captur ed â View pictures taken and vide o clips recorded with the camera of your device. â Downloads â V iew downloaded video clips and video clips saved in Video Centre. See "Nokia Video Centr e" , p. 84 . Images and video clips can al so be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through Blue tooth conne ctivity. To be able to view a received image or vide o clip in Photos, you must first save it. The images and video clip files are i n a loop and order ed by d ate and time. The number of files is displayed. To browse the files o ne by one, scroll left or right. To browse files in groups, scroll up or down. Or, if the Navi whee l setting is ac tivated, to brow se the file s, slide your finger on the rim of the scroll key. See "Personalisation settings" , p. 139 . To open a file, press the scroll key. When an image opens, to zoom in the image, press the zoom key on the side of your device. The zooming rat i o is not stored perman ently. To edit a video cl ip or a phot o, select Options > Edit . See "Edit images" , p. 73 . To see where an image mark ed with was captured, select Option s > Show on map . To pri nt your images on a co mpatib le prin ter, or to store them on a compatible memory card (if inserted) for printing, sele ct Option s > Print . See "Image print" , p . 75 . To move images to an album for later printing, sele ct Option s > Add to al bumPrint late r . View and edit file details To view and edit image or video properties, selec t Options > Details and from the following: â Tags â Contains currently used tags. Select Add to add more tags to the current file. See "Tags" , p. 72 . â Descriptio n â To add a free- form description of the file, select the field. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 70
â Loca tion â This field displays the GPS location informat ion, if a vaila ble. To e dit the locati on informat ion, selec t the field . â Title â This field contains a thumbnail image of the f il e a nd t he c ur r en t f il e n am e . To e di t th e n am e , se l ec t the field. â Albums â D i s p l a y s i n w h i c h a l b u m s t h e c u r r e n t f i l e i s located. â Resolution â D i s p l a y s t h e s i z e o f t h e i m a g e i n p i x e l s . â Durat ion â Displays the length of the video. â Usage rights â S e l e c t Vi ew to view the DRM rights of this file. See "Licence s" , p. 102 . Organise images and videos You can organise files in Photos as fo llows: â To view items in the Tags view, add tags to them. See "Tags " , p. 72 . â To view items by months, select Mo nths . â To create an album to store items, select Albums > Options > New album . To add an image or a video clip to an album in Photos, select the it em and Add to album from the active toolbar. See "Albums" , p. 72 . To delete an image or vide o clip, select the image and Delete from the active toolbar. Active toolbar The active toolbar is avai lable only when you have selected an image or a video clip in a view. In the activ e toolbar, scroll up or down to different items, and select them by pressing the scroll key. The available options vary depending on the view you are in and whether you have selected an image or a video clip. To hide the t oolbar, select Options > Hide icons . To activate the act ive toolbar when it is hidd en, press the scroll key. Select fr om the f ollowing: to play the select ed video clip to send the selec ted image or video c l ip to upload the selected image or video clip to a compatible online album (onl y available if you have set up an account for a comp atible online album). See "Share images and videos online", p. 76 . to add the selected item to an album to manage tags and oth e r properties of t he selected item to delete the selected image or video clip é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 71
Albums With albums, you can conven ie ntly manage your ima ges and video clips. To view the albums list in Photos, select Albums in the main view. To create a new album in the albu ms view, select Option s > New album . To add a picture or a video cl ip to an album in Photos, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Add to albu m . A list of albums open s. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip. Th e item you added to the album is still visible in Photos . To remove a file from an al bum, open the album, scroll to the file, an d select Options > Remove from album . Tags Use tags to c ategorize medi a items in Photos. You can create and delete tags in Tag manager. Tag manager shows the tags currently in use and the nu mber of items associated with each tag. To open Tag manager, se lect an image or video clip and select Options > Details > Tag manager . To create a tag, select Options > New tag . To view the list in most frequen tly used order, selec t Option s > Most use d . To view the list in alph abetical order, select Options > Alphabetical . To see the tags y ou have created, select Tags in the Photos main view. The size of the tag name correspon ds to the number of items th e tag is assigne d to. Select a tag to view all the image s associated with the tag. To assign a tag to an image, select an image and select Options > Add tags . To remove an image from a tag, open a tag and select Options > Remove from tag . Slide show To view your images as a sl ide show, select an image and Options > Slid e show . The slide show starts from the selected file. To view only th e selected images as a slide show, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to mark images, and Options > Slid e show > Start to start the slide show. Select fr om the f ollowing: â Pause â to pause the slide show â Continue â to resume the slide show, if paused â End â to close the slide show To browse the images, sc roll left or righ t. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 72
Before starting the slide show, adjust the slide show settings. Select Optio ns > Slide sh ow > Settings , and from the following: â Music â to add sound to the slide show. Select On or Off . â Song â to select a music file from the list â Delay between slides â to adjust the tempo of the slide show â Transition â to make the slide show move smoothly from one slide to anot her, and zoom in and out in the images randoml y To decrea se or increase the volume du ring the slide show, use the vo lume key i n your device . Edit images Image editor To edit the pictures aft er taking th em or the ones alre ady saved in Photos, select Options > Edit . The image editor opens. To open a grid where you can select d i fferent e dit options indicated by small icons, select Options > Apply effect . You can crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightness, colour, contrast , and resolution; and add effects, te xt, clip art, or a f rame to the picture. Crop image To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop , and a predefined aspec t ratio from the list. T o crop the image size manually, se lect Manual . If you select Manual , a cross appears in the upper left corner of the image. Use the scroll key to select the area to crop, and sele ct Set . Another cross appears in the lower right corner. Again select the area to be cropped. To adju st the first selected area, select Ba ck . The selected areas form a rectangle that forms the cropped image. If you select a predefined aspect rat io, select the upper left corner of the area t o be cropped. To resize the highlighted area, use the scroll k ey. To freeze the selected area, press the scroll key. To mo ve the area withi n the picture, use the scroll key. To selec t the area to be cropped, press the scroll key. Reduce red-eye To reduce red-eye in an image, select Option s > Apply effect > Red eye reductio n . Move the cross onto the eye, and press th e scroll key. A loop appears on the disp lay. To resize th e loop to fit the size of the eye, use t he scroll key. To reduce the re dness, press the scroll key. When yo u have fi nished editing the image, press Done . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 73
To save the changes and return to the previous view, press Back . Useful shortcuts You can use the followin g shortcuts when editing images: â To view a full-scre en image, press * . To return to the normal view, press * again. â To rotate an image clock wise or counterclockwise, press 3 or 1 . â To zoom in or out, press 5 or 0 . â To move on a zoomed image, scroll up , down, left, or right. Edit videos Edit videos To edit video clips in Phot os, scroll to a video c l ip, and select Options > Edit and an editing option. The video editor supports .3gp and .mp4 v ideo file formats, and .aac, .amr, .mp3, and .wav audio file formats. It does not necessarily support all features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. Edit video, sound, image, text, and transiti ons To create c ustom video cli ps, mark and select one or more video clips, and select Options > Edit > Video editor . To modify the video, select from the following options: â Edit video clip â to cu t the video clip; insert col our effects on t he clip; use sl ow motion; mute or unmute sound; or move, remove, or duplicat e the video clip â Edit text (shown only if you added text) â to move, remove, or duplicate text; ch ange the colo ur an d style of the text; define how long it stays on the screen; and add effects to the text â Edit image (shown only if you added an image) â to move, remove, or duplicate an image; define how long it stays on the screen; an d set a background or a colo ur effect to the im age â Edit sound clip (shown only if you added a sound clip) â to cut or move the soun d clip, to adjust its lengt h, or to remove or duplicate th e clip â Edit transition (shown only if you added a transition on the time line) â There are th ree types of transitions: at the start of a video, at the en d of a video , and between video clips. â Insert â Select Vid eo clip , Image , Text , Sound clip , or New sound clip . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 74
â Movi e â Preview the movie in full- screen or as a thumbnail, save the m ovie, or cut the movie to a pro per size to send it in a multimedia message. To take a snapshot of a vide o cli p, in the cut vi deo view, select Options > Take snapsh ot . In the thumbnail preview v iew, press the sc roll key, and select Take snapshot . To save your vide o, select Option s > Movie > Save . To define the memory in use, select Optio ns > Setti ngs . In the video edit or settings, you can also def ine the default video name, defa ult snapshot name, and resolution of the video clip. Edit video clips to s end To send a vid eo clip, select Options > Send , a nd the desired method. Contact yo ur network service provide r for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send. To sen d a vid eo clip that is over the maximum multimedia message size allowed by your service provider, you can send the cl ip using Bl uetooth connec tivity. See "Send data using Bluetooth connectivity" , p . 97 . You ca n also transfer your videos to a co mpatible PC usi ng Blu etooth connecti vity, a USB da ta cable, or a compatible memo ry card reader enhancement. You can also cut the video clip to send it in a multi media message. In the video edit or main view, select Options > Movie > Edit for MMS . The du ration a nd size of the vi deo clip is displayed. To edit the size of the clip, scroll left or right. When t he clip is the proper size to send, select Options > Send via MMS . If your video clip is in .mp4 format, you may not be able to send it in a multimedia message. To change the file format of the clip, sc roll to it in Phot os, and select Options > Edit > Video edit or > Optio ns > Settings > Resoluti on > MMS com patible . Return to the video editor main view, sele ct Options > Movie > Save , and enter a name for the c lip. The video clip is saved in .3gpp format and can be se nt in a multime dia messa ge. The fi le form at of the origina l vi deo clip does not change. Print images Image print To print images with Image print, select the image you want to print, and the prin t option in Photos, camera, image editor, or image viewer. Use Image print to print your imag es using a compatible USB data cable, or Bluetooth con nectivity. You can also print images usin g wireless LA N. If a c ompatible memory card is inserted, you can st ore the images to the mem ory card, and print them using a compatible printer. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 75
You can only print images that are in .jpeg format. The pictures take n with the camera are automatically saved in .jpeg format. Printer selection To print images with Image print, sele ct the image and the print option in Photos, camera, image editor, or image viewer. When you use Image p rint for the first time, a list of available compatible printers is displayed. Sel ect a printer. Th e printer i s set as the defaul t printer. To use a printer compatible with PictBridge, connect the compatible data cable before you select th e print option, and check that the data cable mode is set to Image print or As k on connect ion . See "USB" , p. 100 . The printer is automatically di sp layed when you select the print opti on. If the default printer is not avail able, a list of availabl e printers is displayed. To change the defaul t printer, select Options > Settings > Default printer . Print preview After you select th e printer, the selected images are displayed using predefined lay outs. To change th e layout, scroll left or right to bro wse through the available layouts for th e selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, sc roll up or down t o dis play the additional pages. Print settings The available options v ary de pendin g on the c apabilities of the printing device you se lected. To set a default printer, select Op tions > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the l ist, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. Print online With Print online, you can or der prints of images online directly to your home or to a store where you can pick them up. Y ou can als o order different products w ith the selected image, su ch as mugs or mouse pads. The available products depen d on the servic e provider. For more information on the application, see the guides available at the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Share images and videos online You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, weblogs, or in ot her compatible online sharing é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 76
services on the web. You can upload content, save unfinished posts as draf ts and continue later, and view the conte nt of the al bums. The suppo rted content ty pes may vary depending on the service provider. To share im ages and videos online, y ou must have an account with an online imag e sharing service. You can usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. To up load a f ile from P hotos to the onli ne service, press , and select Photos . Select an album, scroll to the desired file, and select Op tions > Send > Post to web , or select the file and from the active toolbar. For more information on th e application and compatible service providers, see the Nokia product support pages or your local Nokia website. Gallery To access your images, video clips, and songs, or store an d organise sound clips and strea ming links, press , and select Appl ication s > Media > Gallery . Main view Press , and select Appl ications > Media > Gallery , and from the following: â Photos â t o v i e w i m a g e s a n d v i d e o s i n P h o t o s . See "About Photos" , p. 69 . â Video clips â to view videos in Video Centre â Songs â to open Music playe r . See "M usic player" , p. 45 . â Sound clips â to listen to sound clips â Streaming links â to view and open streaming links â Presentations â to view pres entations You can browse and open fo lders and copy and move items to folders. You can also create albums and copy and add items to albums. See "Albums" , p. 72 . Files stored on your compatible memory card (if insert ed) are indicated with . To open a file, press the scroll key. Video clips, RAM files, and streaming links open an d play in RealPlayer, and music and sound clips in Music player. See "RealPlayer " , p. 100. See "Music p layer" , p. 45 . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 77
To copy or move files to th e memory card (if inserted) or to device memory, selec t a file and Options > Move and copy > Copy to me mory card and from the available options. Sounds This fo lder cont ains all the sounds you have created with the Recorder applic ation or downloaded from the web. To listen to sound files, press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Gallery > So und cli ps . Scroll to a sound file, and press the scroll k ey. To pause playing, press the scroll key again. To fast forward or rewind, scroll right or left. To download sounds, sele ct the download link. Streaming links To open streaming links, press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Gallery > Streaming links . Select a link, and press the scroll key. To add a new stream ing link, select Opti ons > New link . Presentations With presentations, y ou can view SV G (scalable vector graphics) files, such as ca rtoons and maps. SVG images maintain thei r appearance when printed or viewed with different screen sizes and resolutions. To view SVG files, press , and select Applications > Media > Gallery > Presentations . Scroll to an image, and select Options > Play . To pause playing, selec t Options > Pause . To zoom in, press 5 . To zoom o ut, press 0 . To rotate the image 90 de grees clockwise or counterclockwise, press 1 or 3 , respectively . To rotate the image 45 degrees, press 7 or 9 . To switch between full and normal screen, press * . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 78
Home network About home network Your device is compat ible with UPnP. Using a wireless LAN (WLAN) access point device or a WLAN router, you can create a hom e network and conn ect compat ible UPnP devices that supp ort WLAN to th e network, su ch as your device, a compatible PC, a compatible printer, and a compatible sound system or television, or a sound system or a television equipp ed wi th a compatib le wireless multimedia receiver. To use the W LAN function of your devic e in a home network, you mu st have a working WLAN home connection set up and have other UPnP enabled home devices to connect to the same home network. See "Wireless LAN" , p. 93 . The home net work uses the security settin gs of the WLAN connection. Use the home network feat ure in a WLAN infrastructure network with a WLAN access point device and encryption enabled. You can share and synchronise media files in your mobile device with other comp atible UPnP devices usin g the home network. To manage yo ur home network settings, press , and select Tools > Co nnectivity > Ho me media . You can also use the home network to view, pl ay, copy, or print com patible me dia files from your mobile device. See "View an d share media files" , p. 81 . Your device is connec ted to the home network on ly if you accept a connection reques t from another compatible device, or selec t the option to v iew, play, print, or copy media files on your device or search for ot her devices in the Home netw ork folder. Important security information When you config ure your WLAN home network, enable an encryption method on y our access point device, then on the other devices you in tend to connect to your home network. Refer to the doc umentation of the device s. Keep any passcodes secret and in a safe place separate from the devices. Y o u c a n v i e w o r c h a n g e t h e s e t t i n g s o f t h e W L A N i n t e r n e t access point in your d evice. See "Access points" , p. 147 . If you use th e ad hoc operating mode to create a home network with a compatible device, enable one of the encryption methods in WLAN security mode when you configure the internet access point. See "Connection é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 79
settings" , p. 146 . This step reduces the risk of an unwanted party joining t he ad hoc network. Your device noti fies you if another device attempts to connect t o it and the h ome network. D o not accept connection requ ests from an unknown device. If you use WLA N in a network that does not have encryption, switch off shar ing your files with other devices, or do not share any private media files. See "Settings for home network" , p. 80 . Settings for home network To share media files saved in Photos with other compatible UP nP devices th rough WLAN, you must c reate and configure yo ur WLAN ho me internet access point, then conf igure the sett ings for ho me network in th e Home media application. See "WLAN internet access points" , p. 95 . See "Connection settings" , p. 146 . The options related to home network are not available in applications before the se ttings in the Home media application have been c onfigured. When you acc ess the Home med i a application for the first time, the setu p wizard open s and helps you define the home netw ork setting s for your devic e. To use the set up wizard later, in the Home media m ain view, se lect Option s > Run wizard , and follow the instruct ions on the display. To connec t a compatib le PC to the home network, on the PC, you must install the related software. You get the s o f t w a r e f r o m t h e C D - R O M o r D V D - R O M s u p p l i e d w i t h y o u r device, or you c an download it from the device supp ort pages on the Nokia website. Configure settings To configure the settings for home network, sele ct Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Options > Settings and from the f ollowing: â Home access p oint â S el e ct Alwa ys ask if you want the device to ask for the home access point every time you connect to the home netw ork, Create new to define a new acc ess point th at is used automatically when you use the home netw ork, or None . If your home network does not have WLAN security settings enabled, you get a security warning. You ca n continue and switch the WLAN securi ty on later; or cancel defining the access point an d first switch on the WLAN security. See "Access points" , p. 147 . â Device name â Enter a name for your device that is shown to the other compat ible devices in the home network. â Copy to â S e l e c t t h e m e m o r y w h e r e y o u w a n t t o s a v e copied media files. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 80
Set sharing on and define content Select Tool s > Connectivity > Home media > Share conten t and from the following: â Content sh aring â Allow or deny sharing media files with compatible devices. Do not set cont ent sharing on before you have configured all the othe r settings. If you set content sharing on, the other UPnP compatible devices in the home ne twork can view a nd copy your files yo u have select ed for shar ing in Images & vide o , and use playlists you have selected in Music . If you do not want the other de vices to access your files, set content sharing off. â Images & video â Select media files for sharing with other devices, or view the sh aring status of images and videos. To update the content of the fold er, select Options > Refresh co ntent . â Music â Select playlists for sharing with other devices, or view the sharing statu s and con tent of play lists. To update the cont ent of the folder, select Options > Refresh content . View and share media files To share your media files with othe r UPnP compatible devices in the home network, set cont ent sharing on. See "Set sharing on and define content" , p. 81 . If content sharing i s off in your d evice, yo u can still vie w and copy the media files stored in another home netw ork device if it is allowed by the other device. Show media files stored in your device To show your images, videos , and sound c lips in another home network device, such as a compatible TV, do the following: 1. In Photos, select an image or a v ideo clip; or in Gallery, select a sound clip, and Options > Show via home network . 2. Select a compatible device in wh ich the media file is shown. The images are shown both in the other home network device and your de vice, and the video clips and sound clips are played only in the other device. 3. To stop sharing, select Options > Stop showing . Show media files stored in the other device To show media files that are stored on another ho me network device in your device (or in a com patible TV, for example), do the following: 1. Press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Browse home . Your device starts the search of other compatible devices. Device names start to appear on the display. 2. Select a devi ce from the list. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 81
3. Select the type of media yo u want to vi ew from the other device. The available file types depend on the features of the other device . To search files with di fferent cri teria, select Options > Find . To sort the found files, select Option s > Sort by . 4. Select the media file or fo lder you wan t to view. 5. Press the scroll key, an d select Play or Show , and On devic e or Via home netw ork . 6. Sele ct the devi ce in which you want to sh ow the fil e. T o a d j us t t h e v o l u m e w h e n pl aying a video or sound clip, scroll left or right. To stop sharing the media file, select Back or Sto p (available when playing videos and music). Tip: You can print image s saved in Photos through a home netw ork with a UP nP compat ible printer. See "Image print" , p. 75 . Content sharing does not have to be switched on. Copy media files To copy or transfer media files from your device to another compatible device, such as a UPnP compatible PC, select a file in Photos and Options > Move an d copy > Copy to home network or Move to home net. . C ontent sharing does not ha ve to be switched on. To copy or transfer files fr om the other de vice to your device, select a file in the other device and t he desired copying option from the op tions list. Content sharing does not ha ve to be switched on. Home synchronisation Synchronise media file s You can synchroni se the media fi les in your mobile device with those in your home de vices. Make sure th at your mobile device is within rang e of your home WLAN and the home network has been set up. To set up home synchronisation, sel ect > Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync , and complete the wizard. To run the wizard later, in Home synchronisation main view, select Options > Run wizard . To manually synchronise cont ent in your mobile device with content in y our home devices, select Sync now . Synchronisation settings To change the synchronisation settings, sel ect Options > Synchronisati on settings , and from the following: â Synchronisation â Set automatic or manual synchronisation. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 82
â Source devices â Select the source devices for synchronisation. â Memory in use â View and select the memory used. â Memory m anager â To be informed wh en the devi ce is running out of memory, select Ask when full . Define incoming files To define and manage lists fo r incoming media files, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync > From home > Options > Open . To define the kinds of file s you want to transfer to your device, select them from the list. To edit the transfer se ttings, select Options > Edit and from the following: â List name â Enter a ne w name for the list. â Shrink images â Shrink images to save memory. â Amount â Define the maximum number or total size of the files. â Starting with â Define the download order. â From â D ef i ne t he d at e of t h e o l de s t f i le y o u w a nt t o download. â Until â Define the date of the la test file you want to download. For music files you can also specify the genre, artist, album, and track you want to download, and the source device used for downloading. To browse files in a speci fic category i n your dev ice, select a file type and Options > Show files . To create a predefined or customised list for incoming files, select Options > New list . To change the priority order of the filters in the list, select Options > Chan ge priority . Select the filter you want to select Drop to place it th ere. Define outgoing files To specify which types of files in your device to synchronise with your home media devi ces and how to synchronise them, press , and select Tools > Connectivity > Home media > Home sync > To home > Options > Open . Select the media type, Options , corresponding settings, and from the following: â Target devices â S e l e c t t a r g e t d e v i c e s t o s y n c h r o n i s e with or disable synchronisation. â Keep on phone â Select Yes to keep the m edia content in your device after successful synchronization. With images you can also select whether to keep th e original or a scaled version of it i n é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 83 mov e and Grab , move the filter to the new location, and
your device. Select ing the original size consumes more memory. Nokia Video Centre With Nokia Video Centre (n etwork service), you can download and stream video clips over the air from compatible internet video se rvices using packet data or WLAN. You can also transfer video clips from a compat ible PC to your device and vi ew them in Video Centr e. Using packet data access poin ts to download videos may involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provi d er's network. Contact your service provider for informat ion about data transmission charges. All videos are p layed in th e landscape mode by default. Your device may have predefined services. Service providers may provide free content or charge a fee. Check the prici ng in the service or from the service provider. View and download videos 1. Press , and select Vid eo centre . 2. To connect to a service, scroll left or right, and select the desired video service. The device updates and displays the content available in the service. 3. To view videos by c ategories (if available), scroll down. To search for videos in the service, select Video search . Search may not be available in all services. 4. To view information about a video, select Options > Video details . 5. Some video clips can be st reamed over the air, but others must be first down loaded to your dev ice. To downlo ad a video cl ip, select Opti ons > Download . To stream a video clip or view a downloaded clip, select Option s > Play . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 84
To schedule an automatic download for videos in a service, select Option s > Schedule downloads . Automatic downloads are pe rformed daily during the time you define. Vide os already in My videos are not downlo aded. When the clip is playing, u se the scroll key and the selection ke ys to control the pl ayer. To adjust the volume, press the volume key. Downloads continue in the ba ckground if you exit the application. The download ed videos are saved in Vi deo centre > My videos . To connect to th e internet to browse available services that you can add to Video Cent re, select Add new services . Internet videos Internet videos are video clip s distributed in the internet using RSS-based fee ds. You can add new feeds to Internet videos in the settings. You can view your feeds in the Internet video s folder in Video Cen tre. To add or delete feeds, selec t Options > Feed subscrip tions . To view the vi deos available in a feed, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view information ab out a video , select Options > Video details . To download a video, sc roll to it, and select Options > Download . To play the downloaded video, press the scroll key. Play downloaded videos The downloaded videos are saved in Video centre > My videos . To play a down loaded video, press the scroll ke y. To play a downloaded video in the home network, sele ct Options > Show via ho me network . Home network must be configured first. See "About home network" , p. 79 . When the clip is pla ying, use the scroll key and the selection k eys to control the play er. If there is not enough fre e space in the device memory and compatible memory card, the application automatically deletes some of the oldest vide os when new videos are downloaded. indicates videos that may soon be delet ed. To prevent a video from being automatically deleted ( ), select Optio ns > Protect . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 85
Transfer videos from your PC Transfer your own v ideos to Video Centr e from compatible devices using a compatible USB data cable. To transfer videos from a compatible PC to the memory card in your device, do the following: 1. T o v ie w yo ur dev ic e o n a PC as a ma ss mem or y d ev ic e ( E:\ ) where you c an transfer any data files, make the connection with a compatib le USB data cable. 2. Sele ct Mass storage as the c o nnection mod e. A compatible memory card need s to be inserted in the device . 3. Sele ct the videos you want to copy from your PC. 4. Transfer the videos to E:\My Videos in the memory card. The transferred vide os appear in the My videos folder in Video Centre. Video files in other f olders of your device are not displayed. Video Centre settings In the Video Centre main view, select Options > Settings and from the following: â Video ser vice selecti on â Select the video services you want to appear in Vide o Centre. You can also view the details o f a video service. Some services require a user nam e and a password that you receiv e from the service provider. â Default access points â Sel ect Always ask or User- defined to choose the access p oints used f or the data connecti on. Using packe t data acce ss points to download files may involve the transmissi on of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Con tact your servic e provider for information about data transmission charges. â Parental control â Activate the parental lo ck for video services, if the servic e provider has set age limits for videos. â Preferred memory â Select where the downloaded videos are save d. If the se lected memory becomes full, your device saves the content to a nother memory, if available, or deletes so me of the oldest files automatically. â Thumbnails â Select whe ther to view thumbnail images in video lists. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 86
Web browser With the We b browser, you can view hypertext markup language (HTML) web pages on the internet as origin ally designed. You can also browse web pages that are designed specifically for mobile devices, and use extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or th e wireless markup language (WML). If the web page i s unrea dable or not support ed and garbage code is found whil e browsing, you can try to press , and select Web > Op tions > Setti ngs > Page > Default encoding , and select a corresponding encoding. To browse the web , you need to have an internet access point configured in your device. Browse the web Press , and select Web . Shortcut: To start the browser, press and hold 0 in the standby mode. Important: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate security and pr otection against harmful software. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To bro wse a w eb page , in th e bookmarks view, select a bookmark, or enter the address in th e field ( ), and press the scroll key. Some web pages may contain material, such as graphics and sounds, that requires a large amount of memory to view. If your device runs out of m emory while loading such a page, the graphics on the page are not shown. To browse web pages without graphics, to save memory, select Option s > Settings > Page > Load content > Text only . To enter a new web page address you want to visit, select Options > Go to web address . Tip: To visit a web page saved as a bookmark in the bookmarks view, while browsing, press 1 , and select a bookmark. To ret rieve the l atest conten t of the pa ge from the serve r, select Option s > Navigation opti ons > Re load . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 87
To save the web address of the current page as a bookmark, select Option s > Save as bookmark . To use visual history to view snapsh ots of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, select Back (available if History li st is set on in the browser settings and the current page is not t he first page you visit) . To go to a previo usly vis ited page , select the page. To save a page while browsing, select Optio ns > Tools > Save page . You can save pages and browse them later wh en offline. You can also group these saved pages into folders. To access the pages you have saved, select Options > Bookmarks > Saved pages . To open a sublist of commands or actions for the p age that is open , select Options > Service options (if supported by the web page). To allow o r prevent the aut omatic op ening of mult iple windows, select Optio ns > Windo w > Block pop- ups or Allow po p-ups . Shortcuts while browsing â Press 1 to open your bookmarks. â Press 2 to search for keywords in the current page. â Press 3 to return to th e previous p age. â Press 5 to list all open windows. â Press 8 to show t he page ov erview of the c urrent page. Press 8 again to zoom in and view th e desired section of the page. â Press 9 to enter a new web address. â Press 0 to go to the home page (if defined in settings). â Press * and # to zoom in or out on the page. Tip: To return to the standby mode with the browser open in the background, press twice or the end key. To return to the browser, press and hold , and select the browser from the list. Browser toolbar The browser toolbar he lps you select frequently used functions of the browser. To open the toolbar, press and h old the scroll k ey on an empty spot on a web page. To move within t he toolbar, scroll left or righ t. To select a feature, press the scroll ke y. In the toolbar, select from the following: â Frequently us ed links â View a list of the web addresses you visit frequently. â Page overview â See an overvi ew of the c urrent we b page. â Find â Search for keywords within the current page. â Reload â Refresh th e page. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 88
â Subscribe to web feeds (if available) â View a list of available web feeds on th e current web page, and subscribe to a web feed. Navigate p ages Mini Map and pa ge overview help you navigate web pages that contain a large am ount of information. When Mini Map is set on in the browser settings and you scroll through a large web page, Mini Map opens and shows an overview of the web page you browse. To set Mini Map on, select Options > Settings > General > Mini map > On . To move in Mini Map, scroll left, right, up, or down. When you find the desired l ocation , stop scrolling. Mini Map disappears and leaves you at the selected location. When you are browsing a web page that contains a large amount of information, you can also use Page over view to vie w what kind of information the p age contains. To show th e page over view of the current page, press 8 . To find the desi red spot on the page, scroll u p, down, left, or right. Press 8 again to zoom in and view the desired section of the page. Web feeds and blogs Web feeds are xml files on web pages that are use d by the weblog community and news organisations to share the latest headlines or text, for example, news feeds. Blogs o r weblogs are web diaries. Most of the web feed s use RSS and Atom technologies. It is common to find web feeds on web, blog, and wiki pages. The Web application automatically detects if a web page contains web feeds. To subscribe to a web feed, select Options > Subscribe to web feeds . To view the w eb feeds to which y ou have subscr ibed, in the bookmarks view, select Web f eeds . To update a web feed, select it and Options > Refresh . To define ho w the web fe eds are updated, select Options > Settings > Web feeds . Widgets Your device supports widgets. Widgets are small, downloadable web applications that deliver multimedia, news feeds, and other informat ion, such as weather reports, to your device. Installed widgets appear as separate applications in the Applications folder. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 89
You can download widget s using the Down load! application or from the web. The default access point for wi dgets is the same as in the web browser. When ac tive in the background, some widgets may update information automatically to your device. Using widgets may involve the tra nsmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Content search To search for keywords, phone numbers, or e-mail addresses within the current web page, select Opt ions > Find and the desired option. To go to the prev ious match, scroll up. To go to the next match, scroll down. Tip: To search for keywords within the p age, press 2 . Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringin g tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. These items can be provided free of charge, or you can purc hase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respective applications in your device , for example, a downloaded photo can be saved in Photos. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces, such as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified TM testing. To download an item, do the following: 1. Select the link. 2. Select the appr opriate option to p urchase the item (for example, Bu y ). 3. Carefully read al l the information provided. 4. To continue or cance l the download, select the appropriate option (for example, Accep t or Cancel ). When you start a down load, a list of ongoing a nd completed downloads from th e current browsing session is displayed. To modify the list, select Options > Downlo ads . In the list, scroll to an item, and select Option s to cancel ongoing download s, or open, s ave, or de lete comp leted downloads. Bookmarks The bookmarks view open s when you open the W eb application. You can select web addresses from a list or é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 90
from a collection of bookm a rks in the Recently vi sited pages folder. You can also enter th e URL address o f the web page you wa nt to visit direc tly into the field ( ). indicates the start ing pa ge defined for the default access point. You can save URL addresses as bookmarks while browsing on the internet . You can also save addresses received in messages to your bookmarks and send saved bookmarks. To open the bookmarks vi ew while browsing, press 1, or select Options > Bookma rks . To edit th e details of a book mark, such as the title, sele ct Option s > Bookm ark man ager > Edit . In the bookmarks view, you can also open other browser folders. The Web applicatio n allows you to save web pages during browsing. In the Saved pages folder, you can view the c ontent of the p ages you have saved offlin e. Web also keeps track of the web pages you visit during browsing. In the Re cently vi sited pages folder, you can view the list of visited web pages. In Web feeds , you can view sa ved links to web feed s and blogs to which you have subscribed. Web fee ds are commonly found on major news organisat ion web pages, personal weblogs, online communities th at offer the latest headlines, and article summaries. Web feeds use RSS and Atom te chnologies. Empty the cache The information or services you hav e accessed are stored in the cache memo ry of the dev ice. A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have t ried to access or have acc essed confidential information re qu iring passwords, empty the cache after eac h use. The information or servic es you have accessed ar e stored in the c ache. To empty the cache, sele ct Options > Clear pr ivacy data > Cache . End the connection To end the c onnection and view the browser page offline, select Option s > Tools > Disconnect ; or to end th e connection and close t he browser, select Op tions > Exit . To take the browser to th e background, press the end key once. To end th e connection, press and hold the en d key. To delete the informatio n the network server collects about yo ur visits to va rious web pages, select Op tions > Clear priva cy data > Cookies . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 91
Connection security If the security in dicator ( ) is displayed during a connection, th e data transmission betw een the d evice and the internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indic ate that the d a ta transmission betw een the gatew ay and the content server (or place wh ere the requested resource is stored ) is secure. The service pr ovider secures the data transmission betw een the gatew ay and the content server. Security ce rtificates m ay be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identity of the server is not au thentic or if you do not have th e correct security certificat e in your de vice. For mo re information, contact yo ur service provider. Web settings Press , and select Web . Select Option s > Settings and from the following: General settings â Access point â Chan ge th e defau lt ac cess poi nt. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider; you may not be able to change , create, edit, o r remove th em. â Homepage â Define the home page. â Mini map â Set Mini Map on or off. See "Navigate pages" , p. 89 . â History list â While browsing, to select Back to see a list of the pages you have visited during the current browsing session, set Histor y list on. â Security warnings â Hide or show security notifications. â Java/ECMA script â Enable or disable the use of scripts. Page settings â Load content â Select whethe r you want to load images and other objects wh ile browsing. If you select Text only , to load images or objects later during browsing, select Options > Tools > Load i mages . â Screen size â Select between fu ll screen and th e normal view with the options list. â Default e ncoding â If text characters are not shown correctly, you can select anot her encoding according to language for the current page. â Block pop-up s â Allow or block automatic opening o f different pop-up s while browsing . â Automati c reload â If you want th e web pages to be refreshed automatically while browsing, select On . â Font si ze â Define the font siz e that is used for web pages. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 92
â Recently visited p ages â Enable or disable automatic bookmark collecting. If yo u want to continue saving the addresses of the visited web pages into the Recently visited pages folder, bu t hide the f older from the bookmarks view, sele ct Hide folder . â Form data saving â If you do not want the data you enter to different forms on a web page to be saved and used the next time y ou open the page, select Off . â Cookies â Enable or di sable the receiving and sending of cookies. Web feed settings â Automat ic upda tes â Define whet her you want the web feeds to be updated automatically and how often you want to update them. Se tting the applicat ion to retrieve we b feeds aut omaticall y may involve th e transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. Contact your service provider for information about data transm ission charges. â Acc. point fo r auto-update â Select the d esired access point for updating. This op tion is only available when Automati c updates is on. Connections Your device offers several opt ions to connect t o the internet or to another co mpatible device or PC. Wireless L AN Y o u r d e v i c e s u p p o r t s w i r e l e ss local area network (WLAN). With WLAN, you can connect y our device to the in ternet and compatible device s that have WLAN. About WLAN To use WLAN, it must be available in the location, an d your device must be connected t o the WLAN. Some places, like France, have restrictions on the use of wireless LAN. Check with your local authorities for more information. Features that use WL AN, or that are allowed to run in the background while u sing other features, increa se the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. Your device supports the following WLAN features: â IEEE 802.11b/g standard â Operation a t 2.4 GHz â Wired equivale nt privacy (W EP) with ke ys up to 128 bits, Wi-Fi protec ted access (WPA), and 802.1x é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 93 Privacy settings
encryption methods. Th ese functions can b e used only if they are supp orted by the network. WLAN connection s To use WLAN, you must create an internet access point (IAP) in a wireless LAN. Use the access point for applications t hat need to conn ect to th e internet. See "WLAN internet access points" , p. 95 . Important: Always enable one of the available encryption met hods to incr ease the security of your wireless LAN conne ction. Using en cryption reduce s the risk of unauthorized access to your data. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection u sing a WLAN internet access point. The active WLAN connection ends when you end the data connecti on. You can use WLA N during a voice call or when p acket data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applications can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the offline profile, you can still use WLAN (if available). Rememb er t o comp ly with any applicable safety requirements wh en establishing and using a WLAN connection. Tip: To check th e unique med ia access contro l (MAC) address that identi fies your device, enter *#62209526# in the standby mode. WLAN wizard The WLAN wizard helps you to connect to a W LAN and manage your WLAN connecti ons. The WLAN wizard shows th e status of your WLAN connections in t he active standby mode. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and select it. If the search finds WLANs, for example, WLAN network found is displayed, to create an internet access point (IAP) and start the web browser using this IAP, select the status and Start Web browsing . If you select a secured WLAN network, you are asked to enter the relev ant passcodes. To connect to a h idden network, you must enter the co rrect networ k name (service set identifier, SSID). To create a new access point for a hidden WLAN, select New WLAN . If you are connected to a WLAN, the IAP name is displayed. To start the web browse r using this IAP, select the status and Cont inue Web browsin g . To end the con nection in the WLAN, select the status and Disconne ct WLAN . If WLAN scanning i s off and you are not connected to any WLAN, WLAN s canning off is displayed. To set scanning é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 94
on and search for available WL ANs, select the status and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, select the status and Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanning off, select the status and select WLAN scanning off . To access the WLAN wizard ap plication in the menu, press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. . WLAN internet acce ss points Press , and select Tools > WLAN wiz. Select Op tions and from the following: â Filter WLAN netw orks â Filter out WLANs in the li st of found networks. The select ed networks are filtered out the next time the application se arches for WLANs. â Details â View the details of a network shown in the list. If you select an acti ve conn ection, the connection details are displayed. â Define access point â Create an internet access point (IAP) in a WL AN. â Edit access point â Edit the details of an existing IAP. You can also use connection manag er to create internet access points. See "Active data con nections" , p. 95 . Operating modes There are two operating modes in WLAN: infrastructure and ad hoc. The infrastructure operating mode allows two kinds of communica tion: wi reless device s are connecte d to each other through a WLAN access point device, or wi reless devices are connecte d to a wired LAN through a WLAN access point device. In the ad hoc operating mode, devices can send and receive data directly with each other. Connection manager Active d ata connec tions Press , and select Tools > Connecti vity > Conn . mgr. > Activ e data con nections . In the active data c onnections view, you can see t he open data connections: data calls packet data connec tions WLAN co nnection s Note: The actual time invoiced for c alls by your service provid er may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 95
To end a connection, select Options > Disconne ct . To close all open connections, select Opti ons > Disconnect all . To view the details of a connection, sel ect Options > Details . T he details shown depend on the conn ection type. Available WLAN networks Press , and select Tools > Conn ectivity > Co nn. mgr. > Availa ble WLAN networ ks . The available WLAN view shows a list of WLANs within range, their netw ork mode (inf rastructure or ad hoc), and signal strength indicator. is shown for networks with encryption, a nd i f y o u r d e v i c e h a s a n a c t i v e c o n n e c t i o n in the netw ork. To view the details of a network, select Options > Details . To create an internet acce ss point in a network, select Option s > Define access point . Bluetooth connectivity About Bluetooth conne ctivity You can make a wireless connection to other compatible devices with Blue tooth connectivity. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, computers, and enhanceme nts such as headsets and car ki ts. You can use Bluetooth conne ctivity to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; make a wireless connection to your compatible PC (for exampl e, to transfer files); and connect t o a compatible printer t o print im ages with Image print. Since dev ices with Bl ue tooth wirele ss technology communicate using radio waves, they do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. Howe ver, they must be within 10 metres (33 feet) of each ot her, although the connect ion may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant wi th Bluetooth S pecification 2.0 supporting the following profil es: Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile, Advanced Audio Distribution Profile, Audio/Video Remote Control Profile, Basic Imaging Profile, Basic Printing Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, File Transfer Profile, Hands-Free Profile, Headset Profile, Human Interface D evice Profile, Object Push Profile, SIM Access Profile, Synchronization Profile, S erial Port Profile, and Phonebook Access Profile. To ensure in teroperability between other devices supp orting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhancements for th is model. Check with the manufact urers of other devices to determine their compatibility with this device. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 96
There may be restrictions on usin g Bluetooth technolo gy in some locations. Check wi th your local authorities or service provider. Features using Blu etooth technology, or allowin g such features to run in t he background while using othe r features, increase th e demand on batt ery power an d reduce the battery life. When the de vice is locked, you cannot use Bluetooth connecti vity. Settings Press , and select Tools > Blue tooth . When you open th e application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your dev ice. You can c hange the name la ter on. Select from the following: â Blueto oth â To make a wireless connection to another compatible device, first set Bluetoot h connectivity On , th en establish a connection. To swit ch off Bluetooth conne ctivity, select Off . â My phone' s visibili ty â To allow your device to be found by othe r devices with Blue tooth wirele ss technology, select Sh own to all . To set a time after which the visibility is set from sh own to hidden, select Define period . To hide your device from other devices, select Hidden . â My phone's name â Edit the name shown to other devices with Bluet oot h wireless technology. â Remot e SIM mode â To enable another device, such as a compatible car kit enhanc ement, to us e the SIM card in your device to co nnect t o the network, se lect On . See "Remote SIM mode" , p. 99 . Securi ty tips Press , and select Tools > Bluetooth . When you are not using Blu etooth connectivity, to control who can find your devi ce and connect to it, select Bluetoot h > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with or accept conn ection requests f rom an unknown device. This protects your device from harmful content. Send data using Bluetooth connectivity Several Bluetooth conn ections can be active at a time. For example, if you ar e connecte d to a compatible headset, you can also transfer files to another compatible device at the same time. 1. Open the a pplication where the item you wa nt to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible de vice, open Phot os. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 97
2. Sele ct the item and Option s > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth wireless tec hnology that are within rang e are displayed. Device icons are as follows: computer phone audio or video device other device To interrupt the search, select Stop . 3. Sele ct the devi ce with wh ich you want to connect. 4. If the other device requires pairin g before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair device s" , p. 98 . When the conne ction is established, Sending data is displa yed. Tip: When searching for devi ces, some devices may show only the unique address (device address). To find the unique address of your device, enter *#2820# in the sta ndby mode. Pair devices To pair with compatible devices and view your paired devices, in the main view of Bluetooth connectivity, scroll right. Before pairing, create your own passcode (1 to 16 digits), and agree with th e owner of the othe r device to use the same code. Dev ices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode . The passcode is used only once. 1. To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices that are with in range are displayed. 2. Select the devic e, and enter the pa sscode. Th e same passcode must be entered on t he other devic e as well. 3. Some audio enhancemen ts connect aut omatically to your device after pairing. Otherwise , scroll to the enhancemen t, and select Options > Connect to audio device . Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. To set a device as authorised or unau thorised, scro ll to the device, and select from the following op tions: â Set as au thorised â Connections between your device and the auth orised device can be made without your knowle dge. No se parate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for you r own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC or devices that belong to so meone you trust. indicates authorised devices in th e paired devices view. â Set as unautho rised â Connection requests from this device must be accepted se parately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and sele ct Options > Delete . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 98
If you want to cancel a ll pairings, select Options > Delete all . Receive data using Blueto oth connecti vity When you receive data through Bluet ooth connectivity, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to acc ept the message. If you accept, is displayed, and the item is placed in th e Inbox folder in Messaging. Messages received through Blue tooth connectivity are indicated by . Block devices Press , and select Tools > Blue tooth . To block a device from establishing a Bluetooth connection to your de vice, scroll right to open Paired devices . Select a device you want to block and Options > Block . To unblock a device , scroll right to Blocked devices , select a device, and Option s > Delete . To unb lock all blocked devices, select Options > Delete all . If you reject a pairing requ est from another device, you are asked if you want to block all future co nnection requests from this dev ice. If you accept th e query, the remote device is added to the list of blocked devices. Remote SIM mode Before the remote S IM mode can be activated, the two devices must be paired and th e pairing initiated from the other device. When pairing, use a 16-digi t passcode, and set the other device as authorised. To use the remote S IM mode with a compat ible car kit enhanceme nt, activate Bluetooth conn ectivity, and enable the use of the rem ote SIM mode with your device. Activate the remote SIM mode from the other device. W h e n th e r e m o t e S I M m o d e i s o n i n y o u r d e v i c e , Remote SIM mode is displayed in the standby mode. The connection to the wireless ne twork is turned of f, as indica ted by in the signal strength indicator area, and you cannot use SIM card s ervices or features requir ing cellular network coverage. When the w ireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only use a compa tible connected enhancemen t, such as a car kit, to make or re ceive calls. Yo ur wireless devi ce will not make an y calls while in this mo de, except to the emergency numbers programmed into your device. To make calls from your device, you must leave the remote SIM mode. If the device is locked, enter the lock code to unlock it. To leave the remote SIM mode, press th e power key, and select Exit remote SIM mode . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 99
USB Press , and select Tools > Conn ectivity > USB . To have th e device ask the purpose of t he connection each time a compat ible data cable i s connected, se lect Ask on connec tion > Yes . If Ask on connection is set to off or you w ant to ch ange the mode during an active conne ction, select USB connec tion mode and from the following: â PC Suite â Use Nokia PC applications such as Nokia Nseries PC suite, and Nokia Software Updater. â Mass storage â Transfer data between your device and a c ompatible PC. Us e thi s mod e also for downloading maps with the Nokia Map Loader PC applica tion. â Image transf er â Print images on a compatible printer. â Media transfer â Synchronise music with Windows Media Player. â Multimedia â Synch ronise your images, videos, and messages and their p roperties between your Nokia device and a compatible PC. PC connections You can use your dev ice with a variety of compat ible PC connectiv ity and data communication s applications . With Nokia Nseries PC Suite you can, for example, transfer images between your devi ce and a compatible PC. For information on Appl e Macintosh support and connecting your device to an Apple Macintosh device, visit www.nseries.com/mac. Media folder RealPlayer With RealPlayer, you can play video clips or stream me dia files over th e air without saving t hem to the devic e first. RealPlayer supports files with extensi ons such as . 3gp, .mp4, or .rm. However, RealPlayer do es not necessarily support all file formats or all the va riations of file formats. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 100
Play video clips Press , and select Appl ications > Media > RealPlaye r . To play a saved media file, select Video cl ips , a clip, and Play . To list previously played fi l es, in the application main view, sel ect Recently played . To adjust th e volume, u se the volum e key. After you select a media file, select Options and from the following: â Send â Send a file using a multimedia message, e- mail, or other connection me thods, such as Bluetooth connectivity. â Use video â Assign a video to a contact or set it as a ringing tone. â Mark/ Unmark â Mark items in the list to send or delete multiple item s at the same time. â View details â View details of the selected item, such as format, resolution, a nd duration. â Settings â Edit the settings for video playback and streaming. Stream conten t over the air Many service p roviders require y o u to use an in ternet access point (IAP) for your default a ccess point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. In RealPlayer, you can only open an rtsp :// URL address. However, RealPlayer plays a .ram file if you open an HTTP link to it in a browser. To stream content over t h e air (network service), in RealPlayer or Photos, select a streaming link saved in the Streaming links folder. You can also receive a streaming link in a text message or multimedia message, or open a link on a web p age. Before li ve conte nt begi ns streamin g, your device conn ects to the site and starts loading the content. The conte nt is not saved in your de vice. RealPlayer settings Press , and select Applicati ons > Media > RealPlayer . You may receive RealPlayer se ttings in a special message from the servic e provid er. Fo r more information, contact your service provider. Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Vide o â Select whether video clips are played in full screen or in the normal view, and w hether the clips are automatically repeated af ter they finish playing. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 101
â Streaming â Select wh ether to use a proxy server, change the default access point, and set the port range used when c onnecting. Co ntact your service prov ider for the correct settings. Advanc ed settings To edit the advanced se ttings, in the settin gs view, select Streaming > Network > Options > Advanced settings . To select the ba ndwidth used for a network, select the network setting and the desired value. To edit the bandwidt h yourself, sele ct User def ined . Adobe Flash Player Press , and select Appl ications > Media > Flash Player . Use Adobe Flash Player to vi ew, play, and interact with compatible flash files made for mobile devices. To open a flash file, select it, and Open . Licences To view di gital ri ghts lic ences, p ress , and sele ct Applicati ons > Media > Licences . Digital rights management Content owners m ay use different types of digit al rights management (DRM) tech nologies to protect th eir intellect ual property, inc l udin g copyri ghts. Thi s devic e uses various types of DR M software to access DRM- protected conten t. With this device you can access content pr otected with W MDRM 10, OMA DRM 1 .0, and OMA DRM 2.0. If c ertain DRM software fail s to protect th e content, c ontent owners m ay ask that su ch DRM software's ability to acce ss new DRM-protected conte nt be revoked. Revocation may also prevent rene wal of such DRM-protected content already i n your device. Revocation of such DRM software does n ot affect the use of content protected with other types of DRM or the use of non-DRM- protecte d content. Digital rights management (DRM) protected content comes with an associated acti vation key that defines your rights to use th e content. If your device h as OMA DRM protected content, to back up both the activ ation keys and the content, use the backu p feature of Nokia Nseries PC Su ite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the ac tivation keys which need to be restored with th e content for y ou to be able to c ontinue the use of OMA DRM- protected con tent after the de vice memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the activation keys in case the files on your dev ice get corrupted. If your device has WMDRM pr otected content, both the activation ke ys and the conten t will be lost if the dev ice é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 102
memory is formatted. You may also lose the activation keys and the co ntent in case the files on your device get corrupted. L osing the activation keys or th e content may limit you r ability to use the same c ontent on you r device again. For more informatio n, contact your service provider. Some licences may be c o nnected to a sp ecific SIM card, and the protected content can be accesse d only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. In the main v iew, select from the followin g: â Valid li cences â View licences that are connec ted to media files or whose validity period has not beg un. â Invalid licence s â View licences that are not valid; the time period for using the media file is exceeded or there is a protected med ia file in the device but no connected activation key. â Not in use â View licences that have no media files connected to them in the device. To buy more usage time for a med ia file, sel ect an inv alid licence and Opti ons > Get new licence (web service messages must be enabled). See "Web service message settings" , p. 113 . To view detailed information, such as the validi ty status and ability to send the file, scro ll to an activation key, and press the scroll key. Recorder Press , and select Applicati ons > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can re cord voice memos and telephone con versations. To record a telephone co nversation, op en Recorder during a voice call. Both pa rties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording. Messaging Only devi ces that h ave comp atible features can receive and display multimedia messa ges. The appearance of a message may vary dependin g on the receiving device. Messaging main view Press , and select Messaging (network service). To create a new message, select New message . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 103
Messaging contains the follow ing folders: â Inbox â Received messages, exce pt e-mail and cell broadcast messages, are stored here. â My folders â Organise your messages into folders. Tip: To avoid rewriting messages that you send often, use text s in the Templates folder in My folders . You can also create and save your own templates. â New mailbox â Connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e- ma il messages, or view your previously retrieved e-mail messag es offline. â Draft s â Draft messages that have not been sent are st ored he re. â Sent â The last messages that have been sent, excluding messages sen t using Bluetooth connect ivity, are stored here. You can cha nge the number of messages to save in this folder. â Outbox â Messages waiting to be sent are temporarily stored in t he outbox, for examp le, when your device is outside netw ork coverage. â Reports â You c an request the ne twork to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent (network service). To enter and send service re quests (also kn own as USSD commands), su ch as activatio n commands for net work services, to your serv ice provi der, selec t Op tion s > Service commands in the Me ssaging main view . Cell br oadcast (network service) al lows you t o receive messages on various topics, su ch as weather or traffic conditions, from your service provider. For ava ilable topics and re levant topic numbers, contac t your service provider. In th e Messaging main view, se lect Op tions > Cell br oadcast . Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A pack et data connection may prev ent cell broadcast reception. Write and send messages Press , and select Messaging . Before you can cr eate a multimedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the co rrect connection sett ings in place. See "Define the e- mail settings" , p. 107 . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 104
The wireless network may limi t the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exce eds this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. Check the size limit of e-mail messages with your service provider. If yo u attempt to sen d an e-mail message that exceeds the size limi t of the e-mail server, the message is left in the Outbox folder, and the device attempts to resend it periodically. Sending an e-mail requires a data connection, and con tinuous attempts to resend the e- mail may increase your phone bill. In t he Outbox folder, you can delete such a messa ge or move it to the Drafts folder. 1. Sele ct New message > Message to send a text message or a multimedia message (MMS), Audio messa ge to send a n audio message (a multimedia message that includes one sound clip), or E-mail to send an e-mail. 2. In the To field, press the sc roll key to select recipients or groups from c ontacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs pho ne number or e-mail address. To add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients, press * . You can also co py and paste the number or addre ss from the clipboard. 3. In the Subject field , enter the subject of the e-mail. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Message header fields . 4. In the message field , write the message. To insert a templa te or n ote, sele ct Opti ons > Insert > Insert text > Template or Note . 5. To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Optio ns > Insert , the o bject type or source, and the desired object. To insert a business card, slide, note, or some other file to the message, select Options > Insert > Insert oth er . 6. To capture an image or record video or sound for a multimedia message, select Options > Insert > Insert image > New , Insert video clip > New , or Insert so und clip > New . 7. To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip , Note , or Other for other file types. E-mail attachments are indicated by . 8. To send the message, select Options > Send , or press the call key. Note: Yo ur device may indica te that your message was sent to the message center number programmed é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 105
into your de vice. Yo ur device ma y not indica te whether the message is receiv ed at the inte nded destination. For more details about messagin g services, contact your service provider. Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Longer messages are sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may ch arge a ccordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options, take up more space, limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single messa ge. You may not be a ble to send video cli ps that are saved in the .mp4 f ormat or th at exceed the size li mit of the wireless network in a multimedia message. Tip: You ca n combine images, video, sound, and text to a presentation and send it in a multimedia message. Start to create a multimedia message, and se lect Op tions > Insert > Insert presentation . The option is shown only if MMS creation mode is set t o Guided or Free . See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 110 . Messaging inbox Receive messages Press , and select Messa ging > Inbox . In the Inb ox folder, indicates an u nread text message, an unread multimedia message, an unread audio message, and data received through Bluetooth connectivity. When you receive a message, and 1 new message are shown in the standb y mo de. To open th e message, select Show . To open a message in Inbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To repl y to a received message, select Options > Reply . Multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia messa ge objects ma y conta in malicious software or othe rwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notifi cation that a multimedia message is waiting in the mu ltimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your device, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multi media message ( ), you may see an image and a message. is shown if sound i s included, or if video is included. To play the sound or the video, select the indicator. To see the media objects t hat have been inclu ded in the multimedia message, select Options > Objec ts . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 106
If the message includes a multimedia p resentation, is displayed. To play the presen tation, select the indicator. Data, settings, and web service messag es Your device can receive many kinds of messages that contain data, such as business cards, ringing tones, operator logos, calendar entr ies, and e-mail notifications. You may also receive settings from your service provider or company information mana gement department in a configuration message. To save the data from the message, select Options and the corresponding option. Web service messages are notifications (for exa mple, news headlines) and may contain a text message or a link. For availability and subscrip tion, contact your service provider. Message reader With Message reader you ca n listen to tex t, multimedia , and audio messages and e-mail. To change the message read ing settings in the Sp eech application, select Options > Speech . See "Speec h To listen to new messages or e-mail, in the standby mode, press and hold the left sel e ction key until Message reader starts. To listen to messages from yo ur Inbox or e-mail from your Mailbox, select a message and Options > Listen . To stop the reading, press the end key. To pause and continue the reading, press the scroll key. To skip to the next message, scroll right. To r eplay the current message or e-mail, sc roll left. To skip to the previous message, scroll le ft in the beginning of the message. To adjust the volu me, s croll up or d own. To view the c urrent message or e-mail in text fo rmat without t he sound, select Options > View . Mailbox Define the e-mail settings Tip: To define your mailbox settings, press , and select Messaging > Mail boxes . To use e-mail, you must have a valid intern et access point (IAP) in the device and de fine your e-mail settings correctly. See "Access po ints" , p. 147 . See "E -mail settings" , p. 111 . You must hav e a separate e-mail account. Fol low the instructions given by your remote mailbox and internet service provid er (ISP). é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 107 " , p. 138 .
If you select New mailbox in the Messagi ng main view and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to d o so. To start creating the e-mail settings with the mailbox gu ide, select Start . When you create a ne w mailbo x, the name you give to the mailbox replaces New mailbox in the Messaging main view. You ca n have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox Press , and select Messa ging and a mailbox. When you open the mailbox, the devic e asks if you want to connect to the mailbox ( Connect to mailbox? ). To connect to your mailbo x and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages, select Yes . When you v iew messages onlin e, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a data connection. To view previously retrie ved e-mail messages offline, select No . To create a new e-mail message, select New message > E-mail in the Messaging main view or Options > Cre ate message > E-mail in your mailbox. See "Write and send messages" , p. 104 . Retrieve e-mail me ssages Press , and select Messa ging and a mailbox. If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to the remot e mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail message s may co ntain malicio us software or otherwise be harm ful to your device or PC. 1. When you h ave an open conn ection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retriev e e-mail > New to retrieve all new messages, Selected to retrie ve only the messages that have been marked, or All to retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2. To clos e the conn ection and v iew the e-mai l messages offline, select Options > Disconnect . 3. To open an e-mail message, pr ess the scroll key. If the e-mail message has not be en retrieved and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachment s, open the message, and select the attachment field indicated by . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieved to the device; select Op tions > Retrieve . To retrieve e-mail messages automatically, select Options > E-mail settings > Automatic r etrieval . See "Automatic retrieval settings" , p. 113 . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 108
Setting the device to retrie ve e- mail auto matically m ay involve the transmission of la rge amounts of data through your service provi d er's network. Contact your service provider for informat ion about data transmission charges. Delete e-mail messages Press , and select Messa ging and a mailbox. To delete the con tents of an e- mail message from th e device while still reta ining it in the remote mailbox, select Option s > Delete . In Delete e- mail from: , selec t Phone only . The device mirrors the e-mail headi ngs in the remote mailbox. Although you d elete the message content, th e e-mail heading stays in your device. If you want to rem o ve the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, then make a c o n n e c t i o n f r o m y o u r d e v i c e t o t h e r e m o t e m a i l b o x a g a i n to update the stat us. To delete an e-mail from the device and the remote mailbox, select Opti ons > Delete > Phone and server . To cancel deleting an e -mail from the device and server, scroll to an e-ma il that has been marked to be dele ted during the next connection , and select Options > Restore . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, t o end the data c onnection to the remote mailbox, select Options > Disc onnect . View messages on a SIM card Press , and select Messaging . Before you can view SIM me ssages, you must copy them to a fold er in your dev i ce. 1. In the Messaging ma in view, select Opt ions > SIM messages . 2. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3. Select Options > Copy . A li st of folders opens. 4. To start copying, select a folder and OK . To view the messages, open the folder. Messaging settings The settings may be preconfigu red in your device, or you may receiv e them in a message . To enter settin gs manually, fi ll in all fields mark ed with Must be define d or an asterisk. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 109
Some or all message centre s or access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remov e them. Text message settings Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > Text message . Select from the following: â Message ce ntres â View a list of all text message centres that have been defined. â Message cen tre in use â Select which message centre to use to deliver text messages. â Character encoding â To use character conversion to another encoding system when available, select Reduced support . â Receive report â S elect whether th e network sends delivery reports on your messages (network service). â Message vali dity â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first atte mpt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. â Message se nt as â Contact your service provider to learn if your messag e centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. â Preferred connection â Select the connection to use. â Reply via same centre â Select whe ther you want th e reply message to be sent using the same text message centre numb er (n etwork servic e). Multimedia message s ettings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select fr om the f ollowing: â Image size â Define the size of the image in a multimedia message. â MMS creation mode â If you select Guided , the device informs you if you t ry to send a message that may not be supported by th e recipient. If you select Restri cted , the device pr events you from sending messages that may not be supported. To include content in your messages withou t notifications, select Free . â Access point in use â Selec t which ac cess p oint is used as the preferre d connection. â Multimedia retrieval â Select how you w ant to receive messages. To receive messages automatically in your home cellular netw ork, select Auto in home netw. . Outside your home cell ular network, you receive a not ification th at there is a message to retrieve in the multimedia messa ge centre. Outside your home ce llular network, sendin g and receiving multimedia messa ges may cost you more. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 110
If you select Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic , your devi ce automa tically m akes an acti ve packet data connec tion to retrieve th e message both in and outside your home cellular network. â Allow anonymou s msgs. â Select whet her you want to reject messages from an an onymous sender. â Receive adverts â Defi ne whethe r you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. â Receive reports â Select whether you want the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network servic e). â Deny repo rt sendin g â Select whethe r you want to prevent your device from sending delivery reports of received messages. â Message vali dity â Select for how long the message centre resends your message if the first atte mpt fails (network service). If the message cannot be sent within this time period, t he message is dele ted from the message centre. E-mail se ttings Manage mailboxes Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > E-ma il . To select whi ch mailbox you w ant to use to send e-mail, select Mailbox in use and a mail box . To remove a mailbox and its messages from your device, select Mailboxes , scroll to the desired mailbox, and press C . To create a new mailbox, in Mailboxes , select Options > New mailbox . The name you giv e to the new mailbox replaces New mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Select Mailboxes and a mailbox to ch ange the connection settings, user settings, retrieval settings, and automatic retrieval settings. Connection settin gs Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Connection settings . To edit the settings for th e e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail , and from the following: â User name â Enter your user name given to you by your service provider. â Password â Enter your password. If you leave this field blank, you a re prompted for the passwo rd when you try to con nect to your re mote mailbox. â Incoming mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server that receives your e-mail. â Access point in use â S e l e ct a n i n t e r ne t a c c e s s p o in t (IAP). See "Access points" , p. 147 . â Mailbox name â Enter a name for the mailbox. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 111
â Mailbox type â D efines the e-mail protocol t hat your remote mailbox service pr ov ider recommends. The options are PO P3 and IMAP4 . This setting cannot be changed. â Security â Select the se curity option use d to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. â Por t â Define a port for t he connection. â APOP secure login (for POP3 only) â Use with the POP3 protoco l to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail serv er while conn ecting to th e mailbox. To edit the settings fo r the e-mail you send, select Outgoi ng e-mai l and from the following: â My e-mail address â Enter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. â Outgoing mail server â Enter the IP address or host name of the mail server th at sends your e-mail. You may onl y be able to use the ou tgoing server of your service provider. Co ntact your serv ice provid er for more information. The settings for User name , Passwor d , Access point in use , Security , and Port are similar to the ones in Incoming e-mail . User settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and User settings . Select fr om the f ollowing: â My name â Enter your own name. Your name replaces your e-ma il address in the recip ientâÂÂs device wh en the recipientâÂÂs device su pports this function . â Send message â D e f i n e h o w e - m a i l i s s e n t f r o m y o u r device. Sele ct Immediately for the devi ce to connect to the mail box when you sel ect Send message . If you select During n ext conn. , e-mail is sent wh en the connecti on to the remot e mailbox is avail able. â Send copy to self â Sele ct whether y ou want to send a copy of the e-mail to your own mailbox. â Include signature â Se lect whethe r you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. â New e-mail alerts â Select whether you want to receive th e new e-mail indic ations (a tone, a note, and a mail indicator) when new mail is received. Retrieval settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail > Mailboxes , a mailbox, and Retrieval settings . Select fr om the f ollowing: é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 112
â E-mail retrieval â Define which parts of the e-mail are r etrie ved: Headers only , Size limit (POP3), or Msgs. & attachs. (POP3). â Retrieval amount â Define how many new e-mail messages are retrieved to the mailbox. â IMAP4 fo lder path (for IMAP4 only) â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. â Folder subscriptio ns (for IMAP4 only) â Subscribe to other folders in the remo te mailbox, and retrieve conten t from those fol ders. Automatic retrieval settin gs Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > E-ma il > Mailbox es , a mailbox, and Automat ic retrie val . Select from the following: â E-mail notifications â To automatically re trieve the headings to your device wh en you receive new e-mail in your remote mailbox, select Auto -updat e or Only in home netw. . â E-mail retrieval â To automatically retriev e the headings of new e-mail messages from your remote mailbox at defined times, select Enab led or Only in home netw . . Define when and how often the messages are retrieved. E-mail notifications and E-mail retrieval cannot be active at th e same time. Setting the de vice to retrie ve e-mail automatically may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provid er's network. Con tact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. Web service message settings Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service messa ge . Select wh ether you w ant to receive service messages. If you want to set the device to automatically activate the browser and start a network connection to retrieve content w hen you receive a service message, select Download me ssages > Automati cally . Cell br oadcast se tting s Check the ava ilable topics and relate d topic numbers with your service provider. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast . Select fr om the f ollowing: â Recept ion â S elect whe ther you w ant to re ceive cell broadcast messages. â Language â Select the langua ges in whi ch you wa nt to receive messages: All , Selected , or Other . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 113
â Topic detection â Select whether the device automatically searc hes for new topi c numbers, and saves the ne w numbers withou t a name to th e topic list. Other settings Press , and select Messa ging > Options > Settings > Other . Select from the following: â Save sent mess ages â Select whether you want to save a copy of th e te xt messages, multimedia messages, or e-mail that you send to the Sent folder. â Number of saved msgs. â Define how many sen t messages are saved to the sent folder at a time. When the limit is reach ed, the oldest message is deleted. â Memory in use â Select the memory where you want to save your messages. Make calls Voice calls 1. In the standby mode, enter the phone number, including the area code. To remove a number, press C . For international ca lls, press * twice for the characte r (which replaces the in tern ational access code), and enter the country cod e, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2. To end the call, press th e call key. 3. To end the call (or to cancel t he call attempt), press t he end key. Pressing the end key always ends a call, ev en if another application is active. To make a call from Contacts, press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the search field. Matching contacts are listed. To call, press the call key. If you have saved several numbers for a contact, select the desired number from the list, and press the call key. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 114
Options during a call To adjust the volume du ring a call, use the volume key on the side of your device. You ca n also use the scroll key. If you have set the vo lume to Mu te , select Unmute first. To send an image or a video clip in a multimedi a message to the other parti cipant of th e call, sele ct Options > Se nd MMS (in UMTS netw orks only). You can edit th e message and change the recipient before sending. Press the call key to send th e file to a compatible devic e (network service). To put an active voice call on hold while answering another incoming cal l, select Opti ons > Hold . To switch between the active and th e held call, select Option s > Swap . To send DTMF tone strings (for example, a password), select Options > Send DTMF . Ente r the DTMF string or search for it in Contacts. To enter a wait character (w) or a pause character (p), press * repeatedly. To send the tone, sele ct OK . You c an add DTMF ton es to the p hone number or DTMF fields in a contact c ard. Tip: When you have only one act ive voice call, to put the call on hold, press t he call key. To ac tivate the call, press the call key again. During an activ e call, to ro ute the sound from the handset to the loudspeaker, select Options > Ac tivate loudspeaker . If you have attached a compa tible headset with Blueto oth connectivity, to route the sound to the headset, select Options > Activate handsfree . To switch back to the handset, select Opti ons > Activ ate handset . To end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call, select Options > Re place . If you have several calls active, to end them all, select Options > End all calls . Many of the options that yo u can use during a v oice call are network services. Voice and video mailboxes To call your voice or vide o mailbox (network services, video mailbox available only in the UMTS ne twork), press and hold 1 in the standby mode, and selec t Voice mailbox or Video ma ilbox . To change the phone number of your voice or video mailbox, press , and select Tools > Utilities > Call mailbox , a mailbox, and Option s > Change number . Enter the number (obtaine d from your network service provider), and sele ct OK . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 115
Answer or decline a call To answer the call, press the call key. To mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, select Silence . If you do not wan t to answer a call, press the end key. If you act ivate th e Call divert > Voice calls > If busy function in phone settings to divert ca lls, declining an incoming call also diverts th e call. When you select Silence to mute the ringing tone of an incoming call, you can send a text message without rejecting the call, informin g the caller that you cannot answer the call. Se lect Options > Send message . To set up this option and write a standard text message, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Ca ll > Reject call with message . Make a conference call 1. Make a call to the first participan t. 2. To make a cal l to anot her participan t, sele ct Option s > New c all . The first call is automat ically p u t on hold. 3. When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conference call, select Option s > Conferen ce . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Option s > Confer ence > Add to conference . Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six participants, including yoursel f. To have a privat e conversation wit h one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Se lect a particip ant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still cont inue the conference c all. After you finish the priv ate con versation, select Optio ns > Conference to re turn to the conf erence call. To drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the part icipant, and select Drop . 4. To end the active conference call, p ress the end k ey. Speed dial a phone number To activate the feature, pre ss , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling . To assign a phone number to one of the number ke ys (2-9), press , and select Tools > Utilities > Speed dial . Scroll to the key t o which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . 1 is é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 116
reserved for the voice or vi deo mailbox, and for starting the web browser. To call in the standby mode, press the assigned key and the call key. Call waiting You can answer a call w hile you have another call in progress if you have a ctivated call waiti ng in Settings > Phone > Call > Call waiting (network service). To answer the waiting call, press t he call key. The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two ca lls, select Swap . To connec t an incoming call or a ca ll on hold with an active call and to disconnect yoursel f from the ca lls, select Options > Transfer . To end the active call, press the end key. To end both calls, select Option s > End all calls . Voice dialling Your device supports e nhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are no t dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user does not record vo ice tags in advance. Inste ad, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in con tacts, and compare s the spoken vo ice tag to it. The voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to r ecognise the voice comm ands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesised voice ta g, open a co ntact card, a nd select Op tions > Play voice tag . Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficu lt in a noisy environment or during an e mergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice di aling in all circumstances. When you u se voice dialling , the loudspeaker is in use . Hold the device at a short distance away when you say the voice tag. 1. To start voice dialling, i n the standby mode, pr ess and hold the right sele ction ke y. If a co mpatible headset with the headset key is at tached, press and hold t he headset key to start voice dialling. 2. A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card . 3. The device plays a synthe sised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name an d number. After a time-out of 2.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised c ontact was not co rrect, select Next to view a list of othe r matches or Quit to cancel voice dialling. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 117
If several numbers are sa ved under the n ame, the device selects the default number if it has been set. If not, the device select s the first availa ble number in a contact card. Make a video call When you make a video call (network service), you can see a real-time, two-wa y video between you and the recipient of the call. The live vid eo image, or video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video cal l recipien t. To be able to make a video call, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to vide o call services, contact your network service p rovider. A video call can only be mad e between two parties. The video call can be made to a c o mpatible mobile dev ice or an ISDN client. Video calls ca nnot be made while another voice, video, or data c all is active. Icons You are not receiving vi deo (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmittin g it). You have deni ed video sending from your device. To send a still image in stead, select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Image in video call . Even if you denied video send ing during a video call, the call is still charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your service provider. 1. To start a video call, ente r the phone number in the standby mode, or select Cont acts and a contact. 2. Select Options > Call > Video call . The secondary camera on the front is used by default for video calls. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for video image is shown. If the cal l is not successful (for example, vi deo calls are not supported by the network, or the receiving device is not compatible), you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a text or multimedia message instead. The vide o call is ac tive when you see two vi deo images, and hear the sound through the l oudspeaker. The call recip ient may deny v ideo sending ( ), in which c ase you only hear th e sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. 3. To end the vid eo call, press the end key. Options during a video call To change between showing video or hearin g only sound, select Option s > Enable , or Disable and the desired option. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 118
To use the main camera to send video, select Options > Use main camera . To switch back to the secondary camera, select Options > Use secondary ca mera . To take a snapshot of the video you are sending, selec t Option s > Send snapshot . Video sending is paused and the snapshot is shown to the recipi ent. The snapshot is not saved. Press Cancel to resume sending video. To zoom your image in or out, select Options > Zoom . To route the audio to a compatible headset with Bluetooth c onnectivity attached to your device, sele ct Option s > Activate handsfree . To route the audio back to the loudspeake r of your device, select Options > Activate handset . To chan ge the vide o quality, select Options > Video pref erence . Normal quality is framerate 10 fps. Use Clearer detail is lower framerate for small, static details. Use Smoo ther motion for moving image that requires a higher framerate. To adjust the volume during a video call, use the volume key on the side of the device. Answer or decline a video call When a video call arrives, is display ed. To answer the video c all, press the call key. All ow video image to be sent to ca ller? is displayed. To start sending live vi deo imag e, select Yes . If you do not ac tivate the video c all, video sending is not activated, and you only hear the sound of the caller. A grey screen replaces t he video image. To rep lace the grey screen with a still image captured by th e camera in you r device, select Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call > Image in video call . To end th e video call, press the end key. Video sharing Use video sharing (network serv ice) to send live video or a video clip from your mo bile device to another compatible mobile dev ice during a voice call. The loudspeaker is ac tive when you activate Video sharin g. If you d o not want to use the loudspe aker for the voice call wh ile you share video, y ou can also use a compatib le headset. Requirements Video sharing requires a UMTS conn ection. Your abilit y to use video sharing de pends on the av aila bility o f the UMTS network. Contact your service provi der for more é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 119
information on the service an d network av ailability and fees associated with using this service. To use video sharing you must do the following: â Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. â Ensure you have an active UMTS conn ec tion and are within UMTS network coverage. If you start th e sharing session while you are within UMTS network covera ge and a hand over to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. You cannot start video sharing if y ou are not wi thin UMTS network coverage. â Ensure that bot h the sender and recipien t are registered to the UMTS n etwork. If you inv ite someone to a sharing session and the recipientâÂÂs device is not within UMTS network cov erage, does not ha ve video sharin g instal led, or p erson - to-person connections set up, the recipient does not know that you are sending an invitation. You receiv e an error message that indicates that the recipient cannot accept the invitati on. Settings To set up video sharing, you need person-to-person and UMTS connection settings. Person-to-person connection setti n gs A person-to-person connection is a lso known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connection. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you ca n use video sharing. Ask your service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save them in your device. Your service provider may send yo u the settings over th e air or give you a list of the need ed paramete rs. To add a SIP address to a contact card, do the f ollowing: 1. Press , and select Con tacts . 2. Open the c ontact card (or sta rt a new card for that person). 3. Select Options > Add detail > Share video . 4. Enter the SIP address in the format username@domainname (yo u can use an IP address instead of a domain name). I f y o u d o n o t k n o w t h e S I P address for the contact, you can use t he phone number of the recipient, includ ing the country code, to share video (if supported by the network service provider ). UMTS connect ion settings To set up your UMTS conne ction, do the foll owing: â Contact your servic e provider to establish an agreemen t for you to use the UMTS net work. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 120
â Ensure that y our device UMTS access p oint connection settings are configured p roperly. Share live video or video clips During an active voice call, select Options > Share video : 1. To share live video du ring the call, select Live video . To share a video clip, select Recorded clip . Select a clip you want t o share. You may ne ed to conver t the video clip int o a suitable format to be able to share it. Clip must be conver ted for sharin g. Continue? appears. Select OK . 2. To share the vi deo, select Option s > Invite . If you share live video, your device sends t he invitation to the SIP address you have added to the recipient's contact c ard. If the con tact inform ation of th e recipient is saved in Contacts, and the contac t has several SIP addresses or ph one numbers in cluding the country co de, select the de sired address or number. If the SIP address o r phone number of the recipient is not available, en ter the SIP address or the phone number of the recipien t including the coun try code, and select OK to send th e invitation . Sharing begins automatically when the recipi ent accepts th e invita tion. Options during video sharing to zoom the vi deo (available for se nder only) to adj ust the brightne ss (avail able for sende r only ) or to mute or unmute the microphone or to switch the lo udspeaker on and off to switch to full screen mode (available for receiver only) 3. To end the sharin g session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press t he end key. When you end the call, video sharing also ends. To save the live video you shared, selec t Save when prompted. The shared vide o is saved in Photos. If you access other applicatio ns while you are sharing a video clip, the sharin g is paused. To retu rn to the v i deo sharing view and to continue sharing, in the active standby mode, select Options > Contin ue . Accept an invi tation When someone sends you a video sharing invitation, the invitation message displays the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is no t set to silent, it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you wil l not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an inv itation, select fr om the follo win g: é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 121
â Accept â Activates the sharing session. â Reject â D eclines the invitati on. The sender receives a message that you rejected the invitat ion. You can also press the end key to de clin e the sharing session and disconnect the voice ca ll. When you receive a video clip , to mute the sound of the clip, sele ct Mute . To end video sharing, select Stop . Video sharing also ends if the acti ve voice cal l ends. Log The log stores information about the communication history of the device. T he device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports t hese functions, the device is switched on, and within the network se rvice area. Recent calls Press , and select Tools > Lo g . To monitor the phone n umbers of missed, receiv ed, and dialled voice calls, select Recent cal ls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these fun ctions, the device is swit ched on, and within the netw ork service area. To clear all recent call lists, select Option s > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main vie w. To clear one of the call registers, open the register yo u want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the ev ent, and press C . Call duration Press , and select Tools > Log . To monitor the approximate duration of your inc oming and outgoing calls, select Call duration . Note: The actual time invoiced for c alls by your service provid er may vary , depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Option s > Cl ear timers . For this you need the loc k code. Packet data Press , and select Tools > Log . To check the am ount of data sent and received during packet da ta connect ions, select Packet data . F o r example, you may be charged fo r your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 122
Monitor all communicatio n events Press , and select Tools > Lo g > Recent ca lls . Icons in the log are as follows: Incoming Outgoing Missed commun ication events To open the general log wher e you can monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data and WLAN connections registered by the d e vice, scro ll right. Subevents, such as a text message sent in more than one part and packet data connection s, are logged as one commun ication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or web pages are shown as packet data connecti ons. To add an unknown phone numbe r from the log to your contacts, se lect Option s > Save to Contact s . To filter the log, select Option s > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery report s permanently, select Options > Clear log . Select Yes to c o n f i r m . T o r e m o v e a single event from one of t h e recent calls logs, press C . To set the l og duration, select Optio ns > Settings > Log duration . If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls register, and me ssaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. Tip: In the details view, you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it into a text message, for example. Select Options > Copy number . To view from the packet data counter how much dat a is transferred and how long a certain packet data connection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indica ted by Pack. , and select Options > View details . Contacts (phonebook) In Contacts, you can save and update contact information, such as phone numbers, home addresses, or e-mail addresses of your contacts. You can add a personal ringing tone or a th umbnail image to a contact card. You can also creat e contact group s, which allow you to sen d text messages or e-mail to many recipients at the same time. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 123
Save and edit name s and numbers 1. Press , and select Conta cts > Options > New contact . 2. Fill in the fields that you wa nt, and select Done . To edit co ntact cards, sc roll to a cont act, and select Option s > Edit . You can also search for the desired contact by en tering the first letters of t he name to th e search field. To attach a small thumbnail image to a contact card, open the contact card, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls. Manage names and numbers To add a contact to a group, select Options > Add to group (shown only if you have created a group). To check to which groups a contact belongs, sele ct the contact and Options > Belongs to groups . To delete a c ontact card, sele ct a card, and press C . To delete several cont act ca rds at the same time, select Option s > Mark/Un mark to mark the desired contact cards, and press C to del ete. To send contact informa tion, select the card yo u want to send, Option s > Send , and the desired option. To listen to the voice tag assigned to the contact, se lect a contact card and Op tions > Play voice tag . Default numbers and addresses Press , and select Contacts . You can assign de fault numbers or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to the contact to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1. In the contacts list, select a contact. 2. Select Options > Defaults . 3. Select a defau lt to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4. Select a number or an address you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Add ringing tones for contacts Press , and select Contacts . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 124
To define a ringing t one for a contact or a contact group , do the following: 1. Press the scroll key to open a con tact card or go to th e groups list, and select a contact group. 2. Sele ct Opti ons > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3. Sele ct the ringing t one you want to use for the individual contact or the members of the se lected group. When a contact or group member calls you, the device plays the c hosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with th e call and your devic e recognises it). To remove the ringing tone, select Default to ne from the list of ringing tones. Copy contacts When you op en Contacts for the first time, you can choose to c opy SIM con tacts to the dev ice memory or to view SIM cont acts in the contacts dire ctory. The device asks you if you want to copy names and numbers from a SIM card to your device. To start copying, press OK . Press Cancel if you do not want to copy the SIM cont acts to the de vice memory. The device asks you if you want to view the S IM contacts in th e contacts di rectory. Press OK , Contacts opens and you can see names st ored on your SIM card marked with . SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and info rmation on using SIM card services, contact you r SIM card vend or. This may b e the service provid er or other vendor. To see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card, select Option s > My number s . In the SIM d irectory you can add and edit contacts, and you can m ake calls. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Options > SIM numbers . This setting is only shown if supported by your SIM card. To restrict ca lls from you r device to selected phone numbers, select Options > Fixed dial contacts . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deactivate fixed dialling or edit y our fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider if you do no t have the code. To add new numbers to the f ixed di alling list, select Options > Ne w SIM contact . When you use fixe d dialling, packet data conn ections are not possible, except when se nding text messages over a packet da ta connectio n. In this case, th e message centre é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 125
number and the recipientâÂÂs phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list. When fixed dialling is activa ted, calls may be possible to the official emergency number progr a mmed in to your device. Manage contac t groups Create co ntact groups 1. In Contacts, scroll right to open the groups list. 2. Sele ct Options > New gr oup . 3. Write a name for the group or use the default name, and select OK . 4. Select the group and Options > Add members . 5. Scroll to a contact, and press the scrol l ke y to ma rk it . To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6. To add the c o ntacts to the group, select OK . T o r e n a m e a g r o u p , s e l e c t Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1. In the groups list, select th e group you want to modify. 2. Scroll to the contact, and select Opti ons > Remo ve from group . 3. To remove the con tact from the group, select Yes . Time management Clock Alarm clock Press , and select Appl icatio ns > Clock . To set a new quick alarm, select Options > New quick alarm . Quick alarms are set for the next 24 hours an d they cannot be repeated. To view your active and inacti ve alarms, scroll right to the alarm tab. To set a new alarm, select Options > New alarm . Define th e repetition, if needed. When an alarm is active, is shown. To turn off the sounding alarm, select Stop . To stop the alarm for a certain time period, select Snooze . If y our device is switched off when an alarm is due, your device switches itself on and star ts sounding the alarm tone. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 126
Tip: T o d e f i n e t h e t i m e p e r i o d a f t e r w h i c h t h e c l o c k alarm sounds again when you set it to snooze, select Options > Settings > Alarm snooze time . To cancel an alarm, select Options > Remove alarm . To change the time , date, and cloc k type set tings, select Option s > Settings . To allow the mobile phone network to update the time, date, and time zon e information to your device (network service), i n the settings, select Automatic time update > On . World clock Press , and select Appl ications > Clock . To open th e world clock v iew , scroll right to the world clock ta b. In the w orld clock vi ew, you can view the tim e in different cities. To add cities to the list, select Option s > Add city . You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your cu rrent city, scr oll to a city, and select Option s > Set as current city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your device is changed acco rding to the cit y selected. Ensu re that the time is correct and matches y o ur time zone. Calendar Create a calendar entry Press , and select Applicati ons > Calend ar . 1. To add a new cale ndar entry, scroll to the desired date, and select Option s > New entry and one of the following: â Meeting â t o r e m i n d y o u of an appointment that has a specific date and time â Meeting request â to create and send a new meeting request. You must have a mailbox set up for sending requests. See "Manage mailboxes" , p. 11 1 . â Memo â to write a general entry for a day â Annivers ary â to remind you of birthdays or special dates (entries are repeat ed annually) â To-do â to remind you of a task that must be done by a specific date 2. Fill in the fields. To set an alarm, select Alarm > On , and enter the alarm time and date. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 127
To add a description for an entry, select Option s > Add description . 3. To save the entry, select Done . Tip: In the day, week , or month calendar view, press any key ( 1 -0 ). An appointment en try opens, and the characters you enter are added to the subject field. In the to-do view, a to-do note en try opens. When the calendar alarm sounds for a note, select Silence to turn off the cale ndar alarm tone. Th e reminder text stays on the screen. To st op the ca lendar alarm, select Stop . To set the alarm to snooze, select Snooze . Tip: To defi ne the time peri od after which the calendar alarm sounds again w hen you set it to snooze, press , and select Appl ications > Calendar > Op tions > Settings > Alarm snooze t ime . Calendar views To change the start ing day of the wee k or the view that is shown when you open the calend ar, select Options > Settings . In the settings, you can also modify the calend ar alarm tone, alarm snooze ti me, and the title for the week view. To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date . To jump to today, press # . To switch between th e month view, week vi ew, day view, and to-do view, press * . To send a c alendar note to a compatible device, s elect Options > Send . If the other device is not compati ble with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), the ti me informatio n of received calendar entries may not be displayed correctly. Manage calendar entri es To delete several eve nts at a time, go to the month view , and select Options > De lete e ntry > Before date or All entries . To mark a task as completed, scroll to it in the to-do view, and select Options > Mark as done . You can synchronise your cal e ndar with a compatible PC using Nokia Nseries PC Suite. When creating a calendar entry, set the desired synchronisation option. Lunar calendar To use the Lunar calen dar function, the device language must be Chinese. To view det ailed Lunar cale ndar information of the currently high lighted date: 1. In calendar views, select Options > Settings > Lunar calendar , and set Lunar calendar item as on. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 128
2. When you go back to the calen dar views, Lu nar information is displayed in the navigation pane. To view more detailed Luna r information in a pop-up window, select Options > View lunar data . This option is displayed only when the Luna r cale ndar setting item is on. Office folder Quickoffice With the Quic koffice applications, you can view .doc, .xls, .ppt, .pps, and .txt docu ments and download software. Not all file formats or feature s are supported. Apple Macintosh is not sup ported. To view a file, press , and select Appl ications > Office > Quickoffice . Select the location from which you want to view files, browse to the desired folder, and select a file. The file s open in the respe c tive applications depending on the file format. To download software u sin g Quickmanager, in the main view, sel ect Quick manage r ; or, when browsing files, scroll to the Quickmanager tab. If you experience problems with t h e Quicko ffice applications, visit www.quickoffice.com, or send e-mail to supportS60@quick office.com. Quickword With Quick word, you can v iew native Microsoft Word documents wi th your device. Quickword supports the view ing of documents saved in .doc and .txt for mats created with Microsoft Word 97, 2000, XP, and 2003. Not all variations or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickword that supports editing, when you have a file open, select Options > Updates and upgrades . The upg rade is chargeable. Quicksheet With Quic ksheet, y ou can view nat ive Microsof t Excel files with your device. Quicksheet su pports the vi ewing of spreadsheet files saved in .xls format crea ted with Microso ft Excel 97, 2000, XP, or 2003. Not all variations or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 129
To upgrade to a version of Quick sheet that supports editing, when you have a fi le open, select Options > Updates and upgrades . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickpoint With Qui ckpoint , you can v iew native Microsoft PowerPoint presentations with your device. Quickpoin t supports the v iewing of presen tations saved in .ppt and .pps formats created with Microsoft PowerPoint 20 00, XP, and 20 03. Not all variation s or features of the mentioned file formats are supported. To upgrade to a version of Quickpoint that supports editing, when you have a fi le open, select Options > Updates and upgrades . The upgrade is chargeable. Quickmanager With Quickmanager, you can download software, including updates, u pgrades, and other u seful applications. You can pay for the downloads by phone bill or credit card. Notes Press , and select Appl ications > Offic e > Notes . To write a note, start entering the text. The note e ditor opens automatically . To open a note, scroll to it, and select Op en . To send a no te to other compatible devices, sel ect Options > Send . To delete a note, press C . Tip: To dele te severa l notes, select Options > Mark/Unmark to mark the notes, and press C . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Options > Synchronisati on . Select Start to start synchr onisation o r Settings to define the synchronisation sett ings for th e note. Adobe PDF reader Press , and select Applicati ons > Office > Adobe PDF . With the PDF reader you can read PDF docume nts on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, such as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Converter Press , and select Applicati ons > Office > Converter . With Convert e r, you ca n conv ert measures from one unit to anothe r. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 130
The convert er has limite d ac curacy, and rounding errors may occur. 1. In the Type field, select th e measure you w ant to use. 2. In first Unit field, select the unit from which you want to conve rt. 3. In th e next Unit field, se lect the unit to which you want to conve rt. 4. In th e first Amount field, ente r the value you want to convert. The other Amount field change s automatically to show the co nverted value. Convert currenc y Select Type > Cu rrency . Before you ca n make currency conversions, you must sele ct a base cu rrency and add exchange rates. The default base currency is Home . The rate of the base cu rrency is always 1. 1. Sele ct Options > Currency rates . 2. The default name for the curren cy items is Foreign . To rename a currency, select Optio ns > Rename currency . 3. Add the exchange rates for the currencies, and press Done . 4. In th e second Unit f ield, select the currency to whic h you want to convert. 5. In the first Amount field, e nter the value you want to convert. The ot her Amount field changes automatically to show th e converted value. To change the base currency, select Option s > Currency rates , a currency and Options > Set as base currency . Note: When you change base currency, you must enter new exch ange rates because all previously set exch ange r ates are c leared. Chinese-English bilingual dictionary To look up a Chinese word for English translation and an English word for Chinese translation , press , and select Applications > Office > Dictionar y . The dictionary database may be preset in memory card. If you take out the memory c ard, or use the memory card which is not installed with the dictiona ry database, you will not be able to use the dictionary function. Search fo r words in t he dictionary Select an input m ethod as needed, the n enter the Chin ese characters or English words you wish to look up. When you enter text in the inputtin g window, the device will automatically filter those entries matching to your é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 131
text from the Bilingual dict ionary and show a candidate list in the display. The most matched entry will b e highlighted and loc ated at the top of the candidate list. 1. Scroll up or down to h ighligh t your needed entry, when you are movi ng the highlight bar, the text in the input window stays unchanged. 2. You could use the below m ethods to selec t entry: â Press the scroll key. â Select Select word from the opt ion menu. Your selected entry will be automatically shown in the input window (if this en try is different from your input Chinese characters or English words), and its translation will be shown on the screen to replace the p revious candidate entr y list. Meanwhile, th e cursor will locat e in the translation window. Sometimes, the screen cannot display the whole translation content. Press th e up or down scroll key to view th e whole c ontent. Return to the state of lo oking up in dictionary If you want to continue to look up the tran slation of other Chinese characters or English words in dictionary, please implement any of the following options: â Enter the Chi nese characters or English words you want to look up. â First press the cle ar key to empty the c o ntents in th e input window, and then enter th e Chinese characters or English words you want to look up. â Press Back . The dic t ionary will return to the state of showing candidates entry list, but the entry in the inputting window is still highlighted. You could directly input text or move the cursor by scrolling left or right to edit the text in the input window. Applications folder Calculator Press , and select Appl ications > Calcu lator . Note: This calcu lator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 132
To make a calculation, enter the fir st number of the calculation. Sele ct a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Enter the sec ond number of the calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operat ions in the order they are entered. The result of th e ca lculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number o f a new calculation. To save the results of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . The saved result replaces t he previously stored result in the memory. To retrieve the results of a calcu lation from the memory and use them in a calculation, select Option s > Memory > Rec all . To view the last sa ved result, select Options > Last result . Exiting the Calculator ap plication or switching off the device does not clear th e memory. You can recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application. Application manager With Application manag er, you can see the software packages installed in your de vi ce. You can view det ails of installed applications, remo ve applica tions, and define installation settings. Press , and select Applicati ons > App. mgr. . You can i nstall t wo types o f applications and software to your device: â J2ME applicat ions based on Java technology with the extension .jad or .jar â Other applications and so ftware suitable for the Symbian operating sy stem with the extension . sis or .sisx Only install software specifica lly designed for your device: Nokia N78. Software provider s will often refer to the official model number of th is product: Nokia N78-1. Install applicatio ns and software Installation files may be tran sferred to your device from a compatible computer, downloaded during b rowsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message as an e-mail attachment or using other connecti vity methods, such as Bluetooth conne ctivity. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia Nseries PC Su ite to install an application to your device. If you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, save the file to a compatible memory card (local disk). indicates a .sis or .sisx application, a Java application, that the appl ication is not fully install ed, and that the application is installed on the memory card. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 133
Important: Only install and use applications and other software from trusted so urces , suc h as appli cat ions that are Symbian Si gned or hav e passed the Java Verif ied TM testing. Before installati on, note the follow ing: â To view the applic ation ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . To display the security certificate details of the applica tion, in Details: , scroll to C ertif icate s: , and select View deta ils . See "Certificate management" , p. 141 . â If you install a file that cont ains an update or repair to an existing ap plication, you can only restore the original applicati on if you have the original installation file or a full backu p copy of the removed software package. To restore the original applicati on, remove the application, and install the application again from the original installation file or the backup copy. The .jar file is requ ired for installin g Java application s. If it is missing, the device may ask you to download it. If there is no access poin t defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the server. You obtain these from the su pplier or manu facturer of th e application. To install an application or software, do the following: 1. To locate an installation file, press , and select Applications > App. mgr. . Alternatively, search the device memory or a comp atible memory card (if inserte d) in File ma nager, or open a message i n Messaging > In box that cont ains an ins tallation fi le. 2. In Applicatio n manager, select Options > Install . In other applications, scroll to the installation file, and select it to start the installation. During install ation, the device shows information about the progress of the inst allation. If you install an application without a digital signature or certification, the device displays a warn ing. Continue installation only if you are sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed applicatio n, locate it in the menu, and select it. If the ap plication does not have a default folder defined, it is installed in the Applications folder in the main menu. To see which softwa re packages are installed or remove d and when, select Options > View log . Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one a pplication é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 134
with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation o r cause the dev ice to sto p functioning. After you install applications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storing other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use N okia PC Suite to back u p installation files to a compatible PC, then us e the file manager to remove the installation files from the device memory. If the .sis file is a message attachment , delete the message from the Messaging inbox. See "File manager" , p. 135 . Remove applications and software Press , and select Appl ications > App. mgr. . Scroll to a software package, and select Optio ns > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove softwa re, you can only reinstall it if you have the origin al software packag e or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to o p en docume nts created wi th that so ftware. If another software package depends on the softwa re package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the doc umentation of the installed software packa ge for details. Settings Press , and select Applicati ons > App. mgr. . Select Options > Settings and from the following: â Software insta llation â Select whe ther Symbian software that has no verified digital signature can be installed. â Onlin e certifica te check â Select to check the online certificates before inst all ing an application. â Default web address â Set the d efault address used when checking onlin e certificates. Some Java applications ma y require that a message be s e n t o r a n e t w o r k c o n n e c t i o n b e m a d e t o a s p e c i f i c a c c e s s point to download ext ra data or components. In the Applica tion manage r main view , scroll to an app lication , and select Options > Open to change settings related to that specific application. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 135
Tools folder File manager Press , and select Tools > File mgr. . With File manager, you can browse, manage, and open files on your device, memo ry card, or a compatible external drive. File manager main view The available options d epend on the memory you highlight. S elect Options and from the following: â Remove memory card â Remove the memory c ard safely from the device without any loss of data . â Back up phone memory â Create a backup of the device memory to a memory card. â Restore from mem. card â Restore a backup of the device memory saved on a compatible memory c ard. This option is only available if you have created a backup of the device memory. â Remote drives â Define settin gs for a compatible remote drive c onnected to your device , or map or delete drives. â Find â Find a file in the memory. Enter a search t ext that matches t he file name. Phone memory and m emory card views The available options depend on the memory you selec t. Select Options and from the following: â Send â Send a file using available connection methods. â Organ ise â Move and copy files and folders, or create new folders in the memory. â Mark/Unmark â Mark files or folders to delete multiple items at the same time. â Rename â Rename a file or a folder. â Detai ls â View the detai ls of the memo ry or the selected item. â Memory card options â Rename or format a memory card. â Memory card password â Password protect a memory card. Voice command s Press , and select Tools > Utilit ies > Voice comm. . You can use enhanced voic e commands to control your device. See "Voice di alling" , p. 11 7 . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 136
To activate enhance d voice commands to start applications and profiles, press and hold the right selection key in the standby mode. To use enhan ced voice c ommands, press and hold the right selection key in the st a ndby mode, and speak a voice command. The voice command is th e name of the application or profile displayed in the list. To edit the voic e commands, in the Voice command s application, select an item, such as an appl ication or a profile, a nd Edit . To listen to the synthe sised voice tag, select Options > Playback . To remove a voice command that you added manually, select Options > Remove voice command . Select Op tions > Settings and from the following: â Synthesi ser â to switch on or off the synthesiser that plays recognised voice tags and commands in the selected device language â Playba ck volume â to adjust the playback volume for the voice commands â Recognition sensitivity â to adj ust how easily the synthesiser recognis es speech. If the sensitivity is set too high, it may not accept commands because of background noise. â Command verificat ion â to sele ct whether the spoken command is accepted manually, by voice, or automatically â Remove voice adapts. â to reset voice recognition learning, for exam ple, when th e main user of the device has changed Sync Press , and select Tools > Sync . Sync enables you to synchr onise your not es, calendar entries, text and multimedia messages, browser bookmarks, or contacts wit h various compat ible applications on a compatible computer or on th e internet. You may rece ive synchronisat ion setti ngs in a special message from your service provider. A synchronisation profile cont ains the necessary settings for synchronisation. When you open th e application, the de fault or previously used sync pr ofile is displayed. To modify the profile, scroll to a sync item and select Mark to include i t in the profi le or Unmark to leave it out. To manage sync profiles, sele ct Options and the desired option. To synchronise data, select Opti ons > Synchronise . To cancel synchronisation before it finishes, select Ca ncel . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 137
Device manager Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Device mgr. . Use Device manager to connec t to a server and re ceive configuration setting s for yo ur device, to create new server profiles, or to view and manage existi ng server profiles. You may receive serv er profiles and different configuration setting s from your service providers and company information manage ment department. These configuration sett ings may include connection and other settings used by different application s in your device. Scroll to a server pr ofile, and select Option s and f rom the following: â Start configuration â Co nnect to th e server and receive configuration se tt ings for your devi ce. â New server prof ile â Create a server profile. To delete a server profil e, scroll to it, and press C . Speech With Spee ch, you ca n set the l anguage, vo ice, and voice properties for the message reader. Press , and select Tools > Utilities > Speech . To set the language for the message reader, select Language . To download addition al languages to your device, select Options > Download languages . Tip: When you downl oad a new language, you mus t download at least one voice for that l anguage. To set the speaking voice, sel ect Voice . The v oice depends on the sele cted language. To set the speaki ng rate, select Speed . To set the speaking vol ume, sele ct Volume . To view details of a voic e, scroll right to the voice tab, scroll to the v oice, and select Option s > Voice details . To listen to a voice, scro ll to th e voice, and select Options > Play voice . To delete languages or voices, scroll to the item and select Options > Delete . Message reader setting s To change the message reader settings, scroll to the Settings tab, and define the following: â Language detection â turn autom atic reading language detection on or off. â Continuous reading â turn continuous re ading of all selected messages on or off. â Speech pro mpts â select whether the message reader inserts prompts in messages. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 138
â Audio source â select whet her you want to liste n to the message through the loudspeaker or the device. Settings Some sett ings may be preset fo r the device by yo ur service provider, and you may not be able to change them. General settings In general settings, you can edit the general settings of your devi ce or resto re the devi ce to origina l default settings. You can adjust time and date setting s also in the clock. See "Clock " , p. 126 . Personal isation settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Personalisation . You can edit settings relate d to the display, standby mode, and gene ral function s of your device. Themes allows you to ch ange the loo k of the display. See "Change the l ook of your device" , p. 31 . Voice commands opens the settings for the Voice commands application. See "Voice commands" , p. 136 . Tones all ows you to chang e the tones of the calendar, clock, and cu rrentl y activ e profile. Display â Brightness â Scroll left or right to adjust the brightness of the display. â Font si ze â Adjust the size of the te xt and icons on the display. â Power saver time-out â Select the time-out peri od after which the power sa ver is activa ted. â Welcome note / logo â The welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the d e vice. Select De fault to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select an image from Photos. â Light time-out â Select a time-o ut afte r which the backlight of the displa y is switched off. Standby mode â Shortcuts â A ssi gn shortcuts to the selection keys to be used in the standby mode and select which applications are shown in the active toolbar. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 139
If the active standby is se t off, you can assign keypad shortcuts for the d i fferent presses of the scroll key. â Change Menu view â Select Ho rizonta l icon bar to view a horizont al tool bar and the content from different applic ations on the screen. Select Vertical icon b ar to view a ve rtical t oolbar on the screen. The content from different applicat ions is hidden. To display the content, select a shortcut and press the scroll key left. Select Basi c to switc h off active toolb ar. â Operator logo â This setting is only availabl e if you have received and saved an operator logo. Selec t Off if you do not want the l ogo to be shown. Language Changing the settings for the phone lan guage or writing language affects every applicat ion in your de vice until you change these settings a gain. â Phone language â Change the language of the display text in your device . This also affects the format used for date and time and the separa tors used, for example, in calculations. Automati c selects the language accordin g to the information on your SIM card. After you chan ge the displ ay text langua ge, the device restarts. â Writing language â Change the writ ing langu age. This affects the c h aracters available when writing text and the p redictive text dictionary used. â Predictive te xt â Set predicti ve text inp ut on or off for all editors in t he device. The pr edictive text dictionary is not available for all la nguages. Enhancement settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Gener al > Enhancement . Some enhancement conne ctors indicate which type of enhanceme nt is connected to the device. See "Dis play indicators" , p. 24 . The available settings depe nd on the type of enhancement . Select an enhancemen t and from the following: â Default pr ofile â Se t the profile th at you want activated e ach time yo u co nnect a certain compatible enhancem ent to your devi ce. â Automati c answer â Se lect whethe r you want the device to answer an incoming call automaticall y after 5 seconds. If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disabled. â Lights â S et whether lights remain on or are switched off after th e time-out. This se tting is not av ailable for all enhance ments. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 140
Security settings Phone and SIM Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Pho ne and SIM card . â PIN co de request â When ac tive, the code is requested each time the d e vice is switched o n . Deactivating the PIN code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. â PIN co de , PIN2 code , and Lock code â You ca n change the lock code, PIN co de, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the nu mbers from 0 to 9 . If you forget the PIN or the PIN2 c ode, contact your service provider. If you forget the lock co de, contact a Nokia Care point or your service provider. See "Access codes" , p. 19 . Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prev ent accidental dialling of the emergency number. â Keypad au tolock p eriod â Select whethe r the keypad is locked when your device has been idle for a certain period of time. Tip: To lock or unlock the keypad manually, press the left selection key, then * . â Phone auto lock period â To avoid unauthorised use, you can set a time-out after wh ich the device automatically locks. A lock ed device cannot be used until the correct lock code is entered. To turn off the autolock peri od, select None . Tip: To lock the device manually, press the power key. A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . â Lock if SIM card changed â You can se t the device to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your dev ice. The device m aintains a list of SIM cards that are recogn ised as the ownerâ s cards. â Closed user group â You can specify a group of people to whom you ca n call and who can c all you (network service). â Confirm SIM services â You can set t he device to display confirmation messages when you are using a SIM card service (network service). Certificate management Press , and select Tools > Settings > Gener al > Security > Ce rtific ate m anagem ent . Digital certificates do not guarantee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. In the certific ate management main view, you can see a list of authority cert ificates that are stored in your device. Scroll right to see a list of pe rsonal certificates, if available. Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or anothe r site or remo te server for actions tha t involve transferring conf idential é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 141
information. They shou ld also be used i f you want to reduce the risk of viruses or other malicious softwa re and be sure of the auth enti city of software when downloading and inst alling software. Important: Even if the use of certifi cates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in or der to benefit fro m increased security. The existence of a certi ficate does no t offer any prote ction by itself; the certificate mana ger must contain correct, authentic, or trus ted certificates for inc reased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certi ficate not valid yet" is shown even if the cert ificate should be va lid, check th at the current date and time in your device are correct. Before ch anging an y certif icate s ettings, you must make sure that you really trust th e owner of the certificat e and that the certificate really belongs to the listed own er. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signatu re and the period of validit y of a server certificate h ave been chec ked. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. To check certificate details, scroll to a certificate, and select Option s > Certif icate detai ls . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following not es may be display ed: â Cert ifica te not t rusted â You have not set any application to use the certificate. â Expired certificate â The perio d of validi ty has ende d for the selected ce rtificate. â Certif icate not valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected ce rtificate. â Certifi cate corrupt ed â The certificate cannot be used. Contac t the cert ificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before changing any certific ate settings, you must make sure that you reall y trust th e owner of th e certificate and that the certificate really belo ngs to the li sted owner . Scroll to an a uthority certificate, and select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certif icate, a list of the applications that can use the selected certificate is shown. For example: â Symbian installa tion : Yes â The certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. â Internet : Yes â Th e certificate is able to certify servers. â App. ins tallatio n : Yes â The certif icate is able to certify the origin of a new J ava⢠appl ication. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 142
Select Options > Edit trust setting to chan ge the va lue. Security module Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Security > Security module . To view or edit a security module (if available), scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, scroll to it, and select Options > Security details . Restore original settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Factory setti ngs . You can reset some of the sett ings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. After resetting, the dev ice may take a longer t ime to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Navi wheel settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ge neral > Navi wheel . Navi wheel When the Navi wheel setting is se t on, you c an browse through files and lists in certain applications by sliding your finger on the rim of the scroll key. See "Navi wheel " , p. 26 . When the Navi wheel setting is set off, to move up, down, left, or right, press the scroll key in the desired direction. Breathing The rim around the Navi whee l illuminates slowly when the de vice is in s leep mo de and qu ickly when there are missed calls or received me ssages. To switch off th e illumination, select Tools > Settings > Gene ral > Navi wheel . Positioning settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Gener al > Positioning . Positioning methods â Integrated GPS â Use the inte grated GPS rec eiver of your dev ice. â Assist ed GPS â Use Assisted GPS (A-GPS) to receive assistance data from an assistance data server. See "Assisted GPS (A-GPS)" , p. 35 . â Bluetooth GPS â Use a compatible external GPS receiver with B luetooth connecti vity. â Network based â Use information from the cellular network (network service). Positioning server To define an access point, and positioning server for A- GPS, select Position ing server . The positioning server é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 143
may be preset by your service prov ider, and you may not be able to edit the settings. Notation settings To select which measure ment system you want to use for speeds and distances, select Measurement system > Metric or Imperial . To define in which format the coordinate information is shown in your device, select Coordinate format , and the desired format. Phone settings In phone settings, you ca n edit settings related to phone calls and network. Call settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ph one > Call . â Send my call er ID â You can set your p hone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or th e value may be set by your service p rovider wh en you make a subscription ( Set by network ) (network service). â S e n d m y i n t e r n e t c a l l I D â You can set your internet caller ID to be displayed to or hidden from the person to whom you are calling. â Call w aiting â To be alerted for incoming calls (network service) w hile you are in a call, select Activate . To chec k whether the function is activated, select Check status . â Reject call with message â To send a text message to a caller informing why you could not answer the cal l, select Yes . â Message text â Write a text to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. â Image in video call â If video is not sent during a video ca ll, you can sel ect a still image to be displayed instead. â Automat ic redial â Select On , and your device makes a maximum of 10 attempts to connect the call after an unsucce ssful call attempt. To stop automatic redialling, press the end key. â Show call duration â Activate this setting if you want the leng th of a call to be displaye d during the call. â Summary after call â Activate this setting if you want the lengt h of a call to be display ed after the call. â Speed dial â Select On , and the numbers assigned to the number ke ys (2 to 9) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See "Speed dial a phone number" , p. 116 . â Anyk ey answer â Select On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pressing any keypad key, except the power key. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 144
â Line in use â This setting (network service) is show n only if the SIM card support s two subscriber numbers, that is, two pho ne lines. Select wh ich phone line you want to use for maki ng calls and sending text messages. Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line . If you select Line 2 and have not subscribe d to this network service, you are not able to make calls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip: To switch be tween the ph one lines, pres s and hold # in the standby mod e . â Lin e chan ge â To prevent line selection (network service), select Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need th e PIN2 code. Call divert Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call divert . Call dive rt allows yo u to divert your inc oming calls to yo ur voice mailbox or another p hone number. For details, contact your se rvice provider. Select whic h calls you want to divert and th e desired diverting option. Set the option on ( Activate ) or off ( Deacti vate ), or check whether the op tion is act ivated ( Check st atus ). Several di verting optio ns can be active at the sam e time. When all c alls are dive rted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring a nd call diverting cannot be a ctive at the same time. Call barring Press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . Call barring (network service) allows you to restrict the calls that you make or rece ive with the devi ce. To change the settings, you need the barring passw ord from your service provid er. Call barring a nd call diverting cannot be a ctive at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. Voice call barring Select th e desire d barring option , and set it on ( Activ ate ) or off ( Deactivate ), or check w hether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 145
Network settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Ph one > Network . Your devi ce can automa tically sw itch between th e GSM and UMTS netwo rks. The GSM netw ork is indicated with in the stand by mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . â Network mode â S e l e c t w h i c h n e t w o r k t o u s e . I f y o u select Dual mode , the device uses the GSM or UMTS network automatic ally, according to the ne twork parameters and the roamin g agre ements between the wireless service providers. Contact your n etwork service provider for detail s and roaming costs. This option is shown only if supported by the wireless service provider. â Operator selection â Select Automati c to set the device to search for and se lect one of the available networks, or Manual to manually se lect the network from a list. If the c onnection to the manually selected network is lost, the de vice sounds an error tone and asks you to reselect a netw ork. The selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home cellular network. A roaming agreement is an agreement be tween two or more service providers to enable t he users of one service provider to use t he services of other servic e providers. â Cell in fo display â Sele ct On to set the device to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular netw ork (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Connection settings In connection settin gs, you can edit access points and other connectiv ity setting s. You can als o edit s ettings fo r Bluetooth connectivity in the Bluetooth conne ctivity application. See "Settings" , p. 97 . You can al so edit s ettings for data cable connections in the USB application. See "USB" , p. 100 . Data connections and access points Your dev ice supports p acket data co nnection s (network service), such as GPRS in the GS M network. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, m ultiple data connections can be activ e at the same time, and access points can share a data con nection. In th e UMTS netw ork, data connec tions remai n active during voice ca lls. You can also u se a WLAN data con nection. Only one connection in o ne wireless LAN can be activ e at a time, but several applicat ions can use the same intern et access point. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 146
To establish a da ta conne ction, an access point is required. Yo u can define different kinds of acce ss points, such as the following: â MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages â Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail and connec t to the inte rnet Check the t ype of access point you ne ed with yo ur service provider for th e service you want to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your service provider. Access poin ts Create a new access point Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Destinations . You may receive access point settings in a message from a service provider. Some or al l access po ints may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to change, create, edit, or remove them. When you open one of the access point groups ( , , , ), you can see the access point types: indicates a protected access point. indicates a packet data access point. indicates a WLAN access point. Tip: You can create int ernet access points in a wireless LAN with the WLAN wizard. To create a new access point, select New access point . The device asks to check for available conn ections. After the search, connections that are already available are shown and can be shared by a new access point. If you skip this step, you are as ked to sele ct a connection method and to define the sett ings needed. To edit the settings of an access point, open one of the access point groups, sele ct an access point and Edit . Follow the instruct ions from your se rvice provid er. â Connection name â Enter a descri ptive na me for the connecti on. â Data bearer â Select the data connection type. Depending on the data c onnection you select, only certain setting fields are available. Fi ll in al l fields m a rked with Must b e defined or with a red *. Other fields can be left empty, unless your servic e provider has instructed otherwise. To use a data connection, your service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card. Packet data access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connect ion > Destination s > New access point , and fol low th e é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 147
instructions on the screen. Or, open one of the acce ss point groups, select an access point marked with , and select Edit . Follow the instructions fr om your service pro vider. â Access point name â You obtain the access point name from your service prov ider. â User name â The u ser name may be needed to make a data connect ion, and is usually provided by the service provider. â Prompt password â If you must enter the password every time you log in to a serv er, or if y ou do not want to save your password in the devi ce, select Yes . â Passwo rd â A password may b e needed to make a data connection and is usu all y provided by th e service provider. â Authentication â S e l e c t Secure t o a l w a y s s e n d y o u r password encrypted or Normal to send your password encryp ted when possibl e. â Home page â Depending on the access point you are setting up, enter th e web address or the address of the multimedia messaging centre. Select Op tions > Adv anced settin gs to change the following settings: â Network type â Select th e internet prot ocol type to transfer data to and from your device. The other settings depend on the selected network type. â Phone IP address (for IPV4 only) â Enter the IP address of your device. â DNS address es â Enter the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers, if required by your service provider. Contact your internet service provider to obtain these addresses. â Proxy server address â Enter the address of the proxy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the port number of the proxy server. WLAN internet access points Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Destination s > New access point , and follo w the instructions on the screen. Or, open one of the access point groups, select an access poi nt marked with , and select Edit . Follow the instructions from your WLAN service provider. â WLAN network name â Select Enter manually or Search for networks . If you se lect an exist ing network, WLAN network mode and WLAN security mode are determined by the se ttings of its access point device. â Network status â Define whether the network name is displayed. â WLAN network mode â Select Ad-hoc to creat e an ad hoc network and to allow devices to send and é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 148
receive data directly; a WLAN access point device is not needed. In an ad hoc net work, all devices mu st use the same WLAN network name . â WLAN security mode â Select the encryption used: WEP , 802.1x (not for ad hoc networks), or WPA/ WPA2 . If you se lect Open network , no encryption is used. The WEP, 80 2.1x, and WPA functions can be used only if the network supports them. To ente r the setting s for the selected security mode, select WLAN security settings . Security settings for WEP â WEP key in u se â Select the wired equivalent privacy (WEP) key number . You can create up to four WEP keys. The same settings must be entered on the WLAN access point device . â Authentication type â S e l e c t Open or Shared for the authentic ation type bet ween your devic e and the WLAN access point device. â WEP key settin gs â Enter WEP encryption (leng th of the key), WEP key f ormat ( AS CII or Hexadecimal ), and WEP key (the WEP key data in the selected format). Security settings for 802.1x and WPA/WPA2 â WPA/WPA2 â Select th e means of auth entication: EAP to use an e xtensible authen tication protoco l (EAP) plug-in, o r Pre -shared key to use a password. Complet e the appr opriate settings: â EAP plug-in settings â Ente r the settings as your service provider instructs. â Pre-shared key â Enter a password. The same password must be entered on the WLAN access point device . â WPA2 only mode â Only WPA2 enabled devices are allowed to establish a c onnection in this mode. Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Adva nced se ttings and from the following: â IPv4 settings â Enter the IP address of your device, the subnet IP address, the default gateway, and the IP addresses of the primary and secondary DNS servers. Contact your internet se rvice provider for these addresses. â IPv6 settings â Define the type of DNS address. â Ad-ho c channel (only for Ad-hoc ) â To enter a channel number ( 1-11) manual ly, select User defined . â Proxy server address â Enter the address for the proxy server. â Proxy port number â Enter the pr oxy port number. Packet data settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Packet data . é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 149
The packet data settings affect all access points using a packet data connec tion. â Packet data connection â If you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the dev ice registers to the packet d ata network. St arting an active packet data connec tion (for example, to send and receive e-mail) is quicker. If there is no packet data coverage, the devi ce periodically tries to establish a packet dat a connection. If you select When needed , the device uses a packet data connection only if you star t an application or action that needs it. â Access point â The access point name is needed to use your device as a packet data modem to a compatible computer. â High speed packet access â Enable or disable the use of HSDPA (network serv ice) in UMTS networks. Wireless LAN settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . â Show WLAN availa bility â Select whether is displayed in the standby mo de when a wireless LAN i s availa ble. â Scan for networ ks â If you set Show WLAN availability to Yes , select how often th e device searches for available wireless LANs and updates the indicator. To view ad vanced settings, se lect Options > Adv anced settings . Changing wireless LAN advanced settings is not recommended. SIP settings Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > SIP settings . Session Initiation Protocol (S IP) settings are needed for certain network services usi ng SIP. You may receive the settings in a special text message from your service provider. You can view, delete, or create these setting profiles in SIP settings. Configurations Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Config uratio ns . You may receive trusted server settings from your service provider in a configuration message. You can save view or delete these settings in configurations. Access point name control Press , and select Tools > Settings > Conne ction > APN contro l . é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 150
With the access point n ame control service, yo u can restrict packet dat a connections and allow your device to use only certa in packet data ac cess points. T h i s s e t t i n g i s o n l y a v a i l a b l e i f yo u r S I M c a r d s u p p o r t s th e access point control service. To set the control servic e on or off or to change the allowed access points, select Options and the corresponding option. To ch ange the options, you need your PIN2 code. Contact your service provi der for the code. Application settings To edit the settings of some of the applications in your device, press , and select Tools > Settings > Applications . To edit the settings, you can also s elect Options > Settings in each appl ication. Troubleshooting Q: What is m y passwor d for the lock , PIN, or PUK codes ? A: The default lock code is 12345 . I f y o u f o r g e t o r l o s e t h e lock code , contact you r device dea ler. If yo u forget or lose a P I N o r P U K c o d e , o r i f y o u h a v e n o t r e c e i v e d s u c h a c o d e , contact your netw ork servic e provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial internet service provider (ISP) or network service p rovider. Q: How do I c lose an application that is n ot responding? A: Press and hold . To close an application, scroll to it, and press C . Pressing C does not close Music player. To close Music player, select it from the list, and Option s > Exit . Q: Why do im ages look smu dgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type o f display. Some d i sp l a y s m a y c o n t a i n p i x e l s o r d o t s t h a t r e m a i n o n o r o f f . This is norm al, not a fault. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 151
Q: Why can't my device establish a GPS connecti on? A: Find more information about GPS, GPS receiver, satellite signals, and location information in thi s user guide. See "Positioning (GPS)" , p. 35 . Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device while using Bluetooth connectiv ity? A: Check that both devices ar e compatible, have activated Bluetoot h connectiv ity, and are not in hidde n mode. Check also that th e distance between the two devices is not over 10 met res (33 feet) and t hat there are no walls or other obstructions between th e devices. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetoo th connection? A: If another device is conne ct ed to you r device , you can either end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating Bluet ooth connectivity. Press , and select Tools > Bluetoot h > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why canâÂÂt the other device see the files stored on my devic e in the home network? A: Make sure that you have config ured the home network settings, content sharing is tu rned on in your device, and the other device is UPnP compatible. Q: What can I do if my home netw ork connection stops working? A: Switch off the wireless LAN (WLAN) connection f rom your compatible PC and your device, and switch it on again. If this does not help, restart your compatible PC and your device. If the connect ion still does not work, reconfigure th e WLAN settings in both your compatible PC and device. See "Wireless LA N" , p. 93 . See "Connection settings" , p. 146 . Q: Why can't I see my compatible PC in my device in the home network? A: If you are using a fire wall application in your compatible PC, check that it allows home media server to use the external connect ion (you can add Home media server to the firewall applic ation's exceptions list). Check from the firewall settings th at the firewall application allows traff ic to the fo llowing ports: 1900, 49152, 49153 , and 49154. Some WLAN acc ess point devices have a built- in firewall. In such cases, ch eck that the firewall in the access point device doe s not block traffic to the following ports: 1900, 49 152, 49153, an d 49154. Check t hat the WLAN settings are th e sa me in your device and compatible PC. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 152
Q: Why can't I see a wireless LA N (WLAN) access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: The WLAN access point may use a hidden service set identifier ( SSID). You can onl y access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN Internet access point for the network on your Nokia device. Q: How do I switch wire less LAN (WLAN) of f on my Nokia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia de vice swit ches off w hen you are not trying to c onnect, not con nected to another access point, or not scanning for ava ilable networks. To further reduce batte ry consumpti on, you can s pecify that your Nokia device does not scan, or scans less often, for available netw orks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To chan ge the backg r ound scan settings: 1. Press , and select Tools > Settings > Connect ion > Wireless LAN . 2. To increase th e background scan time interva l, adjust the time in Scan for networks . To stop background scans, select Show WLAN availability > Never . 3. To save your changes, press Back . When Sho w WLAN av ailab ility is set to Never , the WLAN availability icon is not shown in the standby mode. However, you can st ill manually scan for available WLAN networks , and conn ect to WLAN networks as usual. Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: To save data , use Nokia Nseries PC Suite to make a back- u p c o p y o f a l l d a t a t o a c o mpatible computer; send images to your e-mail address, then save the images to your computer; or send data us ing Bluetooth con nectivity to a compatible device. You can also store dat a on a compatible mem o ry card. Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The cont act card does not h ave a phone number, an address, or an e-mail address. Press , select Contacts , and edit the cont act card. Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connectio n again and again? A: The device ma y be trying to re trieve a multimedia message from the multimedia message centre. To stop the device from making a data connection, press , and select Messaging > Opti ons > Settings > Multimedia me ssage > Multimedia retrieval and Manual to have the mult imedia messaging centre save messages to be retr ieved later, or Of f to i gnore all incoming multimedia messages. If you select Manual , you receiv e a notification w hen there is a n ew multimedia message that you can retriev e in the multimedia message centre. If you selec t Off , the device doe s not make any é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 153
network connect ions related to multime dia mes saging. To set the dev ice to use a pa cket data connec tion only if you start an application or action that needs it, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not he lp, switch the device off, and switch it on again. Q: Why do I have problems connecting the device to my PC? A: Ensure that you have the la test version of Nokia Nseries PC Suite and that it is in stalle d and running on your compatible PC. For further information on how to use Nokia Nseries PC Suite, see the help function on Nok ia Nseries PC Suite or visit the Nokia support pages. Q: Can I use my device as a f ax modem with a compatible PC? A: You cannot use your dev ice as a fax modem. However, with call diverting (ne twork service) , you can dive rt incoming fax calls to anoth er phone number. Nokia original enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, c h argers, and enhancement s approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other ty pes may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. An extensive range of enhancements is av ailable for your device. Please visit www.nokia- asia.com /enhancements for more details. For availability of the e nhancements, please check with your local dealer. Enhancements Practical rules about acce ssories and enhancements â Keep all accessories and enhancements out of the reac h of sm all chi ldren. â When you disconnect the po wer cord of any accessory or enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 154
â Check regularly that en hancements installed in a vehicle are mounted and are operating pro perly. â Installation of any complex car enhanc ements must be made by qualified personnel only . Battery Type Talk time Standby BL-6F Up to minutes ( GSM) Up to Important: Battery talk and standby times are estimates only and depend on signal strength, ne twork condition s, features use d, battery age and condition, temperatures to w hich battery is exposed, u se in digital mode, and many other factors. The amount of time a device is used for calls wi ll affect its standby time. L i k e w i s e , t h e a m o u n t o f t i m e t h a t t h e d e v i c e i s t u r n e d o n and in the standby mode wi ll affect its talk time. é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 155 320 260 hours ( GSM)
Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventua lly wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorte r than normal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia app roved batteries, and rec harge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. If a replacement battery is being used for th e first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonge d period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, then disconnect and reconnect it to begin charging the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical pl ug and the device when not in us e. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a charger, sinc e overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If le ft unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the batte ry is completely discharged, it may take several minutes before the charging indicat or appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the batte ry only for its inten ded purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short -circuit the batt ery. Accidental sho rt- circuiting can occur when a me tallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct conn ection of the positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of th e battery. (These look like metal strip s on the battery. ) This might happen , for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the c onnecting ob ject. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or w inter cond itions, will reduce th e capacity and lifetime of the battery . Always try to keep the battery be tween 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a h ot or cold battery may not work temporar ily, even when th e battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatu res well below fr eezing. Do not dispose of batterie s in a fire as they may explo de. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as househ old waste. Do not dismantle or shred cell s or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, d o not allow th e liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In the event of such a leak, é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 156
flush your skin or eyes imme diately wit h water, or seek medical help. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorised Nokia deal er, and inspect the h ologram label using the foll owing steps : Authenticate holo gram 1. When you look at th e hologram on the label , you should see the N okia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhanc ements lo go when lookin g from another angle. 2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 do ts on each side respectively. What if your b attery is not authentic? é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 157 Successful com pletion of th e steps is not a total assurance of th e authenticit y of the battery. If you have any reason to belie ve that your b attery is not an authentic, original No kia battery, you should refrain from using it. If authen ticity cannot be verified, return the ba ttery to th e place of purchase. If you cannot confirm that your Noki a battery with the hologram on the labe l is an authentic Nokia battery, please do not use the battery. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device a n d its enhanceme nts. It may also inval idate any appr oval or warranty applying to the de vice.
To find out more about orig inal Nokia batteries, visit Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The following suggestions will he lp you protect your warranty coverage. â Keep th e device dry. Pre cip itation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circui ts. If you r device does ge t wet, remove the battery, and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. â Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty area s. Its moving parts and electronic components c an be damaged. â Do not store the de vice in hot areas. Hi gh temperatures can shorten the life of elect ronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. â Do not store th e device in cold areas. W hen the device returns to its normal temp erature, moist ure can form inside the device and damage elec tronic circuit boards. â Do not attempt to o pen the device other than as instructed in this gu ide. â Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handlin g can break inte rnal circuit boards and fin e mechanics. â Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning sol vents, or strong detergents to clean the device. â Do not paint the dev ice. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. â Use a soft, clean , dry cloth t o clean any len ses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. â Use only the sup plied or an appr oved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. â Use charge rs indoors. â Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes. â To reset the device from ti me to time for op timum performance , power off th e device and remove the battery. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 158 www.nokia-asia .com/batterycheck.
These suggestions apply e qually to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, tak e it to the nearest auth orized service facility for service. Additional safety information Small children Your device and its en hancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment To transmit data files or messa ges, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a conn ection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magn etic. Metallic materials may be attracted to t he device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the devi ce, because information st ored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere wit h the func tionality o f inadequately protected me dical devices. Consult a physician or the man ufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately sh ielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch o ff your device in healt h care faci lities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care faci lities may be u sing equipment that could be sensitive t o external RF en ergy. Implanted medical dev ices Manufacture rs of medica l devices recom mend that a é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 159 This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in th e normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 centimeters ( case, belt clip, or holder is used for body-worn operation, it sh ould not c ontain metal and should position the device the above- stated distance from your body . millimeters) away from the body. When a carry 15 millimet ers ) minimum separation of 15.3 centimeters ( 15 3
should be maintained betw een a wireless device and an implanted medical device, such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibr illator, to avoid potential interference wit h the medical device. Pe rsons who ha ve such devices should: â Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 the wireless device is turned on. â Not carry th e wireless device in a breast pock et. â Hold the wirele ss device to the ear opposi te the medical de vice to minimi ze the potent ial for interfer ence. â Turn the w ireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspe ct that interfe rence is taking plac e. â Read and follow the direction s from the manufactu rer of their implanted medical device. If you have any question s about using your wireless device with an implanted medical device, c o nsult your health care provider. Hearin g aids Some digital wire less devices may in terfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, con sult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improper ly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel inje ction systems, e lectronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic speed cont rol systems, and air bag system s. For more information, check with t he manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipm ent that has been added. Only qualified pers onnel should service the device or install the devi ce in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any wa rranty that may apply to the device. Chec k regularly that al l wireless device equip ment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as th e device, its pa rts, or enhan cements. For vehicles equ ipped with an air bag, re member that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objec ts, including install ed or portab le wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipm ent is improperly in stalled and the air bag inflates, se rious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircra ft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operat ion of the airc raft, disrupt the wirele ss telephone network, and may be illegal. é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 160 device when from the medical centimeters millimet ers ) ( 15 3
Potentially explosive environments S w i t c h o f f y o u r d e v i c e w h e n i n a n y a r e a w i t h a p o t e n t i a l l y explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially ex plosive atmospheres include areas where you woul d normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. S parks in such areas could ca use an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refue lling points such as near ga s pumps at service stations. Obse rve restrictions on the use of radio equipme n t in fuel d epots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are i n progress. Areas with a potentially explosive a tmosphere are o ften, but not alwa ys, clearly marked. They includ e below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage faciliti es and areas where the air contains chem icals or partic les such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You shou ld check with the manufacturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butan e) to determine if this device c an be safely used in th eir vicinity. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using ra dio signals, wireless network s, landline networks, and user-programmed fu nctions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, swit ch it on . Check fo r adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by loca tion. 4. Press the call key. If certain features a re in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. If the device is in the offlin e or flight profile mode, you may need to chan ge the profil e to activate the pho ne function bef ore you can make an emergenc y call. Consult this guide or your service pr ovider for more information. é 2008 N okia. All r ights rese rved. 161
When making an emerge ncy call, giv e all the n ecessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only mean s of communicat ion at the scene of an acci dent. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Certification information (SAR) This mobile device meets gui delines for exposure to radio waves. Your mobile device is a radi o transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to rad io waves recommended by intern ational guidelin es. Thes e guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organization ICNIRP and incl ude safety margins designed to assure the pro tection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices emp loy a unit of measurement kn own as the Sp ecific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR l imit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averag ed over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using sta ndard operating positions w ith the device tr ansmitting at its h ighest certified power leve l in all tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operat ing device can be below the maximum value because the device is designed t o use only the pow er required to reach the ne twork. That amount changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value un der the ICNIRP guid elines for use of the device at the ear is 1 .23 W/kg. Use of devic e accessories and en hancements may resu lt in different SAR value s. SAR values may var y depending on national reporting and te sting requirements and the network band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 162 www.nokia .com.
é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. Index A access codes 19 access poin ts 95, 147 accessor ies See enhance ments active standby mode 33, 139 active toolbar 62 in camera 60 in Photos 71 address book See contacts alarm clock 126 alarm, calendar note 128 albums, media 72 anniversary notes 127 answering calls 116 antennas 22 application manager 133 applications 133 assisted GPS (A-GPS) 35 attachments 106, 108 audio messages 104 audio themes 32 auto-update for time/date 126 B backing up device memory 1 36 backlight time-out 139 battery power saver setting 139 saving power 20 birthday notes 127 blogs 89 Bluetoot h connectivity blocking devices 99 device address 98 device visibility 97 pairing devices 98 receiving data 99 security 97 sending data 97 settings 97 switching on/off 9 7 bookmarks 90 browser bookmarks 9 0 browsing pages 87, 89 cache memory 91 downloads 90 security 92 settings 92 widgets 89 C cable connection 100 cache memory 91 calculator 132 calendar 127 call wa iting 117 calls 114 answering 116 conferenc e 116 duration of 122 log for 123 options during 115 recording 103 reject ing 116 settings 144 camera colour 68 flash 63 image quality 67 imaging mode 61 indicators 60 lighting 68 163
location information 62 options 62 scenes 63 self-timer 64 sequence mode 63 settings 67 video mode 66 video quality 69 cell broa dcast messages 104 certificates 141 charts, spread sheet 129 clock 34, 12 6 comput er connections 100 See also data connections conference calls 1 16 configu ration See settings connection manager 95 contac ts copying 125 default information 1 24 deleting 124 editing 124 groups 126 images in 124 ringing tones 1 24 saving 124 sending 124 synchronising 137 voice tags 124 converter 130 copyright prot ection 102 currency converter 130 D data connections cable 100 device manager 138 PC connectivity 1 00 synchronisation 137 date and time 126 declining calls 116 device manager 138 dialled numbers 122 dismissing calls 116 display setti ngs 139 documen t applica tions 129 downloads 90 DRM (digital r ights management) 102 duration of calls 122 E e-mail messages 107 end all calls option 117 enhancements setti ngs 140 Excel, Micros oft 129 F factory se ttings, resto r ing 143 feeds, ne ws 89 file man ager 136 Flash Player 102 FM radio 5 5 FM transmi tter 50 playing songs 51 settings 51 font settings 139 G gallery sounds 78 streaming links 78 general information 18 GPS (Global Posit ioning System) 35 grid view of menus 34 H headset 29 é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 164
help application 18 home network 48, 79 copying f iles 82 sharing content 81 home synch ronisation incoming files 83 setting up 82 settings 82 HSDPA (h igh-sp eed down link packet access ) 30 I IAPs (internet access points ) 95 images editing 73 printing 75 , 76 sharing online 76 inbox, message 106 indicators and icons 24 installati on of applicatio ns 133 internet connection 8 7 See also browser internet radio favourites 57 listening 57 settings 58 station directory 58 J J2ME Ja va appl icatio n support 133 Java scripts/a pplications 133 K keyguard 26, 141 keypad 26, 141 L landmarks 38 language settings 140 licences 102 light settings 139 list view of menus 34 location information 35 lock code 19 locking keypad 26, 141 loudspeaker 29 M mailbox e-mail 107 video 115 voice 115 main menu 34 Maps 40 media Flash Player 102 music player 45 radio 55 RealPlayer 100 streaming 101 voice reco rder 10 3 meeting notes 127 meetings, setting up 127 memo notes 127, 13 0 memory cleari ng 21 web cache 91 message reader 107 selecting voice 1 38 messages e-mail 107 folders for 103 icon for incoming 1 06 multimedia 106 settings 109 voice 1 15 Mini M ap 89 MMS (multimedia message service) 104, 10 6 multimedia menu 27 multimedia messages 104, 106 é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 165
music player 45 playlists 47 transferring music 49 muting soun d 11 6 my numbers 123 N Navi wheel 26 navigation tools 35 network settings 146 news feeds 89 Nokia original enhancements 154 notes 130 O offline mode 30 operator logo 1 40 option s menu for calls 115 outbox, mess age 104 P packet data connection access point settings 14 7 counters 122 settings 149 page overview 89 PDF reader 130 personal ce rtificates 14 1 personalisation 31, 139 phonebook See contacts photograp hs See camera Photos active toolbar 66 organising files 71 photos editing 73 file details 70 red-eye 73 tags 72 viewing 70 PictBridge 76 PIN code 19 PIN2 c ode 19 playing messages 107 podcasting directories 53 downloads 54 playing 54 searching 53 settings 52 positioning info rmation 35 positioning set tings 143 power saver 13 9 PowerPoint, Micr osoft 130 presen tations, multi media 78, 107, 130 printin g images 75 profiles offline restrictions 30 proxy settin gs 148 PUK codes 19 Q Quickmanager 130 Quickpoi nt 130 Quicksheet 12 9 Quickword 129 R radio 55 RDS (Radio Data System) 55 RealPlayer 100, 101 recording calls 103 sounds 103 recording video clips 66 red-eye removal 73 redial feature 144 é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 166
rejec ting call s 116 remot e ma ilbox 107 remote SIM mode 99 ringing to nes 32, 33 roaming 146 S scenes, image and vide o 63 screen settings 139 scroll key 2 6 securit y certificat es 141 web browser 92 WEP 149 WPA 149 security code 19 security module 14 3 self-ti mer, camera 64 sent messages folde r 104 service commands 10 4 service messages 107 setting wi zard 22 settings access point name control 150 access points 147 applications 151 Bluetoot h connect ivity 97 call barring 145 call divert 145 calls 144 camera 67 certificates 141 configuration 150 display 139 enhancemen ts 140 FM transmitter 51 home network 80 internet radio 58 language 14 0 Navi wheel 143 network 146 packet data 149 packet data access points 147 personalisation 139 podcasting 52 positioni ng 143 RealPlayer 1 01 SIP 150 standby 139 Video Centre 86 video sharing 120 Visual Radio 56 web browser 92 WLAN 149, 15 0 WLAN internet access points 148 shared video 119 shooting modes, camera 63 signature, digital 142 SIM card contacts 125 messages 109 SIM card security 141 SIP 150 slide sho w 72 SMS (short message service) 104 software ap pl ications 133 software updat e 19 songs 45 sounds 32 speaker phone 29 Speech 138 speed dialli ng 116 standby mode 33, 139 streaming li nks 78 streaming media 101 Symbian applications 13 3 synchronisation settings 82 synchronisatio n of data 137 é 2008 Nok ia. All r ights rese rved. 167
T text messages receiving and reading 106 replying to 106 sending 104 settings 110 SIM messages 109 themes 31 time and date 126 time zone sett ings 127 time-ou t for bac klight 139 tones ring settings 32, 33 settings 139 toolbar 60, 71 transferrin g data 23 transf erring mu sic 48 troubleshooting 151 trust se ttings 142 U unlocking keypad 26, 141 UPIN code 1 9 UPnP (Univers al Plug and Play architecture) 79 UPUK co de 19 USB cable connection 100 useful information 18 V video calls 118 , 119 options during 118 Video Centre 84 downloading 84 viewing 84 video clips editing 74 effects 74 sending 75 shared 119 sound clips in 74 transitions 74 video settings 69 Visual Radio 55 settings 56 voice applications 136 voice calls See calls voice commands 117, 13 6 voice recorder 103 volume controls 29 W wallpaper 31 web conne ction 87 web logs 89 week settings, calendar 12 8 welcome 22 welcome note 139 WEP 149 widgets 89 wireless LAN (WLAN) 93 wireless LAN setti ngs 150 Word, Microsof t 129 world clock 127 WPA 149 Z zooming 61, 6 6 é 2008 Nok ia. All rights reserved . 168
Nokia Care Online The Nokia Care web suppo rt provides you wit h more inform ation on our onli ne services. INTERACTIV E DEMONSTRATIONS Learn how to set up your phone for the first time, and find out more about its features. Intera ctive Dem o nstr ations give step-by - step instructions on using your phone. USERâÂÂS GUIDE The online UserâÂÂs Guide contains detailed in formation on your phone. Remembe r to check regularly for updates. SOFTWARE Make the most of your phone with software fo r your phone and PC. Nokia PC Suite connects your phone and PC s o you can manage your calendar, contacts, mus ic and images, while other applications complement its use. SETTINGS Certain phone funct ions, such as multimed ia messaging, mobile browsing and email*, may require settings before you can use them. Ha ve t hem sent to your phone free of charge. *Not available on all phones. INTERACTIVE DEMONSTRATI ONS SOFTWARE USERâÂÂS GUIDE SETTINGS
HOW DO I USE MY PHONE? The Set Up section, at www.nokia-asia.com/setup , helps you prepare your phone for use. Fa miliarise yourself wi th phone functions and features b y referring to t he Guides and Dem os section at www.nokia-asia.com/guides . HOW DO I SYNCHRONISE MY PHONE AND PC? Connecting your phone to a compatible PC with the requisite Nokia PC Suite version from www.nokia-asia.com/pcsuite lets you synchronise your calendar and contacts. WHERE CAN I GET SOFTWARE FOR MY PHONE? Get more out of your phone with downl o ads from the Soft ware section at www.nokia-asia.com/software . WHERE CAN I FIND ANSWERS TO COMMON Q UESTIONS? Look up the FAQ section at www.nokia-asia.com/faq for answers to you r questions on yo ur phone and other Nokia products and services. HOW DO I KEEP UP WITH NOKIA NEWS? Subscribe online at www.nokia-asia.com/signup and be the first to know about the latest products and promotions. Sign up for "Nokia Connections" to receive monthly updates on latest phones and technology. Sign up for "Be The First To Know" to get exc lusive previews of new phone announcements or subscribe to "Promotional Communication s" for upcoming even ts. Should you still require furthe r assistance, please refer to www.nokia-asia.com/contactus . For additional informati on on repair services, please visi t www.nokia-asia.com/repair . Please visit your own country site for more details: Australia and New Zealand www.nokia.com.au/support Malaysia www.nokia.com.my/suppo rt India www.nokia.co.in/support Philippine s www.nokia.com.ph/support Indonesia www.nokia.co.id/support Singapore www.nokia.com.sg/support Japan www.nokia.co.jp/support Th ailand www.nokia.co.th/support If your country is not lis ted above, please visit www.nokia-asia.com/support .